ReferenceGuide E

Safety Information
Product Overview
Taking and Reading

X-ray of a Subject
Searching and Referring

Studies
Verifying and
Processing Images
Using Report Function

(CR-IR 391CL)
Reference Guide Image Storage
from Each Window
11th Edition September 2019
Image Print
from Each Window
Editing Study Information
Verifying with the Indicators
Changing Display Settings

of the “Main” Window and
“Image Viewer”
Configuring “Client Utilities”
Setting “User Utilities”
Troubleshooting
This Reference Guide describes details on how to operate the FCR PRIMA Console
(CR-IR 391CL) and cautions to be observed when operating it. Please read the
Daily Inspection and
Reference Guide thoroughly before actually operating the FCR PRIMA Console
Maintenance
(CR-IR 391CL) system. After reading this manual, store it nearby the FCR PRIMA
Console (CR-IR 391CL) so that you can see it whenever necessary. Please also
Appendix
read the “FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) Operation Manual” which provides
Index
the basic operation methods and operations overview of the FCR PRIMA Console
(CR-IR 391CL).
897N101440K
Introduction
This Reference Guide applies to the following software.
• FCR PRIMA Console Software V4.2(B)
This Reference Guide offers the reader a summary insight into the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR
391CL) and proceeds to present information prerequisite to using the product, including operating
instructions and precautions, and tips on daily inspections and care.
FCR PRIMA Console is a CR workstation intended to provide diagnostic quality images and measuring
function to aid the doctor in diagnosis, and also is a viewer for US referral images.
CAUTION
1 No part or all of this manual may be reproduced in any form without prior permission.
2 The information contained in this manual may be subject to change without prior notice.
3 FUJIFILM Corporation shall not be liable for malfunctions and damages resulting from
installation, relocation, remodeling, maintenance, and repair performed by dealers other than
those specified by FUJIFILM Corporation.
4 FUJIFILM Corporation shall not be liable for malfunctions and damages of FUJIFILM Corporation
products due to products of other manufacturers not supplied by FUJIFILM Corporation.
remodeling, maintenance, and repair using repair parts other than those specified by
FUJIFILM Corporation.
negligence of the precautions and operating methods contained in this manual.
7 FUJIFILM Corporation shall not be liable for malfunctions and damages resulting from use
under environment conditions outside the range specified for this product, such as the
power supply, installation environment, etc., as described in this manual.
natural disasters, such as fires, earthquakes, floods, lightning, etc.
Caution: R
x Only in the United States (Federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician)
This system is classified as a medical device under EC Directive 93/42/EEC.

This equipment has been designed on the assumption that the patient would not come into direct
contact with it or for operation by appropriately trained operator.
Process waste correctly, as stipulated by local law or any regulations that apply.
When discarding the CR-IR 391CL that incorporates the lithium battery, be sure to contact a licensed
waste disposal contractor because it cannot be disposed of as a general waste.
Trademarks
FCR is a trademark or a registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation.
Other holders’ trademarks
Microsoft, Windows, Windows 7, Windows 8 and Windows 10 are the registered trademarks or trademarks
of US Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
Windows is the registered trademark of US Microsoft Corporation in the U. S. A. and other countries.
Microsoft Internet Explorer logo is the registered trademark of US Microsoft Corporation in the U. S. A.
and other countries.
All other company names and product names described in this manual are the trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective holders.
The product uses the “ExcelCreator 2007” of Advance Software Co., Ltd. based on the redistribution
conditions.
Copyright © 2009-2019 FUJIFILM Corporation. All rights reserved.
ii FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K

How to Read This Guide
■ Basic Page Organization

The pages of this document is basically organized into the following elements:
Lead
Section title
Describes information that
A brief explanation of
is about to be explained in
the operation that is
this section together with
covered in the section.
supplementary information.
Item Title
7.2 Displaying Dialogs for Saving
A brief explanation of
the operation that is Saves images from the “Refer” window, “Image Viewer”, and “Study Operations” tab of study list window.
covered under the item. 7.2.1 Starting from the “Refer” Window
Searches the study and saves the images shown in the “Refer” window to each media.
This section describes how to display dialogs for saving from the “Refer” window according to the
Index
Explanatory Text
storage media.
A list of headings
A summary introduction to ■ Operation Window ■ Displaying Dialogs for Saving that offers you a
quick clue to opening
the topic described under ● “Main” Window - “Refer” Window 1. Search the study.
chapters of interest.
the item, with precautions Select the patient and the image to be “4.3.1 Searching for Studies”
referred.
that should deserve (A) 2. From the “study list” (A), select the patient in
special notice, if any. a “Verified” study status.
7
→ The image is displayed in the “Refer” window (B).
3. Select the image (B) to be saved.
Image Storage from Each Window

(B) 4. Click the desired button (C) according to the
storage media.
Functions of Each Button
Display Windows Buttons Functions
Operation procedure
A window that opens Save to storage disks*1
“7.3 Saving to Storage Disks” A sequence of
during an operation. Transmit to the DICOM Server*1
numbered operational
“7.4 Transmitting Studies to DICOM Server”
Save to PDI Disks*1

steps to guide the user
“7.7 Saving to PDI Disks” through an operation.
(C)
*1 The image whose study status is “Verified“ cannot
be saved or transmitted.
If the selected studies except for “Verified” are

(D)*1 selected, a message displays to verify.
To continue excluding the studies which are not able
to process, click [OK].
*1 When the buttons (C) are not displayed, operation

items must be added in the “Display Settings”.
“11.1.10 Display Settings of “Refer” window”
FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K 7-3
Page number
An indication of the
order of a particular
page in a chapter.
FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K iii

■ Marks Used in This Guide
Marks are used in the descriptions to mark supplementary information and information that must be observed while
using the FCR PRIMA Console. For your safety and correct use, always observe a Warning or Caution.
Marks Contents
Indicates a dangerous situation which, if you ignored or could not follow for
WARNING some reason, could result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if you ignored or could not follow for
CAUTION some reason, could result in a slight or moderate degree of personal injury or
material damage.
Indicates information that should be noted.
Indicates information that may be helpful.
Indicates an item that provides details of the procedure or related information.
■ Manners of Description
In this Reference Guide, button names, menu actions, window names and messages appearing in the
operational windows are designated in the following manners:
● Buttons (example)
[Complete]
Names of buttons in the operational windows are enclosed
in brackets [ ], regardless of their shape.
● Menus (example)
[Annotation] – [Rectangle]
Menu names are enclosed in brackets [ ].
Sequences of menu choices are designated in the
format [ ] – [ ].
In this example, users are supposed to choose
[Annotation] first, then [Rectangle].
● Windows (example)
“Read Image” window
Window names are enclosed in quotation marks “ ”.
iv FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K

Contents
Introduction.............................................................................................................................ii
How to Read This Guide......................................................................................................iii
■ Basic Page Organization...............................................................................................................iii
■ Marks Used in This Guide.............................................................................................................iv
■ Manners of Description..................................................................................................................iv
Contents..................................................................................................................................v
Chapter 1 Safety Information
1.1 Precautions Before Operating This Equipment............................................. 1-2

1.2 Notes on Using This Equipment
(for Safety Assurance and Risk Prevention)................................................... 1-3
1.3 Safety..................................................................................................................... 1-4
■ Preventing Explosion..................................................................................................................1-4
■ Preventing Electrical Shock........................................................................................................1-4
■ Connection Instruction................................................................................................................1-4
1.4 Precautions in Using the FCR PRIMA Console.............................................. 1-5
■ Precautions when Using.............................................................................................................1-5
■ Precautions when Installing........................................................................................................1-7
■ Precautions when Reading Images...........................................................................................1-7
■ Precautions when Managing Data.............................................................................................1-8
■ Precautions when Processing Image........................................................................................1-8
■ Precautions when Exposing.......................................................................................................1-9
■ Precautions when Saving Data..................................................................................................1-9
■ Precaution when Outputting.......................................................................................................1-9
Chapter 2 Product Overview
2.1 FCR PRIMA Console Highlights........................................................................ 2-2

■ Main Features of FCR PRIMA Console.....................................................................................2-2
■ System Configuration Example..................................................................................................2-3
■ Restrictions..................................................................................................................................2-4
2.2 Name and Window of Each Part....................................................................... 2-5
■ Display Window...........................................................................................................................2-5
2.3 Flow for Utilizing the System............................................................................. 2-6
2.4 Version Information............................................................................................. 2-8
■ Operation Windows....................................................................................................................2-8
■ Checking Version Information....................................................................................................2-8
FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K v
2.5 Starting up and Exiting....................................................................................... 2-9
2.5.1 Starting up FCR PRIMA Console........................................................... 2-9
■ Operation Device / Operation Windows....................................................................................2-9
■ Starting up.................................................................................................................................2-10
■ Starting up the Server Application ...........................................................................................2-11
■ Starting up the Client Application.............................................................................................2-11
■ Starting up Each Function from the Server Application Icon..................................................2-11
2.5.2 Exiting FCR PRIMA Console................................................................. 2-12
■ Operation Windows..................................................................................................................2-12
■ Logging off the Current User....................................................................................................2-13
■ Exiting the Client Application....................................................................................................2-13
■ Exiting the Server Application ..................................................................................................2-13
■ Shutting down the PC...............................................................................................................2-14
2.6 Protecting the PC when Temporarily Leaving the Site................................ 2-15
■ Locking the PC..........................................................................................................................2-15
■ Unlocking the PC......................................................................................................................2-15
2.7 Before Using Disks........................................................................................... 2-16
■ Precautions...............................................................................................................................2-16
■ Disk Types.................................................................................................................................2-17
■ Drive Types................................................................................................................................2-18
2.8 Setting up Disks................................................................................................ 2-19
■ Setting up Disks........................................................................................................................2-20
■ Ejecting Disk..............................................................................................................................2-21
■ Copying Disks...........................................................................................................................2-22
■ When a Disk Becoming Full.....................................................................................................2-23
Chapter 3 Taking and Reading X-ray of a Subject
3.1 Flow of Taking and Reading X-ray.................................................................... 3-2

3.2 Registering the Patient Information to be Exposed....................................... 3-3
■ Registering New Patient Information.........................................................................................3-4
■ Registering the Patient Information through DICOM MWM Server (Optional)........................3-5
■ Acquiring the Order Information through DICOM MWM Server (Optional).............................3-5
■ Editing Patient Information..........................................................................................................3-7
3.3 Exposing Images................................................................................................. 3-8
■ Operation Window......................................................................................................................3-8
■ Selecting the Exposure Menu and Taking X-rays.....................................................................3-8
■ Exposing a Study which has not Completed the Exposure......................................................3-9
■ Scheduling an Exposure Operation...........................................................................................3-9
vi FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K

3.4 Reading and Viewing........................................................................................ 3-10
■ Operation Window....................................................................................................................3-10
■ Read Images in the Cassette...................................................................................................3-10
■ Viewing Read Images...............................................................................................................3-11
■ Finishing Exposure / Reading..................................................................................................3-12
3.5 Import Various Images and Refer................................................................... 3-13
■ Importing DICOM Images from the Media or Folder (Import DICOM Off-line)......................3-13
Chapter 4 Searching and Referring Studies
4.1 Flow for Searching / Referring ......................................................................... 4-2

4.2 Functions of Study List...................................................................................... 4-3
4.3 Searching for Studies and Creating New Queries......................................... 4-6
4.3.1 Searching for Studies.............................................................................. 4-6
■ Searches with Predefined Queries............................................................................................4-6
■ Inputting the Search Conditions to Search for Studies.............................................................4-7
■ Narrowing down Search...........................................................................................................4-10
4.3.2 Creating New Queries............................................................................ 4-11
■ Creating New Queries..............................................................................................................4-11
4.3.3 Editing Queries....................................................................................... 4-13
■ Editing Queries..........................................................................................................................4-13
4.4 Manipulating Studies........................................................................................ 4-15
4.4.1 Starting up the Start Study/Image Viewer........................................... 4-15
■ Starting up the Start Study/Image Viewer................................................................................4-15
4.4.2 Reconducting a Study and Editing its Study Information............... 4-16
4.4.3 Locking and Unlocking Studies........................................................... 4-16
4.4.4 Completing and Verifying Studies....................................................... 4-17
4.4.5 Deleting Studies...................................................................................... 4-18
4.4.6 Saving, Printing, and Transmitting Study Images............................. 4-18
4.4.7 Outputing Study Information in Tabular Format............................... 4-19
4.5 Referring Images............................................................................................... 4-20
■ Manipulating Studies.................................................................................................................4-20
4.6 Right-click Operation on the Study List......................................................... 4-22
FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K vii

Chapter 5 Verifying and Processing Images
5.1 Flow of Verifying and Processing Images....................................................... 5-2

5.2 Outline of "Image Viewer" Window.................................................................. 5-3
5.3 Selecting and Arranging Images....................................................................... 5-4
■ Descriptions of Functions...........................................................................................................5-4
■ Switching Displayed Images......................................................................................................5-5
■ Displaying the Image of Previous or Next Study.......................................................................5-5
■ Adding a Sub-window and Displaying the Image......................................................................5-5
■ Displaying Multiple Sub-windows Lined up...............................................................................5-6
■ Displaying Multiple Images Lined up in the Sub-window..........................................................5-6
■ Maximizing the Sub-window.......................................................................................................5-6
■ Close the Sub-window................................................................................................................5-6
■ Switching the Display Position...................................................................................................5-7
■ Displaying/Hiding Thumbnail Images.........................................................................................5-7
■ Displaying/Hiding Various Information on the Image................................................................5-8
■ Displaying as a Cine Display Mode...........................................................................................5-8
■ Registering Displayed Images as a Key Image........................................................................5-9
■ Registering Displayed Images as a Bookmark.........................................................................5-9
■ Comparing with an Image Registered as a Bookmark...........................................................5-10
■ Displaying the DICOM Header Information.............................................................................5-11
■ Clearing Images........................................................................................................................5-11
5.4 Adjusting Image Display.................................................................................. 5-12
■ Descriptions of Functions.........................................................................................................5-12
■ Changing the Gradation (Contrast and Density).....................................................................5-14
■ Magnifying/Reducing................................................................................................................5-15
■ Moving a Display Position while Magnification/reduction......................................................5-16
■ Magnifying Images by Magnifying Glass.................................................................................5-16
■ Moving Images..........................................................................................................................5-17
■ Reversing Images.....................................................................................................................5-17
■ Rotating and Flipping................................................................................................................5-18
■ Editing FCR Image Processing Parameters............................................................................5-18
■ Registering Preset Image Processing Settings.......................................................................5-21
■ Applying Preset Image Processing Settings...........................................................................5-21
■ Linking Image Processing Among Multiple Images................................................................5-22
■ Printing the Current View of the Displayed Image...................................................................5-22
■ Resetting the Image Processings............................................................................................5-23
■ Switching the Tool Using the Quick Mouse Function..............................................................5-23
■ Operation with the touch panel monitor ..................................................................................5-24
viii FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K

5.5 Adding Annotations on Images...................................................................... 5-25
■ Descriptions of Functions.........................................................................................................5-25
■ Adding Arrows/Shapes (Ellipses, True Circles, Rectangles, and Polygons)........................5-27
■ Adding Texts..............................................................................................................................5-27
■ Adding Markers.........................................................................................................................5-28
■ Adding Measured Lengths.......................................................................................................5-28
■ Adding Measured Simplified Cardiothoracic Ratios................................................................5-29
■ Adding Measured Cardiothoracic Ratios.................................................................................5-30
■ Adding Measured Interline Angles...........................................................................................5-31
■ Adding Measured Dual Angles.................................................................................................5-32
■ Adding Measured Cobb Angles...............................................................................................5-32
■ Adding Vertical Interline Angle..................................................................................................5-33
■ Adding Orthogonal Line Compare...........................................................................................5-34
■ Adding Three line segments angle B.......................................................................................5-34
■ Adding Perpendicular segment measurement B....................................................................5-35
■ Adding Measured Pixel Values................................................................................................5-35
■ Adding Measured Various ROIs...............................................................................................5-35
■ Editing the Added Annotations.................................................................................................5-36
■ Deleting Added Annotations.....................................................................................................5-38
■ Switching the Tool Using the Quick Mouse Function..............................................................5-38
5.6 Free Drawing on “Image Viewer” for Informed Consent............................ 5-39
■ Using the Free Drawing Function.............................................................................................5-39
5.7 Using the Measurement Summary................................................................. 5-41
5.7.1 Outline of “Measurement summary” Window................................... 5-41
5.7.2 Creating and Editing the Measurement Summary............................ 5-42
■ Creating/Editing the Measurement Summary.........................................................................5-43
■ Editing the Display Settings of Graph......................................................................................5-43
■ Editing the Study Assessment..................................................................................................5-44
5.7.3 Saving/Outputting the Measurement Summary................................ 5-45
■ Saving the Measurement Summary........................................................................................5-45
■ Printing the Measurement Summary in the Report Format....................................................5-45
■ Outputting the Measurement Summary in the CSV Format...................................................5-45
5.7.4 Changing the Measurement Summary Settings............................... 5-46
■ Changing the Settings for Individual Users..............................................................................5-46
■ Changing the Settings for the Entire System...........................................................................5-48
■ Restoring to the Standard Settings..........................................................................................5-50
■ Importing the Settings...............................................................................................................5-50
■ Exporting the Settings...............................................................................................................5-50
FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K ix

5.8 Applying Blackening Processing................................................................... 5-51
■ Notes for Performing Exposures..............................................................................................5-51
■ Applying Blackening Processing by Specifying a Range.......................................................5-52
■ Applying Auto Blackening Processing.....................................................................................5-53
■ Editing Blackening Processing.................................................................................................5-53
■ Deleting Blackening Processing...............................................................................................5-54
■ Deleting All Blackening Processing..........................................................................................5-54
5.9 Applying Trimming Processing...................................................................... 5-55
■ Notes for Performing Exposures..............................................................................................5-55
■ Add a Trimming Frame Automatically......................................................................................5-56
■ Add a Trimming Frame Manually.............................................................................................5-56
■ Add a Standard-size Trimming Frame.....................................................................................5-57
■ Use “Fit to window” to Magnify the Image Surrounded by the Trimming Frame...................5-58
■ Edit a Trimming Frame.............................................................................................................5-58
■ Release the Processing of Trimming.......................................................................................5-58
■ Complement: The Display/output of the Image which was Applied
with Trimming Processing.........................................................................................................5-59
5.10 Saving/Verifying/Suspending Images............................................................ 5-60

■ Saving the Image Processing Result and Annotation.............................................................5-60
■ Verifying/Suspending Images...................................................................................................5-60
Chapter 6 Using Report Function
6.1 Outline of “Report” Window.............................................................................. 6-2

6.2 Creating/Editing the Report............................................................................... 6-3
■ Creating/Editing the Report........................................................................................................6-4
■ Saving/Verifying a Report...........................................................................................................6-5
■ Deleting Reports.........................................................................................................................6-5
6.3 Editing the Schema or Fixed Phrase................................................................ 6-6
■ Editing the Schema.....................................................................................................................6-7
■ Editing the Fixed Phrase.............................................................................................................6-7
■ Registering the Fixed Phrase.....................................................................................................6-7
x FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K

Chapter 7 Image Storage from Each Window
7.1 Relationships between Windows and Storage Destinations....................... 7-2

7.2 Displaying Dialogs for Saving........................................................................... 7-3
7.2.1 Starting from the “Refer” Window......................................................... 7-3
■ Displaying Dialogs for Saving.....................................................................................................7-3
7.2.2 Starting from the “Image Viewer”.......................................................... 7-4
7.2.3 Starting from the “Study List” Window................................................ 7-5
7.3 Saving to Storage Disks..................................................................................... 7-6
7.3.1 Using the Storage Disk............................................................................ 7-6
■ Saving the Screen.......................................................................................................................7-6
7.3.2 Using NAS/USB-HDD Utility (Optional)................................................. 7-7
■ Functions on NAS/USB-HDD Utility...........................................................................................7-7
■ Starting up the NAS/USB-HDD Utility........................................................................................7-8
■ Exiting the NAS/USB-HDD Utility...............................................................................................7-8
■ Storing the Information in the Image Information Database into the NAS/USB-HDD.............7-8
■ Restoring the Image Information Database Using the Information in the NAS/USB-HDD.....7-9
■ Re-registor the NAS/USB-HDD.................................................................................................7-9
7.4 Transmitting Studies to DICOM Server (Optional)....................................... 7-10
■ Saving the Screen.....................................................................................................................7-10
7.5 Saving to Work Disks........................................................................................ 7-11
7.6 Saving in a General-Purpose File Format (Optional)................................... 7-13
7.7 Saving to PDI Disks........................................................................................... 7-16
FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K xi

Chapter 8 Image Print from Each Window
8.1 Printing Types and Flow..................................................................................... 8-2

■ Types of Printing.........................................................................................................................8-2
■ Printing Flow................................................................................................................................8-3
8.2 Displaying Print Dialogs..................................................................................... 8-4
8.2.1 Starting from the “Refer” Window......................................................... 8-4
■ Displaying Print Dialogs..............................................................................................................8-4
8.2.2 Starting from the “Image Viewer”.......................................................... 8-5
8.2.3 Starting from the “Study List”................................................................ 8-6
8.3 Printing on a Film (Optional).............................................................................. 8-7
■ Printing on a Film........................................................................................................................8-7
8.4 Free Layout Printing........................................................................................... 8-9
■ Free Layout Printing..................................................................................................................8-10
■ Creating Additional Image Information Formats......................................................................8-12
■ Editing Additional Image Information Formats.........................................................................8-12
■ Deleting Formats.......................................................................................................................8-12
■ Finishing....................................................................................................................................8-12
8.5 Printing Report................................................................................................... 8-13
■ Printing a Report.......................................................................................................................8-13
■ Saving a Report as PDF File....................................................................................................8-13
Chapter 9 Editing Study Information
9.1 Starting up the Editing Function....................................................................... 9-2

■ Starting up...................................................................................................................................9-3
■ Starting from the “Read Image” Window...................................................................................9-4
■ Starting from the “Image Viewer” Window.................................................................................9-5
9.2 Adding Exposure Menus.................................................................................... 9-6
■ Adding an Exposure Menu.........................................................................................................9-6
xii FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K

9.3 Changing Exposure Menus............................................................................... 9-7
■ Changing an Exposure Menu.....................................................................................................9-7
9.4 Deleting Exposure Menus/Canceling the Deletion........................................ 9-8
■ Deleting an Exposure Menu/ Canceling the Deletion...............................................................9-8
9.5 Inactivating Exposed Images/Activating the Inactivated Images................ 9-9
■ Inactivating/Activating Exposure Menus....................................................................................9-9
9.6 Registering Re-exposure Menus.................................................................... 9-10
■ Registering a Re-exposure Menu............................................................................................9-10
9.7 Exchanging Images.......................................................................................... 9-11
■ Exchange Incorrectly Read Images to the Correct Exposure Menus....................................9-11
9.8 Setting for Printing, Saving, and Transmitting............................................. 9-12
■ Setting up the Destination and Timing for Outputting and Saving..........................................9-12
■ Changing the Detailed Settings................................................................................................9-13
9.9 Editing Patient Information.............................................................................. 9-15
■ Editing Patient Information........................................................................................................9-15
9.10 Changing the Order of Menus in the “Read Image” Window..................... 9-16
Chapter 10 Verifying with the Indicators
10.1 Viewing Indicators and Activating Functions............................................... 10-2

10.1.1 Viewing Indicators.................................................................................. 10-2
■ Position of “Indicator”................................................................................................................10-2
■ Indicator State and Corresponding Notice...............................................................................10-3
10.1.2 Activating Functions from Indicators.................................................. 10-4
■ Opening “Indicator” Windows...................................................................................................10-4
10.2 Verifying the Status of Image Reader and Cleaning Procedures.............. 10-5
■ Verifying the Status of the Image Reader................................................................................10-5
■ Cleaning the Scanner of the Image Reader............................................................................10-5
■ Verifying the status of the Image Reader and Exiting Scanner Cleaning..............................10-5
FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K xiii

10.3 Verifying Disk Status and Maintenance......................................................... 10-6
■ Verifying Disk Status.................................................................................................................10-6
■ Disk Maintenance.....................................................................................................................10-7
■ Verifying Disk Status of the Image Reader and Exiting Scanner Cleaning............................10-7
10.4 Verifying NAS/USB-HDD Status (Optional)................................................... 10-8
■ Verifying NAS/USB-HDD Status..............................................................................................10-8
■ Exiting the Verification of NAS/USB-HDD Status....................................................................10-8
10.5 Verifying Film Printer Status (Optional)......................................................... 10-9
■ Verifying Film Printer Status.....................................................................................................10-9
■ Verifying the Status of the Film Printer.....................................................................................10-9
10.6 Verifying Image Output Status ..................................................................... 10-10
■ Operation Window..................................................................................................................10-10
■ Verifying Image Output Status................................................................................................10-10
■ Canceling Image Output.........................................................................................................10-10
■ Outputting an Image Again that Has Once Failed to be Output...........................................10-10
■ Exiting the Verification of Image Output Status.....................................................................10-10
10.7 Verifying Events (Errors, Warnings or Information).................................. 10-11
■ Operation Windows................................................................................................................10-11
■ Verifying Events......................................................................................................................10-11
■ Exiting Events Verification......................................................................................................10-11
10.8 Replacing USB memory................................................................................. 10-12
■Preparing for Replacement......................................................................................................10-13
■Checking Status........................................................................................................................10-13
■Writing study Data in DVD Disks..............................................................................................10-13
■Replacing USB Memory...........................................................................................................10-14
■Formatting new USB memory..................................................................................................10-14
■Checking Status........................................................................................................................10-14
■Changing Drive Letter...............................................................................................................10-14
Chapter 11 Changing Display Settings of the

“Main” Window and “Image Viewer”
11.1 Display Settings of the “Main” Window......................................................... 11-2

11.1.1 Starting Up and Shutting Down the Display Setting Function........ 11-2
■ Starting Up.................................................................................................................................11-2
■ Shutting Down...........................................................................................................................11-3
xiv FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K

11.1.2 Initial Display Settings of the “Main” Window................................... 11-4
■ Setting the Initial Display when Started up..............................................................................11-4
11.1.3 Display Settings of “ID input” Window............................................... 11-5
■ Setting Items and Their Order to be Displayed in the “ID input” Window...............................11-5
11.1.4 Display Settings of “Study List” Window........................................... 11-6
■ Setting the Display Contents in the “Study List” Window........................................................11-6
11.1.5 Display Setting of “Study list operation” Window............................ 11-7
■ Setting items to be displayed on the “Study Operations” tab of “Study List”..........................11-7
■ Setting items to be displayed on the “Right-click Operation of Study List”.............................11-7
11.1.6 Display Setting of “Work List” Window (Optional)........................... 11-8
■ Setting the Display Contents in the “Network WL” Window....................................................11-8
11.1.7 Display Settings of “Search Conditions Input Window”.................. 11-9
■ Setting the Image Information Query.......................................................................................11-9
■ Adding/Editing the Image Information Query........................................................................11-10
■ Initializing the Setting Information...........................................................................................11-10
■ Setting the Search Range for the Image Information............................................................11-10
11.1.8 Display Settings of “FCR-Menus” Window.......................................11-11
■ Operation Windows................................................................................................................ 11-11
■ Setting the Display Contents in the “FCR” Window.............................................................. 11-11
11.1.9 Display Settings of Exposing and Reading...................................... 11-12
■ Setting Behavior on Selecting an Exposure Menu and on Reading Images with
the “Image Viewer”..................................................................................................................11-12
11.1.10 Display Settings of “Refer” Window................................................. 11-13

■ Setting Modalities to be Displayed in the Study List..............................................................11-13
■ Adding/editing modalities to be displayed in the study list....................................................11-14
■ Categorizing predefined modalities in detail..........................................................................11-14
■ Setting the Operation Icons in the Study List.........................................................................11-14
11.1.11 Setting the Font Size in the “Main” Window.................................... 11-15
■ Setting the Font Size for the “Main” Window.........................................................................11-15
11.2 Changing Settings of “Image Viewer” Window.......................................... 11-16
11.2.1 Starting the Customize Function....................................................... 11-16
■ Starting Up...............................................................................................................................11-16
FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K xv

11.2.2 Initial Settings of Annotation.............................................................. 11-18
■ Setting the Display/Tag Display of Annotations.....................................................................11-18
11.2.3 Setting the Attribute Information........................................................ 11-20
■ Setting Image Attribute Information........................................................................................11-20
11.2.4 Setting Reading Protocol.................................................................... 11-21
■ Setting the Default Display Layout of Each Modality............................................................11-21
11.2.5 Display Settings of Toolbar................................................................. 11-23
■ Setting the Display of Toolbar.................................................................................................11-23
11.2.6 Display Settings of Report.................................................................. 11-24
■ Setting the Display of Report..................................................................................................11-25
■ Creating a Format...................................................................................................................11-26
■ Editing Formats.......................................................................................................................11-27
■ Adding/Editing Output Template Tags....................................................................................11-28
11.2.7 Quick Mouse Setting............................................................................ 11-29
■ Setting Functions Used via Quick Mouse Operation............................................................11-29
11.2.8 Display Settings of Simplified Print................................................... 11-30
■ Switching Template File to be Used.......................................................................................11-30
■ Adding/Deleting Template Files..............................................................................................11-31
■ Setting the Attribute Information.............................................................................................11-31
11.2.9 Setting Window Processing Presets................................................. 11-32
■ Setting the Window Processing Presets................................................................................11-32
11.2.10 Display Setting of “Indicator” ............................................................ 11-33
■ Setting the Display Conditions...............................................................................................11-33
11.2.11 Display Setting of “Image Viewer” Window..................................... 11-34
■ Setting Actions during Image Display or Storage..................................................................11-34
11.2.12 Returning to Standard Settings.......................................................... 11-36
■ Returning to Standard Settings..............................................................................................11-36
11.2.13 Importing/Exporting Settings............................................................. 11-37
■ Import Settings........................................................................................................................11-37
■ Export Settings........................................................................................................................11-37
xvi FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K

Chapter 12 Configuring “Client Utilities”
12.1 Setting Items of “Client Utilities”.................................................................... 12-2

12.2 Starting up and Exiting “Client Utilities”....................................................... 12-2
■ Starting up the “Client Utilities”.................................................................................................12-3
■ Exiting the “Client Utilities”........................................................................................................12-3
12.3 Maintaining Patient Information...................................................................... 12-4
■ Registering New Patient Information.......................................................................................12-5
■ Modifying the Patient Information from the ID Input Field.......................................................12-5
■ Modifying the Patient Information from the Study List.............................................................12-5
■ Searching Patient Information..................................................................................................12-6
■ Deleting Patient Information.....................................................................................................12-6
■ Finishing Maintenance of Patient Information.........................................................................12-6
12.4 Verifying the IP Use Frequency....................................................................... 12-7
■ Verifying the IP Use Frequency................................................................................................12-7
■ Finishing Verification of IP Use Frequency..............................................................................12-7
12.5 Setting User Information (For Administrator)............................................... 12-8
12.5.1 User Information Maintenance............................................................. 12-8
■ Registering New User Information...........................................................................................12-9
■ Editing User Information.........................................................................................................12-10
■ Changing Display Order of Users..........................................................................................12-11
■ Deleting User Information.......................................................................................................12-11
■ Exiting User Information Maintenance...................................................................................12-11
12.5.2 Changing User Group Operational Authorities............................... 12-12
■ Descriptions of Functions.......................................................................................................12-12
■ Changing User Group Operational Authorities......................................................................12-13
■ Exiting the Change of User Group Operational Authorities..................................................12-13
12.5.3 Setting Images for Display in the “User Selection” Window......... 12-14
■ Adding Images for Display in the “User Selection” Window.................................................12-14
■ Deleting an Displayed Image from the “User Selection” Window........................................12-15
■ Exiting the Setup of Display Image........................................................................................12-15
12.6 Editing Information about the Logged-in User........................................... 12-16
■ Editing Information on the Logged-in User............................................................................12-16
FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K xvii

12.7 Verifying History Information........................................................................ 12-17
■ Verifying the Login/Logoff History...........................................................................................12-18
■ Verifying the Study Access History.........................................................................................12-18
■ Verifying the Image Storage/Print History..............................................................................12-19
■ Verifying the Backup/Restoration History..............................................................................12-19
■ Exiting Verification of History..................................................................................................12-19
12.8 Disk Maintenance ........................................................................................... 12-20
■ Updating Display of Disk Information.....................................................................................12-21
■ Replacing Disks......................................................................................................................12-21
■ Setting Disks as “Write Enabled” or “Write Disabled”............................................................12-22
■ Restoring Disks after Mismatch Occurred.............................................................................12-22
■ Restoring Information in Disks to Database..........................................................................12-23
■ Exiting Disk Maintenance.......................................................................................................12-23
Chapter 13 Setting “User Utilities”

13.1 Setting “User Utilities”...................................................................................... 13-2
13.2 Starting up and Exiting the “User Utilities”................................................... 13-3
■ Starting up the “User Utilities”...................................................................................................13-3
■ Exiting the “User Utilities”..........................................................................................................13-4
13.3 Setting the Exposure Menu and Study Menu............................................... 13-5
13.3.1 Setting the Exposure Menu................................................................... 13-6
■ Creating New “Exposure Menu”...............................................................................................13-6
■ Editing Exposure Menu..........................................................................................................13-12
■ Deleting Exposure Menu........................................................................................................13-12
13.3.2 Setting Study Menu.............................................................................. 13-13
■ Creating New Study Menu.....................................................................................................13-13
■ Editing Study Menus...............................................................................................................13-16
■ Deleting Study Menus.............................................................................................................13-16
13.3.3 Setting the Display Menu Group........................................................ 13-17
■ Creating New Display Menu Group.......................................................................................13-17
■ Editing Display Group Menu...................................................................................................13-18
13.4 Setting the Character String Annotated on a Film..................................... 13-20
■ Registering/Editing Character String Annotated on a Film...................................................13-20
■ Deleting Character String to be Annotated on Film...............................................................13-21
■ Changing Position of a Character String Button....................................................................13-21
■ Applying Settings to Film Mark...............................................................................................13-21
xviii FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K
13.5 Setting of Printing, Saving and Transmitting Images................................ 13-22
■ Setting the Output Destination...............................................................................................13-22
13.6 Auto-Determine Settings................................................................................ 13-26
■ Set the Auto-Determine Time Period.....................................................................................13-26
13.7 Image Deletion Settings................................................................................. 13-27
■ Changing the Time Period for Data Storage.........................................................................13-27
13.8 Backup Notification Settings......................................................................... 13-28
■ Setting Backup Notification.....................................................................................................13-28
13.9 Automatically Startup Settings..................................................................... 13-29
■ Client Application Startup Settings.........................................................................................13-29
13.10 Prefix Display Settings................................................................................... 13-30
■ Setting Patient Prefix..............................................................................................................13-30
13.11 Setting Image Incidental Information Display Contents........................... 13-31
13.12 Loading Patient Information.......................................................................... 13-32
■ Patient Information Input Format............................................................................................13-32
■ Creating a File of Patient Information to Import.....................................................................13-33
■ Importing Patient Information.................................................................................................13-35
13.13 Media Consistency Check............................................................................. 13-36
■ Media Consistency Check......................................................................................................13-36
■ Result and Remedy................................................................................................................13-37
13.14 History Information Consistency Check..................................................... 13-39
■ History Information Consistency Check.................................................................................13-39
13.15 Automatically Logoff....................................................................................... 13-40
■ Setting Automatic Logoff.........................................................................................................13-40
13.16 Adding/Deleting User Marker........................................................................ 13-41
■ Registering User’s Markers....................................................................................................13-41
■ Removing User’s Markers......................................................................................................13-41
13.17 Preset Setting................................................................................................... 13-42
■ Assigning Preset.....................................................................................................................13-42
FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K xix

Chapter 14 Troubleshooting
14.1 PC does Not Start.............................................................................................. 14-2

14.2 PC is Inoperative............................................................................................... 14-3
14.3 PC does Not Shut down................................................................................... 14-5
14.4 Event Indicator is Blinking............................................................................... 14-6
14.5 Error Message is Displayed............................................................................. 14-7
14.6 Image is Streaked.............................................................................................. 14-8
■ Remedial Action........................................................................................................................14-8
14.7 Message “Not Logged In” is Displayed
when Trying to Operate the Screen................................................................ 14-9
14.8 Window Disappears........................................................................................ 14-10
14.9 Disk cannot be Removed............................................................................... 14-11
14.10 Toolbar is Not Displayed on “Image Viewer”.............................................. 14-12
14.11 Study was Scheduled or Registered but Study List is Unchanged........ 14-13
14.12 Unintended Studies Appear on Study List.................................................. 14-14
14.13 Unable to Print or Save Images from “Image Viewer”.............................. 14-15
14.14 The “Webpage unavailable while offline” Dialog Appeared..................... 14-16
■ Actions.....................................................................................................................................14-16
14.15 System Becomes “Not Responding” Status
by Screen Operation During PDI Creation.................................................. 14-17
■ Remedial Action......................................................................................................................14-17
Chapter 15 Daily Inspection and Maintenance
15.1 Daily Inspections and Maintenances............................................................. 15-2

15.2 Backing up Information of Patient, Setting, Log, and Report.................... 15-3
■ Starting up the “Backup Utilities”..............................................................................................15-4
■ Backing up.................................................................................................................................15-5
■ Restoring...................................................................................................................................15-6
■ Collecting Maintenance Log.....................................................................................................15-7
■ Shutting down the “Backup Utilities”........................................................................................15-8
15.3 Maintenance Record Sheet.............................................................................. 15-9
15.4 Maintenance and Inspection.......................................................................... 15-10
■ Maintenance and Inspection Items Assigned to Specified Dealer.......................................15-10
xx FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K

Appendix A Main Specifications
A.1 Specifications......................................................................................................A-2
■ PC............................................................................................................................................... A-2
■ Standard Monitor........................................................................................................................ A-3
■ DIN Standard-Compliant Monitor.............................................................................................. A-4
■ Touch Panel Monitor.................................................................................................................. A-4
A.2 External View and Weight..................................................................................A-5
■ PC............................................................................................................................................... A-5
■ Standard Monitor........................................................................................................................ A-6
■ DIN Standard-Compliant Monitor.............................................................................................. A-7
■ Touch Panel Monitor.................................................................................................................. A-9
Appendix B PDI Disk Image Display
B.1 PDI Disk Image Display Method........................................................................B-2
Appendix Z Precautions for Exposure
Z.1 Precautions to Take Before Exposure............................................................. Z-2

Z.2 Precautions to Take in Each Mode................................................................... Z-3
Z.2.1 Precautions for Exposure in the AUTO MODE.................................... Z-3
Z.2.2 Precautions for Exposure in the SEMI-AUTO MODE.......................... Z-6
Z.2.3 Precautions for Exposure in the FIX MODE......................................... Z-6
Z.3 Other Precautions............................................................................................... Z-7
Index
FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K xxi

xxii FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K
1
Safety Information
Chapter
Safety Information
1.1 Precautions Before Operating This Equipment................ 1-2

(for Safety Assurance and Risk Prevention)..................... 1-3
1.3 Safety....................................................................................1-4
1.4 Precautions in Using the FCR PRIMA Console................. 1-5

1.1 Precautions Before
1
Operating This Equipment
Safety Information
Before using this equipment, please read “Precautions Before Operating This Equipment” carefully so
that you can operate it correctly.
Whenever you operate this equipment, be sure to observe those precautions. Failure to do so may
cause injuries or property damages.
The institution where the equipment is installed is responsible for its use and
maintenance.
In addition, this equipment should not be used by persons other than doctors
or suitably trained staff.
Process waste correctly, as stipulated by local law or any regulations that

apply.
1-2 FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K

1
(for Safety Assurance and Risk Prevention)
Safety Information
Please read through these notes before using the equipment.
● Notes on Using This Equipment (for Safety Assurance and Risk Prevention)
1 Allow only skilled personnel to use the equipment.
2 Take notice of these precautions in installing the equipment:
(1) Locate the equipment to guard against splashes of water.
(2) Locate the equipment to protect against any ambient conditions that could adversely affect its
performance, such as atmospheric pressure, temperature, humidity, ventilation, sunlight, dust
and air containing salt or sulfur content.
(3) Locate the equipment to keep it stable, protected from tilting, vibration, impact (including
impact during transit) and so on.
(4) Do not install the equipment where chemicals are stored or in or near sources of gases.
(5) Observe the line frequency and voltage and the allowable current (or power consumption).
(6) If the equipment is powered from batteries, check their status (standing, polarities and so on).
(7) Connect the ground wire properly.
3 Before using the equipment, take notice of these precautions:
(1) Check the switches for contact, polarities and dial settings, the meters and so on to ensure
that the equipment works properly.
(2) Check that the ground wire is fully connected.
(3) Check that all cords are connected correctly and fully.
(4) Remember fully that combined use of equipment could cause incorrect diagnoses, unsafety, or else.
(5) Recheck the external circuits that are directly connected to the patient.
(6) If the equipment is powered from batteries, check the batteries.
4 While the equipment is in operation, take notice of these precautions:
(1) Be careful not to exceed the specified time and dosage limits for diagnostics or treatment.
(2) Keep a constant eye on the equipment in general and the patient to ensure that they remain normal.
(3) Whenever the equipment or the patient is found abnormal, take appropriate remedial action,
such as shutting down the equipment with care to cause no harm to the patient.
5 After using the equipment, take notice of these precautions:
(1) Reset the switches, dials and other controls to their initial status in specified routines before turning off the equipment.
(2) Do not use undue force in disconnecting cords, as by pulling them out of position.
(3) Take notice of these precautions in storing the equipment:
I Store the equipment to guard against splashes of water.
II Store the equipment to protect against any ambient conditions that could adversely affect
its performance, such as atmospheric pressure, temperature, humidity, ventilation,
sunlight, dust and air containing salt or sulfur content.
III Store the equipment to keep it stable, protected from tilting, vibration, impact (including
impact during transit) and so on.
IV Do not store the equipment where chemicals are stored or in or near sources of gases.
(4) Clean the components, cords, directors and so on and then sort and keep them in order.
(5) Keep the equipment clean to prepare for the next sessions of operation.
6 If the product fails, do not tamper with the product but mark it properly and have it repaired by professionals.
7 Do not make unauthorized modifications to the equipment.
8 Maintenance and inspection
(1) Inspect the equipment and parts periodically.
(2) Before putting the equipment back to reuse after it has been left out of service for a certain
length of time, check that the equipment works normally and safely.
9 Other
Abide by instructions in the Operation Manual for proper equipment handling.

1.3 Safety
1
Read this section before using the equipment to ensure proper handling.
Safety Information
■ Preventing Explosion
WARNING
Because this equipment is not explosion-proof, do not use combustible and explosive gases
near the equipment.
■ Preventing Electrical Shock

WARNING
To prevent electrical shock, observe these precautions by all means.
● Never open the equipment covers. Hands touching a high-voltage zone inside may cause
electrical shock.
● Install the equipment where it will not be splashed with water.
● Check that the equipment is fully grounded.
● Check that all cords are connected correctly and safely.
● While this equipment is in operation, pay due attention not to have the patient come into
direct contact with it.
■ Connection Instruction
CAUTION
Use external devices of specified types to connect to the equipment.

1.4 Precautions in Using the FCR PRIMA
1
Console
Safety Information
■ Precautions when Using
● Operating Precautions
• When working steadily on the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) over an extended period of time,
take breaks for 10 to 15 minutes after every hour to rest your eyes and hands.
• Verify that time and date which displayed on the “Indicator” is correct before using the FCR PRIMA
Console (CR-IR 391CL). Time and date which displayed on the “Indicator” are recorded as a time and
date at the time of saving images to the disk.
• Turn the power of this equipment or the computer installed this software off at least once a day with
the shutting down operation.
The FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) is not built for continuous running.
• Use a screensaver when displaying the same image for extended period of time. If your screensaver
fails to start up, consult our official dealer.
If the same image is displayed for a long time, the burn-in or residual image of the previous image
may result when switching the display on the monitor.
• Confirm the patient information when starting up the study and referring to the study data.
● Hardware Precautions
• Be careful not to splash the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) and its peripheral devices with
water and other liquids. Do not handle the equipment with wet hands.
• Before disposing of the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL), erase patients’ personal information
stored on it completely.
• Do not turn off the PC or DVD drive while FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) is in use. Images
saved on the PC or DVD drive might be damaged.
• Do not handle the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) with Windows Explorer running. The FCR
PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) or PC may freeze.
• Connect to the Ethernet Network of 1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, or 10BASE-T prescribed in the IEEE
standard 802.3.
Do not connect telephone lines to LAN connector. Only UTP-type straight LAN cables of 4-pair
Category 5 cable(CAT 5E) or higher are appropriate for connection to this connector.
• Do not disconnect the network cable of the hub or the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) from the
port while image reading is in progress. If the network cable is accidentally disconnected, reinsert it
into the port immediately. Do not shut down the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) at this time. If
you disconnect the network cable of the hub or the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) from the port
and insert it back into position while image reading is in progress, the image reading process, might
take about 10 minutes to resume. If you shut down the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) or Image
Reader, the images being read might be lost.
• The FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) might be accidentally powered off due, for example, to a
power failure while image reading is in progress. When this happens, restart the PC and log in again
to reload the images. Make sure that the correct images have been read in response to your
exposure menu choice. After starting up and logging in the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL),
when double-clicking and starting to expose the study which was reading images at the time of
shutting down from the study list on the “Main” window, images can be started to read again.
If the images loaded do not match your exposure menu choice, exchange or otherwise manipulate the
images to synchronize the exposure menu choice and the images with each other.

• Before you use an uninterruptible power supply with the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL), verify
1
its performance characteristics, such as the battery life. Replace the battery as required.
If the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) is forced to shut down while it is in operation due to
electric power failure or other causes, data could be lost.
Safety Information
You need to have a security, backup or any other relevant procedure programmed separately to save
images safely. Use of an uninterruptible power supply is recommended to protect against
emergencies.
• Do not remove the hardware connected by the service engineer, or connect any additional hardware
to the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) in addition to the hardware already connected to it.
It may result in malfunctions.
•Do not connect the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) to a wide area network. It will result in
malfunction.
• If you need to install this software to the store-brought PC, contact our authorized dealer.
Also, use our company’s recommended computer for installing this software. Contact our authorized
dealer for the detailed specifications of the computer and the peripheral equipment.
• Use a commercial personal computer and monitor that passed our compatibility test with FCR PRIMA
Console (CR-IR 391CL). If non-approved ones are used, Fujifilm Corporation does not guarantee that
the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) will operate normally.
A commercial personal computer and monitors verified for compatibility are listed in Appendix A.
• After connecting this system to the network with other systems, confirm that the other systems are not
affected. If they are affected, take countermeasures such as network separation.
• When a setting of the network to which the equipment is connected has been changed, check that the
change does not affect the system operation and take measures if necessary.
- Change of connection destination
- Addition of devices
- Removal of devices
- Update of devices
- Upgrade of devices
● Software Precautions
• Do not modify the Windows setting of the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL). Image input/output
might be disabled.
• While using the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL), do not double-click any file associated with any
other application software.
If you attempt to open a file associated with any other application software by double-clicking it, the
file would take a considerable time to open. If it is absolutely necessary to open that file, start up the
associated application software first and then control the application software to open the target file.
• Do not install any software in the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) in addition to the preinstalled
software. Do not uninstall any preinstalled software. Because the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR
391CL) comes with certain software preinstalled, installing additional software could interfere with the
preinstalled software, resulting in malfunction.
• Operate the disk drive with the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) applications.
• When selling this software alone, Fujifilm Corporation will not be responsible for any malfunction or
damage of the personal computer or the monitor.
• When the virus countermeasure software is being used, use the specified software. Consult FUJIFILM
Corporation or a dealer specified by FUJIFILM Corporation for details. Also consult FUJIFILM Corporation
or a dealer specified by FUJIFILM Corporation for the application of OS revised programs.

■ Precautions when Installing
• Do not install the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) monitor in a place that is exposed to direct or 1
reflected intense light, such as sunlight or other bright illumination. If the monitor is installed at or near
sources of intense light, images may not be read correctly.
Safety Information
• Do not install the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) in a dusty place, such as on a floor. If it is
unavoidable to install the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) close to a floor, keep it at least 5 cm
above the floor.
If the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) is installed in a dusty environment, dust accumulating in
the power supply unit or other components could result in smoke or fire.
• Locate the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) unit so noises emitted from the unit while in
operation will not adversely affect the performance of medical examinations.
• When relocating the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) or the computer installed this software,
contact our authorized dealer.
■ Precautions when Reading Images

• Reading of images on the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) monitor should be carried out at the
responsibility of a user who is conscious of the intended use of the images and inherent differences
from film-based diagnostics.
• Verify the information that accompanies images and use it to aid in their reading. Pay particular
attention to patient information.
• When reading an image, be sure to verify the image flip information (front or back) and the actual
exposure condition of patient.
• Configure the image processing parameters for the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) to suit
display images.
Improperly configured image processing parameters could make correct image reading difficult.
• Adjust the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) to display images in a proper size.
The FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) may subject original images to interpolation processing
(display processing) to enable you to view the images in an optional display size. As a result, images
displayed in an improper size may not impart their intrinsic information.
• Multi-frame images may not be displayed in the set frame rate in case of cine play mode.
Confirm images after confirming the display of measured value of the frame rate.
● Monitor-related Precautions
• Luminance and contrast can be changed depending on the monitor types but never change them.
If it changed, an image may not be verified properly.
• Use the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) with proper screen contrast (high/low) settings.
Improper screen contrast (high/low) settings could make image reading difficult.
• Before reading images on FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL), make sure that the monitor is set at
the right angle for viewing. If the monitor is not set at the right angle, adjust it.
An improperly angled monitor could make it difficult to read images properly.
• Do not change the display setting (for portrait or landscape) of the LCD monitor that was set at time of
installation. If you need to change the display orientation setting, contact our authorized dealer.

■ Precautions when Managing Data
1 • Print and retain original images on a film (called an “original film”). The hard disk or disk mounted on
the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) unit is not intended for permanent storage of diagnostic
images.
Safety Information
● Media Management
• Do not leave disks for the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) in dusty places, hot or damp places,
places exposed to direct sunlight or in places that are subjected to sharp temperature differences.
• Duplicate (copy) every disk to which images are stored.
Check disks for consistency by following the instructions found in “13.13 Media Consistency Check”.
Images stored to the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) hard drive or disks could be lost as a result
of equipment or media faults. Further, some characteristics of a disk could make images stored on the
disk inaccessible for reading or writing if the disk has deteriorated over an extended period of usage,
even though it has been stored properly. An improperly stored disk could make images stored on it
inaccessible for reading or writing within months.
Neither FUJIFILM Corporation nor the vendor assumes any liability or responsibility for any loss of
images and data.
● Image Data Management

• Images that have been saved as “Processed” being selected can be reloaded into the FCR PRIMA
Console (CR-IR 391CL), but cannot be printed on a film (optional).
• Before deleting images on FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL), make sure that there is no problem if
the images are deleted. Although FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) allows you to delete images, if
you delete required images by mistake, you would have to make a re-exposure of the subject and
recapture the images.
■ Precautions when Processing Image

• Evaluation of the results of measurement performed on the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) is
your responsibility.
Images used for measurement on the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) may contain errors in
relation to the actual length of the subject, depending on how the images have been captured and
other conditions.
• When specifying coordinates on the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) monitor, specify them
correctly.
Incorrectly specified coordinates will deliver incorrect measurement results.

■ Precautions when Exposing
• When exposing an area where it is difficult to distinguish the exposed direction and the symmetric 1
body part, mark it using markers for example to avoid the confusion of the exposed direction and body
part.
Safety Information
• Erase manually a remaining image on an imaging plate exposured at large X-ray dose.
Incomplete erasing of an image on the imaging plate could make image reading difficult.
■ Precautions when Saving Data

● Common
• When importing image or study data into FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) (optional) or saving
from FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) to media such as CD, be very careful to check the image
or study data and patient information.
● Media
• Do not use the disks that are dedicated to image storage on the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL)
for any other use. Images stored on those disks would be made inaccessible for browsing.
• Use disks that meet the requirements listed in “2.7 Before Using Disks”.
• Be careful not to confuse the DVD disk with the CD-R or DVD-R disk for PDI because the CD-R or
DVD-R disk for PDI to be given to the patient is created using the DVD drive to create DVD disks.
When creating a CD-R or DVD-R disk for PDI, write information (patient name, patient ID, birth date,
disk creation date, study date, facility name) on the front of the CD-R or DVD-R disk in order to
distinguish it from DVD+RW/-RW disk.
When giving the created disk for PDI to the patient, advise the patient that the contents of the disk is
for reference.
• Do not handle the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) in a Windows Explorer operation, unless
otherwise specified in this Reference Guide.
If you eject a disk in a Windows Explorer operation, the data stored on the disk could be corrupted as
a consequence of the disk having been ejected while images were being written to or read from it, or
your application might not be able to eject it.
Further, when you browse through information stored on the disk, the information might take time
before it shows up.
● NAS/USB-HDD
• When the caution about lack of HDD space is displayed, add NAS/USB-HDD. In such cases, consult
our authorized dealer.
• When an error of NAS/USB-HDD is displayed in the indicator for Event, consult our authorized dealer.
■ Precaution when Outputting

• Be careful not to confuse the patient when printing several images on a film for several patients and
reading of images on the film should be carried out at the responsibility of a user who is conscious of
the intended differences from the image quality by displayed image size.
• Be careful that the height displays and outputs in meters, and the weight displays and outputs in kilograms.
• Before outputting a blackened image to a storage destination, be sure to check the blackening range.
The result of blackening is embedded in an image according to the data outputted to the storage
destination, and the image cannot be restored to the state before the blackening.

1
Safety Information

2
2
Chapter
Product Overview
Product Overview
2.1 FCR PRIMA Console Highlights......................................... 2-2
2.2 Name and Window of Each Part......................................... 2-5
2.3 Flow for Utilizing the System.............................................. 2-6
2.4 Version Information............................................................. 2-8
2.5 Starting up and Exiting........................................................ 2-9

2.5.1 Starting up FCR PRIMA Console................................... 2-9
2.5.2 Exiting FCR PRIMA Console........................................ 2-12
2.6 Protecting the PC when Temporarily Leaving the Site.... 2-15
2.7 Before Using Disks............................................................ 2-16
2.8 Setting up Disks................................................................. 2-19

2.1 FCR PRIMA Console Highlights
This section describes the features of FCR PRIMA Console and an example of its system
configuration.
2
■ Main Features of FCR PRIMA Console
Product Overview
The FCR PRIMA Console is a diagnostic imaging workstation that not only simplifies the workflow of
diagnosing X-ray images, but also offers a fully integrated solution to managing modality, as well as
X-ray,study images.
X-ray images captured by the image reader are transmitted to the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL).
Transmitted or captured images are displayed on the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) monitor
screen, which provides information to aid in reading the images.
A summary description of the key features of the system is as follows:

1. Digital image enhancements make X-ray images easier to view and better suited for diagnostic
purposes.
2. The FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) lets you enter patient information and view images. For
X-ray studies, you can enter exposure information (such as exposed body parts and exposure
menus) , as well as patient information.
3 Image data can be backed up to DVD.
4. The FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) keeps images obtained from various studies under fully
integrated management.
5. Study images can be saved on CD-R or DVD-R in the PDI format and made available to the
patients for collaborative diagnostic purposes.

■ System Configuration Example
Network connections allow FCR PRIMA Console to connect to an Image Reader and read FCR study
images in.
FCR PRIMA Console is used from start of the FCR study until interpretation of the radiogram.
FCR PRIMA Console can be configured on a single personal computer 2
An example of a system configuration is shown below. Optional functions depend on whether the
option is installed.
Product Overview
Image Reader
PC Imager
FCR PRIMA Console
(CR-IR 391CL)
Hub
NAS

■ Restrictions
● Restrictions of Study Images Handled by FCR PRIMA Console
Types of images that are handled by FCR PRIMA Console are listed below.
2 Operation methods and usable functions may differ depends on types of study images.
Types of study image Explanations

Product Overview
Unprocessed X-ray images created by FUJIFILM CR equipment have the FUJIFILM-unique

FCR study images image processing parameters added on the image data. Unprocessed FCR
images are images on which only the parameters were adjusted to enable image
editing such as changing gradation (contrast or density) and reversing the display
for obtaining a better view on screen or film, while keeping the original image data
as is. Therefore, the original images before editing can be restored.
These images cannot be displayed in the DICOM viewer.
Processed X-ray images created by FUJIFILM CR equipment have the FUJIFILM-unique

FCR study images image processing parameters added on the image data. The Processed FCR
images are images whose original data was processed along with the parameter
change. Therefore the original images cannot be restored.
Images can be viewed in the DICOM viewer.
Other than X-ray images loaded from a DICOM study disk created in another facility.
FCR study images

2.2 Name and Window of Each Part
This section describes the name and display window of each parts for FCR PRIMA Console main unit.
2
■ Display Window
Product Overview
By installation conditions for option or by system setting at the time of installation, there are buttons
and menu which cannot be selected. Buttons and menus which cannot be selected are displayed in
gray or are hidden.
• Some character strings on a window can be changed. To change a character string, ask for a service engineer.
• Dragging or panning the boundary of the window with a mouse can modify the size of and layout in the window.
For display modifications of the sub-windows, refer to “5.3 Selecting and Arranging images”.
Main window Image Viewer window
Patient information edit button

Patient information Indicator
Operation for
Main window Tool bar
Study status
Input and refer to
([Suspend] [Verify])
patient information
Sub-window
Study operations
FCR PRIMA Console

(CR-IR 391CL)
menu bar Image cart Thumbnail images
for operation Study summary

2.3 Flow for Utilizing the System
This section divides FCR PRIMA Console functions into “Regular Tasks”, “Semi-Regular Tasks”, and
2 “Non-Regular Tasks” and describes the flow of utilizing these functions.
Product Overview
Regular Tasks
Take and Read X-ray Images
Chapter 3 Taking and Reading X-ray of a Subject
Patient Registration
Read
Exposure
Search and Refer Studies
Chapter 4 Searching and Referring Studies
Search
Refer
Semi-Regular Tasks
Edit Study Information Verifying by Viewing Indicators Change Display Settings
Chapter 9 Editing Study Information Chapter 10 Verifying with the Indicators Chapter 11 Changing Display Settings of the
“Main” Window and “Image Viewer”
Modify Study Menu
Inactivate Images Verify Unit Status, Output Buttons on “Main Menu” / “Image Viewer”
Errors, Alerts... etc and Change of Display Settings
Re-Exposure
Print/Storage Settings
Edit Patient Information

...etc

2
Product Overview
Verify and Process Images Using Report Function
Chapter 5 Verifying and Processing Images Chapter 6 Using Report Function
Schema
Process Images Thumbnail
Comment
Verify Images
Save Images from Each Windows
Chapter 7 Image Storage from Each Window
Storage Disks
DICOM Server
Work Disks
.jpg
General-Purpose
PDI Disks .bmp File Format
Print Images
Chapter 8 Image Print from Each Window
FUJI HOSPITAL 04001676 A 0000 A 020
Film Print Report Print
Free Layout Print

G 1.1G#0.9+0.30 R 5TO.3 D 2MO.2 R-> L G 1.0G#0.9+0.30 R 5T0.31. D 2MO.2
SKULL, GENERAL 0000000001 John Smith [M] 23
1992. 11. 27 [17:43]
L 2.0 S 187 C *1.0*1.0 AP SCALE: 50% RT-04
Non-Regular Tasks
Settings of Client Utilities Settings of User Utilities
Chapter 12 Configuring “Client Utilities” Chapter 13 Setting “User Utilities”
Patient Information Maintenance

Edit/Add Exposure Menu and Study Menu
Set User Information
Environment Settings of
FCR PRIMA Console
Verify History Information
Handle Disks
etc

2.4 Version Information
Verifies the version of the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) application software and the options installed.
2
■ Operation Windows ■ Checking Version Information
Product Overview
● “Main” Window 1. Select - [Version] (A).

→→The “Version” window opens.
2. Check the version (B) and the options

installed (C).
3. Click [OK] (D) after completion

→→The “Version” window exits.
(A)
● “Version” Window
(B)
(C)
(D)
The displayed information in the window differs

depending on the version of the application software.

2.5 Starting up and Exiting
2.
This section describes the workflow of starting up and exiting FCR PRIMA Console.
2.5.1 Starting up FCR PRIMA Console

2
Product Overview
This section also describes the normal startup procedures, each procedure for starting up the server
application and client application after backing up from the backup notification message, and
procedures for starting up each function from the server application icon.
■ Operation Device / Operation ● “Select Server Application Behavior”

Dialog
Windows
● Monitor and Main Unit (H)

(A)
(I)
(B)
(C)
● “Login” Window (User Selection)
(D)
(E)
● “Login” Window (Enter a Password)
(F)
(G)

■ Starting up • DRYPIX 2000
Starts up FCR PRIMA Console.
1. Turn on the monitor.

2 Check that the main powers of all monitors are
on, and then turn on the monitors. For details,
refer to the manuals of the monitors.
Product Overview
Power button
I. Press the power button.

2. Turn on the server PC power (B).
→ Printer starts up.
→→The startup window of FCR PRIMA Console
opens, and then the server application starts up.
The server application icon displays in the task
4. Select a user (D) to log in to FCR PRIMA
Console.
tray at the lower right-hand corner of the screen.
Counter-measure when the application does
not start: “■ Starting up the Server Application” • Guidance that leads you through the operating
process is displayed in the “User Selection”
→→After the server application starts up, the client
window and “Password Entry” window.
application starts up.
• Users displayed in the “Login” window (user
Counter-measure when the application does selection) can be newly added, edited and deleted
not start: “■ Starting up the Client Application” by using the “Client Utilities”.
→→When the client application starts up, “Login” New registration, deletion, editing of the user :
window (user selection) opens. ”12.5 Setting User Information (For Administrator)”
3. Turn on the Image Reader and printer (optional). →→The “Login” window (enter a password) opens.
5. Enter a password (F).

• To connect with the Image Reader, start up FCR
PRIMA Console before turning on the Image 6. Click [Login] (G).
Reader. →→FCR PRIMA Console starts up.
• For information about starting up the peripheral
devices connected to the FCR PRIMA Console
system, refer to the Operation Manual pertaining If you have not backed up the disk for a certain
to the peripheral devices. period of time or longer, FCR PRIMA Console may
display a backup prompt message before it starts up.
• FCR PRIMA
Click [OK] in response to the backup prompt
message and the “Backup Utility” will launch to
perform the requested backup operation.
Back up notification: “13.8 Backup Notification
Settings”
Power switch Backup: “15.2 Backing up Information of

Patient, Setting, Log, and Report”
When the backup operation is completed, start up
the server application and client application again.
I. Turn on the main power switch of Image
“■ Starting up the Server Application”
Reader.
→ Image Reader starts up. “■ Starting up the Client Application”

■ Starting up the Server Application ■ Starting up Each Function from
Starts up each server application separately the Server Application Icon
after performing backup in response to backup When the FCR PRIMA Console server
notification message or when FCR PRIMA
Console is terminated while the PC is running.
application starts up, it displays server
application icon in the task tray in the
2
lower right-hand corner of the screen.
1. Double-click on the desktop.
Product Overview
→→The startup window of FCR PRIMA Console
1. Double-click the server application icon .
opens, and then the server application starts up.
→→The “Select Server Application Behavior” dialog
appears.
• On the PC, the auto startup for the client
application can be set. 2. Select the operation to be performed from the
“13.9 Automatically Startup Settings” pull-down menu ( I ), and then click [OK] (K).
• You can do the same by selecting [Start] - [All Selection Items
Programs] (P) - [Fuji Film] - [FCR Application].
Items Contents
Shutdown the PC Shuts down the PC.

“2.5.2 Exiting FCR PRIMA
■ Starting up the Client Application Console”
If no operation window (“User Selection” Exit Exits the “Server Application”.
window) is displayed while the server “2.5.2 Exiting FCR PRIMA

application icon appears in the PC’s task tray, Console”
starts up the client application. Start up Client Starts up the “Client Application”.
Application
1. Double-click on the desktop. User Utilities Starts up the “User Utilities”.
→→The client application starts up. “Chapter 14 Setting “User
When the client application starts up, the “User Utilities””
Selection” window opens.
Backup Utilities Starts up the “Backup Utilities”.
“15.2 Backing up Information
• On the PC, the auto startup for the client of Patient, Setting, Log, and
application can be set. Report”
“13.9 Automatically Startup Settings” Disk Copy Starts up the “disk copy tool”.
• You can do the same by the following steps:
“2.8 Setting up Disks”
1) Double-clicking server application icon in the
task tray at the lower right-hand corner of the Event Display Displays the “Event Log” window.
screen. “10.7 Verifying Events
→The “Select Server Application Behavior” dialog (Errors, Warnings or
appears. Information)”
2) Selecting “Start up Client Application” from the
Version Display Displays the version.
pull-down menu.
3) Clicking [OK]. “2.4 Version Information”

2.5.2 Exiting FCR PRIMA Console
Exits FCR PRIMA Console with the following methods:
• Log off the current user

2 Exits FCR PRIMA Console to change its users.
• Exit the client application

Product Overview
Exits FCR PRIMA Console to close the “Main” window temporarily and using a utility tool.
• Exit the server application

Exits FCR PRIMA Console completely and switches to another application.
• Shut down the PC

Shuts down the PC after exiting the Client Application of FCR PRIMA Console.
Before exiting FCR PRIMA Console, terminate the study in progress.

If you are browsing an image in the “Image Viewer”, exit the “Image Viewer”.
■ Operation Windows ● “Select Server Application Behavior”

Dialog
● “Main” Window
(E)
(F)
(A) (B)
● “Login” Window
(C)
(D)

■ Logging off the Current User ■ Exiting the Server Application
When exiting the server application, FCR
1. Click (B) on the lower left of “Main” PRIMA Console exits completely.
window.
→→A message displays to verify. 2
Exit the client application before exiting the server
2. Click [OK] in the confirmation dialog. application.
Product Overview
→→The “Main” window closes and the “Login” window
(user selection window) opens. 1. Double-click the server application icon
placed in the task tray.
• To start up another client application, select a user
appears.
(C) from the “Login” window (user selection
window) and log in.
• To exit the current client application, click [Close]
2. Select [Exit] from the pull-down menu and
(D) in the “Login” window (user selection). click [OK].
→→The server application exits and the server
application icon disappears from the task tray.
■ Exiting the Client Application The message displays when there is a study whose
study status is Not Verified.
To exit the server application with the current study
The server application of PC keeps running, even status unchanged, click [OK].
when exiting the client application.
1. Click (A).
→→“Main” window closes, and the client application
exits. When the client application exits, the “Image
Viewer” window also closes.
appears.
To use various utility tools: “2.5.1 ■ Starting up
Each Function from the Server Application
Icon”
To exit the server application: “■ Exiting the
Server Application”

■ Shutting down the PC
Shuts down the PC after exiting the client
application of FCR PRIMA Console.
2 1. Click (A).
Product Overview
appears.
2. Select [Shutdown the PC] from the pull-down

menu (E) and click [OK] (F).
→→The PC shuts down.
The following window opens if the PC is shut down in

invalid procedure.
In this case, click [Cancel] and then double-click the

server application icon placed in the task tray to
display the “Select Server Application Behavior”
dialog.
Close the PC from the “Select Server Application
Behavior” dialog.
Also if “Shut down now” is accidentally clicked when
DRYPIX PRIMA is connected, the power of DRYPIX
PRIMA will not be linked and turned off. Turn off the
power by holding the stand-by switch on the
operation panel.

2.6 Protecting the PC when Temporarily
Leaving the Site
Protects the PC with password to prevent unauthorized use when temporarily leaving the site while 2
working. FCR PRIMA Console is protected with the current operation status retained.
Product Overview
■ Operation Windows ■ Locking the PC
Protect the PC by password.
● Windows Task Tray
You can do the same when the PC runs without any

operation in a certain time.
(A) “13.15 Automatically Logoff”
● Login Window for Windows 1. Click (A) displayed in the task tray.
→→The login window for Windows opens.
■ Unlocking the PC
1. Enter a login password (B) for Windows and
click (C).
(B) (C)
The password for user of fujicr is “system”.
→→FCR PRIMA Console becomes ready.

2.7 Before Using Disks
This section describes precautions in handling disks in FCR PRIMA Console, compatible disk types,
drive types, and how to manage.
2
■ Precautions ● Disk Management
Product Overview
Before using a new disk, you are advised to

● Precaution in Handling Disks put the save start date on the label seal.
For disks that are not used for further writing,
Before using disks, read instructions on the
enter the label name (media identification
disk package.
number) in the label seal. You should also put
● Precautions in Handling Files Stored to the save end date on the label seal.
Disks Write protection : “12.8 ■Setting Disks as “Write
Enabled” or “Write Disabled””
• Do not save new files to a disk on which other
files are already stored.
• Do not delete, move or modify files stored on
● Windows Explorer
the disks. Do not attempt to access the disk drive from
Windows Explorer. The drive might take a
considerable time to access.
Failure to do so could result in data unknown to the
FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) or result in a ● FCR PRIMA Console Shutdown
failure to save data or loss of saved data. Do not turn off the FCR PRIMA Console while
writing to or reading from the disk is in
● Compatible Disk Type progress (with the drive lamp illuminating).
Non-cartridge disks can be used with the FCR

PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL).
● Disk Identification
When a disk is inserted in the disk drive, it will
• Single-sided 4.7GB
take about 30 seconds before it is identified to
• UDF 1.5 format or UDF 2.01 format
the FCR PRIMA Console.
• 8-cm disks cannot be used.

• Unformatted disks cannot be used. To use an
unformatted disk with the FCR PRIMA Console
(CR-IR 391CL), format the disk in the “Disk”
window of “Indicator”.
Switch disks : “12.8 ■Replacing Disks”
● Ejecting Disks
Do not force the ejection of a disk by pressing
the disk drive EJECT button.
When a disk needs to be ejected, perform in
the “Disk” window of “Indicator”.
Remove disks : “2.8 ■Setting up Disks”
If you use an application other than the FCR PRIMA

Console to eject the disk, the PC may freeze or the
disk may become invalid.

■ Disk Types ● Work Disks
FCR PRIMA Console uses different types of These disks are used to temporarily save
disks for use. images from the FCR PRIMA Console system
Disk type can be classified into “Image storage for such purposes, such as the provision of
disks”, “Work disks”, “Other disks” and “PDI images to other facilities and collection of 2
disks” depending on its use. images depicting various diseases. It saves
DICOM-compatible format disks. FCR PRIMA
● Image Storage Disks
Product Overview
Console also treats disks storing images
provided by other facilities and DICOM-
Disks intended for image storage are called
compatible format disks storing images
storage disks.
captured by the FCR system as work disks.
These disks are used to manage images. FCR
PRIMA Console remembers which images are
stored on which storage disks. Even though
FCR PRIMA Console does not remember which
images are deleted from the FCR PRIMA
images are stored on which work disks.
Console database, FCR PRIMA Console can
FCR PRIMA Console treats the images imported
still import the copies of the same images from from the work disk as unrelated images with those in
the storage disks. the FCR PRIMA Console system.
• As the free space of the PC falls below a certain ● Other Disks

limit, stored images are automatically deleted from These disks are used to store images in the
the FCR PRIMA Console database in sequence in JPEG, bitmap or DICOM format for
ascending time order of the browsed studies.
presentations and purposes alike.
• With images imported from disks, you cannot:
FCR PRIMA Console cannot display the
- Editing markers
names of such disks and the amount of
- Editing study information
available space on them.
● PDI Disks
Studies that are deleted automatically when the number CD-R or DVD-R disk for providing study result
of studies stored in the FCR PRIMA Console database images to the patient for diagnostic
exceeds a certain limit set on FCR PRIMA Console,
cooperation with other facilities.
studies stored on a storage disk are automatically
deleted from the oldest study browsed. Once studies Save to PDI disks: “7.7 Saving to PDI Disks”
are removed from the FCR PRIMA Console database,
they no longer appear in the “Main” window.
Studies which will not be deleted are:
• To be verified,
• Being displayed in the “Image Viewer”,
• Printing or being saved, or
• Locked.
Image data and study information associated with
the images are stored on a storage disk, thereby
studies can be backed up in the FCR PRIMA
Console database by “Disk Restoration”.
Restore Disks: “12.8 ■Restoring Information in
Disks to Database”
If too many studies have been registered and there
are no studies that can be deleted, a message displays.
Delete unnecessary studies from the “Main” window.
“4.4.5 ■Deleting Studies”

■ Drive Types
There are two types of DVD drives: for control
drive and normal drive. The PC consists of two
types of equipment configuration, one is a
2 control drive only or with a control drive and a
normal drive.
Product Overview
Images in the disk can be loaded from both the

control drive and normal drive.
● Control Drive
Control drive can write data to storage disk,
work disk, other disks, and PDI disk.
Type of disk on the control drive is displayed in
the “Disk” window of the “Indicator” and the
“Disk Operation” window of the “Client
Utilities”. “Start Disk Handling” is performed on
the control drive.
● Normal Drive
Normal drive can write data to other disks and
PDI disk, but cannot write data to storage disk
or work disk.
Normal drive is not displayed in the “Disk”
window of the “Indicator” nor the “Disk
Operation” window of the “Client Utilities”.

2.8 Setting up Disks
Before proceeding with a study, inserts a disk into the drive and set up.
Disk handling is started on the control drive of the PC.
If the last written disk remains inserted in the disk drive, disk handling will start automatically (without
2
the operation described here).
Product Overview
This section describes the following operations:
• Setting up disks
• Ejecting a saved disk
• Copying a disk
• When the disk becomes full
The PC may freeze or the disk may become invalid if you use an application other than the FCR PRIMA Console.
Verify precautions for using disks before setting up disks.
“2.7 Before Using Disks”
■ Operation Windows ● “Replacing Disks” Dialog

● “Indicator”
(A) (F)
● “Indicator” - “Disk” Window

(B)
(G)
(H)
(I)
(C) (D) (E)
(J)
(K)

● “Select Server Application Behavior”
Dialog
■ Setting up Disks
If the disk has not been inserted into the drive,
inserts the disk and then set up.
2 (L)
Put necessary information on the disk label such as

usage, name of disk, and recording start date.
Product Overview
(M)
1. Click the “Disk” indicator (A) in the

● “Login” Window “Indicator”.
→→The “Disk” window of the “Indicator” opens.
(N)
2. Select a disk drive in “Device Name” (B).
(O) →→The status of the disk inserted into the selected
drive displays.
→→Nothing appears until the disk operation is
(P) performed.
3. Click [Replace] (D).

● “Disk Copy Tool” →→The “Replacing Disks” dialog appears and the disk
(window on which copies are made)
drive tray opens.
(Q)
(R) 4. Place a disk in the disk drive tray and close
the tray.
5. When the disk drive pilot lamp illuminates

green, click [Next] (F).
(S)
→→If the replaced disk is an image storage or work
● Disk Copying Process Window disk that has once been used with FCR PRIMA
Console, the disk replacement operation has
completed.
→→If the replaced disk is unformatted, the
confirmation message displays to format the disk.
Click [OK] (G) to start up the software to format the
disk.
Proceed to 6. after formatting completed.
(T)
For using method of softwares to perform
● “Indicator” - “Event” Window formatting, see the instruction manual attached

to disk drive.
→→If the replaced disk is a new formatted disk,
storage disk or disks other than for work, “Set Disk
Usage” dialog appears.
(U) Proceed to 6..
(V)

6. Select the way you want to handle the disk
inserted in the disk drive (H).
■ Ejecting Disk
Remove the disk from the server PC’s control
Selection Items drive.
Items Contents
For Image Storage Storage disk

2
Do not use the Open/Close (Eject) button on the
Not For Image drive mechanically because the PC may freeze or
Product Overview
Storage the disk may become invalid if an application other
than the FCR PRIMA Console has been used.
DICOM- Work disk
Compatible The disk in the normal drive of the client PC can be
Format ejected by Windows operation or by using the drive’s
Open/Close (Eject) button mechanically.
Other Other disk
Disk Types: “2.7 Before Using Disks” 1. Click the “Disk” indicator (A) in the
“Indicator”.
7. Click [Next] ( I ). →→The “Disk” window of the “Indicator” opens.
→→If you select “For storage” or “DICOM-Compatible
Format”, a “Disk Name Entry” dialog appears. 2. Select a disk drive from Device Name (B) if
Go to 7.. the disk drive is added.
→→Selecting “Other” returns to the “Disk” window of
the “Indicator” window. The disk replacement 3. Click [Eject] (E).
operation has completed. →→The disk drive tray opens.
8. Enter a disk name (J). 4. Remove the disk from the disk drive tray and
close the tray.
9. Click [Next] (K).
→→The disk replacement operation has completed.
When the disk replacement operation completes, be

sure to click [Update] to check that the disk has been
replaced. Simply replacing a disk will not refresh the
disk information.
10. Click [Update] (C) and verify that the contents

of disk which has been set up is displayed.
Display Items
Items Contents
Device Disk name and space (%)

Status
Use*1 Purpose of using the disk

• For Image Storage
• For Work
Writing Writing setting for the disk

Setting • Enable
• Disable
*1 Nothing appears for other disks.

■ Copying Disks ● Copying Disks
Duplicates image storage disks against Inserts a disk into the disk drive and starts to
possible failures to read them as a result of copy it.
their data breakage or deterioration by using
2 the “disk copy tool”.
If the drive in the PC is used, the source and target
drives are the same. Data on the source disk is
Product Overview
temporarily saved to the hard drive in the PC before

• FCR PRIMA Console will exit when you attempt to
it is finally written to a target disk that is replaced
start up the “disk copy tool”.
with the source disk.
Before starting up the copy tool, check that all the
windows have closed. Check also that if any
different user is operating the FCR PRIMA
Console system.
1. Select Source drive name for copying (Q) and
then click [Eject] (R).
• Store backup disks in a secure place that is not
accessible to third parties. →→The source disk drive tray opens.
• Disks may take up to 210 minutes at the longest to
be copied. Avoid copying disks during the periods 2. Place a source disk in the disk drive tray and
of the day in which a study needs to be started close the tray.
immediately.
3. Click [Execute] (S).
● Starting up the Copy Tool →→Data on the source disk is temporarily saved to the
hard drive in the PC. When the saving to the hard
1. Double-click the server application icon drive completes, a message is displayed
To cancel the disk copying process, follow these
appears. steps:
1) Click [Cancel] (T). All data that has been recorded
2. Select [Disk Copy] (L) and click [OK] (M). on the target disk is deleted.
→→The “Login” window opens after a message 2) When the message “Copying Incomplete” is
displayed. displayed, click [OK]. The target disk drive tray
opens.
3. Select the User Name (N) to log in. 3) The message “Place a target disk and click [OK]”
is displayed.
4. Enter the Password (O) and click [OK] (P). To resume the disk copying process, place a disk
in the target disk drive and close the tray.
→→If the user is authenticated, the “Disk Copy Tool” When the disk drive pilot lamp illuminates green,
window opens. click [OK].
When the disk access lamp is ON, never press the

[Eject] button on the disk drive.

4. Place a target disk in the disk drive tray and
close the tray.
■ When a Disk Becoming Full
When the disk in the control drive of the PC
5. When the disk drive pilot lamp illuminates becomes full, the drive tray opens. The disk
indicator turns off if the disk is an image
green, click [OK].
→→The disk copying process starts. When the
storage disk. 2
copying process completes, the message displays. Goes off
Product Overview
(for an image storage disk)
6. Click [OK].
→→The target drive tray opens and a message
displays.
To continue copying data to another disk, replace the

● Verifying that the Disk is Full
current target disk with another one. When the disk
First, views the “Event” window to verify that
drive pilot lamp illuminates green, click [OK]. the disk is full. Then, ejects the full disk and
starts the handling of a new disk. Whenever a
disk becomes full, takes relevant action as
instructed on the right.
Save the data to the storage disk when the disk The following steps describe how to handle
copying process completes.
new disks.
Switching procedure: “■Setting up Disks”
1. Click the “Event” indicator to display the
“Event” window.
2. Select the latest warning on display disk

storing failed (c) and click [Details] (d).
3. Check that the message reporting a full disk

is displayed in the “Error Details” window.
4. Remove the full disk from the disk drive tray.

5. Start the handling of a new disk.
“■Setting up Disks”
Simply placing a disk in the disk drive and closing

the tray will not start the handling of the disk. Set up
the disk.

● Handling Full Disks
Store backup disks in a controlled place that is not
accessible to third parties.
2
1. Start up the “User Utilities” to perform a
Product Overview
media consistency check.

“13.13 Media Consistency Check”
2. Verify the message displayed after the check

and take suggested action.
3. Start up the “disk copy tool” to create a

backup copy of the disk.
“■Copying Disks”

Chapter 3 3
Taking and Reading X-ray of a Subject

Taking and Reading
X-ray of a Subject
3.1 Flow of Taking and Reading X-ray...................................... 3-2
3.2 Registering the Patient Information to be Exposed.......... 3-3
3.3 Exposing Images................................................................. 3-8
3.4 Reading and Viewing......................................................... 3-10
3.5 Import Various Images and Refer..................................... 3-13

3.1 Flow of Taking and Reading X-ray
Starting the Exposure Reading Images
3
4) Select the
exposure menu
1) Register or
select the
patient
information
5) Insert the cassette
“3.2 Register the Patient Information to Expose”
“3.3 ■Read Images in the Cassette”
2) S
elect the
exposure menu
6) Confirm images
3) Start the
exposure
“3.3 ■Viewing Read Images”
“3.3 ■Taking X-rays”

3.2 Registering the Patient Information
to be Exposed
Patient information consists of the patient name, sex, date of birth and other related information. Each
set of patient information is managed with reference to a unique ID (Patient ID). FCR PRIMA Console
searches through the database for registered patient information using its patient ID as a keyword and,
if the information is found, it is displayed in the study list. Also, the patient information or order 3
information can be acquired by connecting with DICOM MWM Server (optional).

■ Operation Windows ● “Network WL” Window
(C)
● “Main” Window - “Input ID” Window
(A)
(D)
● “Network WL” Window - “Search

conditions input” Window
(B)
(E)
• In the “Display Settings” of Utilities, whether or not
to display the window at the time of starting the
“Main” window can be set. (F)
“11.1 Display Settings of the “Main” Window”
• In the “Display Settings” of Utilities, whether or not
to display the input item in the patient information
input column can be set.
“11.1.3 Display Settings of “ID input” Window”

■ Registering New Patient Information
• When the patient ID which already registered in
the FCR PRIMA Console database is entered in
In order to prevent patient mix-ups, manage a single the patient ID column, an applicable patient
patient’s ID in correspondence with a single patient’s information displays. In such cases, verify the
information. patient information and start the exposure.
• A software keyboard can be displayed from
3 1. Input the patient information in the patient on the right of the ID input column. The patient ID
can be entered on the software keyboard.
information input column (A).
Input Items
Items Contents
Patient ID*1*2 Enter a patient ID
Patient Name Enter a name of patient
Sex Select a sex
Date of Birth Enter a date of birth

Height Enter a height
Buttons Functions
Weight Enter a weight
Set the patient ID entered in
Other ID*1*2 Enter an other ID the ID input column into a
text box.
Pregnancy status Select a pregnancy status
Numbers (0 to 9) Input of characters
Late menstrual Enter a late menstrual date hyphen (-) corresponding to a text box
date Clear All characters in a text box
are deleted.
Patient comment Enter a comment
BS One character in a text box is
*1 Enter the patient ID with single-byte alphanumeric deleted.
characters. The allowable length is determined by Enter Set the characters entered
a system setting. into the text box in the ID
*2 The following characters cannot be used. input column.
"#%&`?/\*@<
However, the space can be used but the patient ID
which consists of solely space is not allowed.
2. Check the contents which have been input,
and click (B) .
→→ The new patient information is registered.

■ Registering the Patient ■ Acquiring the Order Information
Information through DICOM through DICOM MWM Server
MWM Server (Optional) (Optional)
Searches the patient information through Order information of the study whose exposure
MWM server and, if the information is found, it has not been stored (the study in the
is displayed in the "Input ID" window. When “Scheduled” or “Started” status) can be
searching the patient information through
MWM server, use the patient ID which has
searched from the MWM Server and can be
acquired to the work list.
3
been registered in MWM server.

To search patient information, the following two
methods can be used. Order information which can be acquired to the work
• Search the MWM server prior to others list is only the information of studies whose modality is
“CR”.
• Search the FCR PRIMA Console database
prior to others
The method to be used depends on the
system settings at the time of installation. You can start an exposure from the acquired order
information. If the acquired order information is the
Here describes the procedures of priorly information of a patient who has not been registered
searching the MWM server as an example. to the FCR PRIMA Console, the patient information
will be registered when you start an exposure from
the work list.
Changes to the studies executing at FCR PRIMA “3.3 ■ Exposing a Study which has not
Console or the patient information displayed in the Completed the Exposure”
study list at the MWM server side will have no effect
on the study list.
In these cases, change the mentioned patient information 1. Select the “Network WL” tab (C).
as well.
“12.3 Maintaining Patient Information”
In the default condition, the list of the order
information that are scheduled to be exposed is
1. Input the patient ID in the ID input column of displayed.
the patient information input column (A).

→→The MWM server is searched with the input patient 2. Click (D).
ID. The patient information whose ID is input is
→→The “Search conditions input” window opens.
displayed in the patient information column.
3. Input/select each search condition (E).

If failed to connect to DICOM MWM server, a Input/Selection Items
message displays.
Items Contents
Check whether or not the network cable is
connected or whether or not the unit works normally. Patient ID Patient ID of the patient
Please contact the maintenance personnel if the
Patient name Name of the patient
situation did not improve after taking the above-
mentioned actions. Expected study date Date on which the study has
To search the MWM server again, perform procedure been scheduled to be
performed
1. again.
RP ID ID which was issued when the
study is requested
2. Check the patient information which is AE Name AE name of the transferring
displayed, and click (B). source device
→→The new patient information is registered. Study no. Study no. registered in an
image

• To automatically close the “Search conditions • The display order of the work list can be sorted. By
input” window after finish searching, put a check selecting the heading of an item you wish to set as
mark to “Close the search panel automatically”. a base, the items in the list will be sorted in the
• To save the search condition after login, click ascending order (▲) or descending order (▼).
[Save]. • The display order of items in the work list can be
• Click [Initialization] to reset the search query to its changed.
defaults (study that the registration date is “Today”). Drag the item you wish to change the display order
3 while selecting it and drop it to the column of the
changing destination.
4. Click [Search] (F). • The items and orders to be displayed in the work
→→The order information which matches the search list can be set in the display setting.
condition will be displayed in the work list. “11.1.6 Display Settings of “Work List” Window
(Optional)”
Display Items
• For the work list, the following functions can be
Items Contents used.
Patient name Name of the patient : Privacy
By clicking the button while selecting a study, the
ID Patient ID of the patient
work list of other studies will be grayed.
DOB Date of birth of the patient
: Sort Reset
Sex Sex of the patient Reset the display order in the work list.
By resetting the sorting, the work list will be
Expected study date Expected date to perform sorted in the ascending order of an expected
the study study date.
Study UID Registered study UID : Update the list
Height Height of the patient Manually update the work list with the search
condition being displayed in the search condition
Weight Weight of the patient display column.
• By double-clicking the order information, an

exposure can be started.
“3.3 ■ Exposing a Study which has not
Completed the Exposure”
• If the study has already been registered, it is
notified and it will be saved in the event log that
the study data acquired from the MWM Server and
the data in the database can be different.
• If the study has been registered and its exposure
has been completed, the message to notify that an
exposure has completed will be displayed.

■ Editing Patient Information
In editing the patient information which is input
in the patient information input field, the patient
information database information can be
revised.
Even if patient information database information is

revised, the patient information of studies which
3
were performed in the past cannot be revised.

To edit the patient information of studies which were
performed in the past, refer to the following and
revise.
“9.9 Editing Patient Information”
1. Edit the patient information in the patient

information input column (A).
2. Click (B) .

3.3 Exposing Images
FCR PRIMA Console offers groups of exposure menus on which the specific exposure conditions and
method required for a body part are preset. Selects an exposure menu for X-ray studies to start taking
X-ray. Exposure menu also can be scheduled.
3 ■ Operation Window ■ Selecting the Exposure Menu

and Taking X-rays
● “Main” Window - “FCR” Window
For the registered patient, select the exposure

menu and take the X-ray.
1. Select the “Exposure Menu” (A).

(A) →→The “Read Image” window opens.
To expose the scheduled study, select the study in a

“Scheduled” study status from the “Study List”
window and double-click it.
2. Select an exposure menu for the image to be

• The frequently used exposure menu can be
read.
registered as a shortcut menu in the “FCR”
window. “3.4 Reading and Viewing”
“11.1.8 Display Settings of “FCR-Menus”

Window” 3. Using a cassette containing a blank IP, take
• The contents of “Others” which are displayed in an X-ray of the subject.
the “FCR” window can be created, edited and
deleted.
“13.3.1 Setting the Exposure Menu” Before starting exposures, be sure to read through the
precautions.
“Appendix Z Precautions for Exposure”

■ Exposing a Study which has ■ Scheduling an Exposure Operation
not Completed the Exposure
The study whose exposure has not been To select an exposure menu and schedule an
completed can be exposed from the “Study exposure, you need to set up. In the “FCR-
List” or “Work List” window in the “Main” Operations” window of “Display Settings”, set up an
window. operation at the time of selecting the exposure menu
1. Select a study in a “Scheduled” or “Started”

to schedule a study.
“11.1.9 Display Settings of Exposing and Reading”
3
study status from the study list, and then

double-click it.
1. Select an “Exposure Menu” (A).
→→The message appears to verify whether or not to
schedule a study.
2. Click [OK].
• To proceed to schedule another study, input the

patient ID in the patient ID column of “Input ID”
window.
• To verify the status of scheduled studies, view the
“Study List” window for a list of studies in the
"Scheduled" study status.
• Once a study is scheduled, an exposure operation
can be started from the “Study List” window.
→→The “Read Image” window of the selected study
opens.
Click [Cancel] to cancel waiting the image reading.

3.4 Reading and Viewing
Reads X-ray images corresponding to an exposure menu.
Takes an X-ray of a subject prior to reading. When inserts the cassette used for the exposure into the
Image Reader, the X-ray image of the subject opens in the FCR PRIMA Console monitor for viewing.
3 ■ Operation Window ■ Read Images in the Cassette

● “Read Image” Window (Detail View) 1. Select an “Exposure Menu” (A) for the image
Before reading an image to be read.
The exposure menu for the image to be read is

(A)
identified by image read icon .
2. Check that the Cassette Ready Lamp is lit on

the operation panel.
After reading an image

The Cassette Ready
Lamp is on.
(A’)
(B)
(C)
3. Insert a cassette into the equipment in

alignment with the guide on the right, with the
cassette’s barcode window facing as
illustrated below.
• Remove the exposure marker from the cassette

before inserting the cassette in the Image Reader.
• Insert the cassette in the Image Reader after
confirming that the top surface of the cassette is
faced up and in the right direction. Moreover, insert
the cassette straight and slowly.
If a cassette is inserted upside down, back to front
or at a slant, the Image Reader can be damaged.
• Do not shake the Image Reader or the cassette
while reading the image.
Uneven image, which will prevent image reading,
might be generated.
• After inserting a cassette into the Image Reader,
do not touch the cassette until the Cassette
Removal Lamp lights.
Touching an inserted cassette during image
reading may cause the Image Reader failure.

■ Viewing Read Images
When inserting a cassette, check the patient name When inserts a cassette into the Image Reader
displayed on the operation panel of the Image
and the image is read, it is displayed in the
Reader.
FCR PRIMA Console monitor.
When an image is read, it is thumbnailed on
the lefthand side of the exposure menu. When
selects an exposure menu, the selected image
opens on the lefthand side of the window. 3
Read images are saved on the FCR PRIMA
Console system.

Cassette guide
Barcode window
1. Select the “Exposure Menu” (A’) after reading
an image.
Insert straight carefully
2. View an displayed image (B).

The following functions can be used for read
4. Check that the Cassette Removal Lamp is
images or exposure menu.
blinking on the operation panel and then
remove the cassette.
The Cassette Removal

Lamp is blinking.
Buttons Functions
Edit patient information
Add exposures menus
Change exposure menus
Change the order of menus in

the “Read Image” window
Register re-exposure menus
Delecte menus/inactivat images
Suspend*1 Close the “Read Image” window

and return to the “Main” window.
The current study is left in the
“Started” study status.
Image Viewer Close the “Read Image” window
and display the “Image Viewer”
window
"Chapter 5 Verifying and
Processing Images"
*1 The “Read Image” window can be displayed to

resume the exposure.

■ Finishing Exposure / Reading
If there are multiple exposure menus, proceed to
take X-rays, insert cassettes into the “Image Reader”
and view the resultant images with regard to the rest
1. Click [Completed] (C).
of the exposure menus. →→The “Read Image” window closes and returns to
• The following kinds of measured values can be the “Main” window.
added on the “Read Image” window.
Measure line segment
3 Simplified cardiothoracic ratio Before ending exposure on the “Read Image”
window, check the patient information, exposure
Cardiothoracic ratio
menu, and image association.
Interline angle
If exposure menus for which images have not been
Dual angle
exposed are existed, the message displays. To
Cobb angle delete exposure menus for which images have not
Vertical interline angle been read and start up the “Image Viewer”, click
Orthogonal line compare [OK].
Three line segments angle B
Perpendicular segment measurement B
Pixel value
• In this case, the study status sets to “Completed”.
Polygonal ROI
If FCR PRIMA Console is configured to print the
“5.5 Adding Annotations on Images”
image on a film with the film print (optional) upon
completion of the exposure, the image is printed or
saved automatically.
• To reconduct a study, add additional menus or
complete the re-exposure procedure and display
the “Read Image” window.
“Chapter 9 Editing Study Information”

3.5 Import Various Images and Refer
In the “Import” window of “Main” window, DICOM images can be imported. Imported data and images
can be referred in the “Refer” window.
• Specify the media or folder and import DICOM images.
In addition, the images which have been saved on the disks from the “Study Operation” tab in the study
list can be imported. The data and images which were imported will be able to be referred to via the
“Refer” tab.
3
■ Operation Window ■ Importing DICOM Images from

the Media or Folder (Import
● “Main" Window - "Import" Window DICOM Off-line)
1. Insert the disk which the DICOM images are

(A)
saved on into the drive.
2. Click (A).
(B) →→The “Import DICOM off-line” window opens, and
the study information (D) displays.
When directly specifying the folder in which the

DICOM images are saved in, click the pull-down
menu (C) and specify it.
● ”Import DICOM off-line” Window Display Items
Displays Contents
(C)
Paitent Name of the patient
Sex Sex of the patient

(D)
Paitent ID Paitent ID of the patient
Study Date The date on which the

exposure was started
(E)
Study Time The time at which the
(F)
Modality The modality of study
(G)
Number of Number of images which are
images exposed
Multi-frame Existence of multi-frame

images

3. Select the study to import from list (D) with the 5. Select a management method of a study to be
check box. imported (F).
• To see contents of files, click (F). Select • To import as a reference, select "It will be retrieved
the file to open when the "Open" window opens, temporality for reference and then deleted after-
and then click [Open]. day(s).". Input the date to save in the column.
• When narrowing down the patients, input the • To import for storing, select "It will be managed by
3 “Patient ID or Patient Name” in the input field, then storing on the hard disk".
click .
6. Click [Start retrieving] ( G ).

4. Edit the patient information (E) if necessary.

Input/Display Items The image data can be imported and can be referred
to in the Image Viewer at the same time by clicking
Items Contents
[Viewer startup].
Overwrite the Put a check mark if the patient
patient ID and name of DICOM image
information and to import is to be overwritten to
import the patient ID and name of
FCR PRIMA Console database
and to be imported.
(Left side) The information of DICOM

Patient ID image to be imported is
Patient Name displayed.
(Right side) Input the information in the

Patient ID system.
Patient Name
For others (sex Put a check mark if overwriting

etc.), overwrite the sex of the DICOM image to
with the be imported to the sex
information in the registered in the system and
system importing it.
• If the information input in the right side column is

different with the information in the system, the
confirmation window to overwrite the information in
the system with the information input in the right
side column opens.
• If "Import DICOM off-line" window is opened while
the patient is selected in "Main" window, the
patient information selected in the "Main" window
inserted automatically into the right side column.
• Contents in the left can be pasted in the right by
clicking .

Chapter 4
4
Searching and
Searching and Referring Studies

Referring Studies
4.1 Flow for Searching / Referring ...........................................4-2
4.2 Functions of Study List....................................................... 4-3
4.3 Searching for Studies and Creating New Queries............ 4-6

4.3.1 Searching for Studies..................................................... 4-6
4.3.2 Creating New Queries.................................................. 4-11
4.3.3 Editing Queries............................................................. 4-13
4.4 Manipulating Studies......................................................... 4-15

4.4.1 Starting up the Start Study/Image Viewer.................. 4-15
4.4.2 Reconducting a Study and Editing its
Study Information......................................................... 4-16
4.4.3 Locking and Unlocking Studies.................................. 4-16
4.4.4 Completing and Verifying Studies.............................. 4-17
4.4.5 Deleting Studies............................................................ 4-18
4.4.6 Saving, Printing, and Transmitting Study Images..... 4-18
4.4.7 Outputing Study Information in Tabular Format........ 4-19
4.5 Referring Images................................................................ 4-20
4.6 Right-click Operation on the Study List........................... 4-22

4.1 Flow for Searching / Referring
The study images imported in FCR PRIMA Console after being exposed can be referred if searching by
a study status or modality in the “Image Viewer” window.
This section describes the flow of referring the images for a study after Searching for studies in the
“Image Viewer” window.
Searching for Studies
4
1) Click
2) Enter the search

queries
“4.3.1 Searching for Studies”

3) Search
Referring Images To the Image Viewer Window
4) Select a
patient
“Chapter 5 Verifying and Processing Images”
5) Select a
study
6) Refer images
“4.5 Referring Images”

4.2 Functions of Study List
Each part of the study list is described below.
Buttons and menus which cannot be selected or clicked exist by installation condition for option or by system settings
at the time of installation. Buttons and menus which cannot be selected or clicked will be displayed in gray or hidden.
Keyword
entry field
3) Main window 4) Search queries 5) Study operations 7) Thumbnail images
1) Study list operations 4

2) Page navigation
1) Study list Input and Selection Items

A list of the studies that matches the set of Items Contents
conditions selected in “Search queries”, is
displayed. To narrow down the search, enter a Selection Put a check mark when
selecting studies
keyword in the “Keyword entry field”.
Study status The progress status of the
study
Scheduled An exposure operation is

• When initially displaying the study list, display the scheduled with patient
information and exposure
first search condition results that are in the search
menus having been
conditions. registered
The default first search conditions is “All”.
Started*1 An exposure is in progress or
• When a study is selected, check mark is put in the
suspended
Selection check box, with its row displayed in
green. Completed The reading of all images is
• To select a single study, the following are shown completed and [Completed] is
below. clicked
- Select a row of study. Verified The image quality of images

- Put check marks to “Selection” check boxes. read is verified and [Verified]
is clicked
• To select multiple studies, the following are shown
below. Patient ID Patient ID of the patient
- Put check marks to “Selection” check boxes.
Patient Name Name of the patient
- To select a continuous sequence of studies
(range selection), drag the mouse up or down Sex Sex of patient
over the list with the row of a given study on the
Date of Birth Date of birth of patient
list selected. Alternatively, select the row of each
study while holding down the Shift key. Registration date Date on which the study was
registered (scheduled)

Items Contents Items Contents
Registration Time Time at which the study was Storage Disk Name of the storage disk
History With/without revision history
Study Date Date on which the exposure
was started DICOM Name of the DICOM server to
Transmission where images were
Study Time The time at which the transmitted
Study Instance UID Study instance UID
Modality Modality of study
• CR • MRI Image With/without image
• US • Others
4
DB DB administration conditions
• ES • DX
• CT Height Height of the patient
Measurement type Measurement result attached
Weight Weight of the patient

to an image
• Measure line segment *1 There are exposure menus in the study from which
• Interline angle images are to be read.
• Cobb angle
• Dual angle 2) Page navigation
• Cardiothoracic ratio Display other pages without changing the
• Orthogonal line compare
• Vertical interline angle current status of study selection.
• Perpendicular segment : First page
measurement B
• Three line segments angle : Previous page
B : Next page
• Pixel value
: Last page
Storage status Storage status of patient
information 3) Main window operations
• Not stored The following operations can be performed for
• Stored in hospital
the “Main” window or “Image Viewer” window
Lock Whether the study is locked with the buttons at the upper part of the “Main”
or not
window.
- The image is not locked
Locked The image is locked
Requesting The exposure requesting

• button
Physician physician.
Clear the information on diagnosis selected
Patient comment Comments which are input for
each study on the “Main” window or “Image Viewer”
window.
Study Description Name of the study menu that
has been created with the • button
“User Utilities”
Update the “Main” window.
Anatomical Region Region which was captured
• button
Menu Name of exposure menu.
Switch the auto image referring function to
Study no. Study no. registered in an image
ON/OFF.
Other ID Other ID of patient
Pregnancy status Pregnancy status of patient

• NO • Yes The show or no-show of the button can be
• Suspected • Unknow set with the display setting.
Late menstrual date Late menstrual date of patient “11.1.2 Initial Display Settings of the “Main” Window”
With/without report With/without report
# of Img Number of images of examination

4) Search queries
Display the search conditions which have been
The width of the “Main window” varies depending
upon the system settings at the time of installation. set. The study which matches with the
• Example whereas the “Main window” and the selected search queries displays as a Study
“Viewer window” are simultaneously displayed in a List.
single window “4.3.1 Searching for Studies”
• If the mouse pointer is moved over each tab in

“Search Queries”, “Study Operations”, and
“Thumbnail Image”, the windows which correspond
to the tabs will be displayed. 4

• Example whereas the “Main window” is displayed
in a single window
• If the mouse pointer is moved over each button in

“Study Operations”, the button names and function
descriptions will be displayed in pop-ups.
5) Study operations
Enable each operation on selected studies.
“4.4 Manipulating Studies”
6) Right-click operation on the study list

You can operate several functions through the
menu by right-clicking any study in the study
list.
“4.6 Right-click Operation on the Study List”
7) Thumbnail images
A thumbnail images of the selected study
displays.

4.3 Searching for Studies and Creating
New Queries
In addition to being able to search via the search conditions which are prepared in advance, new
search conditions can be created and searched with, various conditions such as study status and
modality, etc. can be specified, and studies can be narrowed down.
4.3.1 Searching for Studies

4 If a search query is entered, results are displayed in “Study List”.
■ Operation Window ■ Searches with Predefined

Queries
● “Main” Window - “Study List” Window
- “Search Queries” tab
1. Click “Search Queries” tab (A).
2. Select search queries (A).
Selection Items
Items Contents
All Display all studies
Today*1 Display studies which have

been started the exposure with
today’s study date
(A)
Study Display only studies in the
Scheduled “Scheduled” study status
Exposing Display only studies in the

“Started” study status
Unverified Display only studies in the

“Completed” study status
● “Main” Window - “Study List” Window Not Stored Display only studies in the “Not
Stored” storage status
Temporary Display by temporary search

Search condition
Condition
(B) →→The study which matches with selected search

queries displays in the study list.

■ Inputting the Search Conditions Items Contents
to Search for Studies Study Date*1 Date on which the exposure
was started
If search conditions are individually input, the
studies which satisfy those conditions will be Modality Modality of study
displayed in the “Study list”. • CR • MRI
• US • Others
• ES • DX
1. Click [Specify Condition] on the “Search • CT
Queries” tab (A).
Requesting The exposure requesting
→→The “Search conditions input” window opens. Physician physician.
2. Input/select each search condition.

Patient comment Comments which are input for
each study
4
● “Search Items” tab Measurement type Measurement result attached

to an image
• Measure line segment
• Interline angle
• Cobb angle
• Dual angle
• Cardiothoracic ratio
• Vertical interline angle
• Perpendicular segment
measurement B
• Three line segments angle
B
• Pixel value
Study Description Name of the study menu that

has been created with the
“User Utilities”
Anatomical Region Region which was captured

Input and Selection Items
Menu Name of exposure menu.
Items Contents
Study no. Study no. registered in an
Study status The progress status of the image
study
Other ID Other ID of patient
Scheduled An exposure operation is
Pregnancy status Pregnancy status of patient
scheduled with patient
• NO • Yes
information and exposure
• Suspected • Unknow
menus having been
registered Late menstrual date Late menstrual date of patient
Started An exposure is in progress or Storage status Storage status of patient
suspended information
• Not stored
Completed The reading of all images is
• Stored in hospital
completed and [Completed] is
clicked With/without report With/without report
Verified The image quality of images Lock Whether the study is locked
read is verified and [Verified] or not
is clicked
- The image is not locked
Patient ID Patient ID of the patient
Locked The image is locked
Patient Name Name of the patient
# of Img Number of images of
Sex Sex of patient examination
Date of Birth Date of birth of patient Storage Disk Name of the storage disk
Registration date* 1
Date on which the study was History With/without revision history

Items Contents ● “Display Items” tab
DICOM Name of the DICOM server to
Transmission where images were
transmitted
Study Instance UID Study instance UID
Image With/without image
DB DB administration conditions
Image information*2 Image information applied to

an image (name of a body
4 part)
Report Content Report content

Derivative image Derivative image of the

studied patient
Select the items to be displayed in the study
list from “Hide Items”, and click .
*1 When the starting date and finishing date are

specified, the specified period will be the search • Select the items not displayed in the study list
query.
from “Display items”, and click .
*2 The search conditions for image information and
• To change the display positions, select the items
the search range can be set on the “Display
whereas the display positions are moved, and click
settings” window.
[Up] or [Down].
“11.1.7 Display Settings of “Search Conditions • Selected items appeared in the “Study list” from
Input Window”” top to bottom in sequence, left-aligned.
• When setting the number of items which are to be
always displayed on the left side even when the
study lists are horizontally scrolled, set the number
of items in the field at the bottom of the screen.

● “Sort Order” tab 3. Click [Search].
→→The study which matches with selected search
queries displays in the study list.
The selected search conditions are retained as

“Temporary Search Condition”. If “Temporary Search
Condition” on the “Search Queries” tab is clicked, the
same search conditions will be searched with.

Selection Items
Items Contents
First-Priority Select the item that requires first

priority upon relocation.
Select ascending or descending
order.
Second-Priority Set Second-Priority Item as a

First-Priority Item
Third-Priority Set Third-Priority Item as a

First-Priority Item
• The display order of the study list can be sorted.

By selecting the heading of an item you wish to set
as a base, the items in the list will be sorted in the
ascending order (▲) or descending order (▼).
• The items and orders to be displayed in the study
list can be set in the display setting.
“11.1.4 Display Settings of “Study List” Window
(Optional)”

■ Narrowing down Search
Study can be narrowed down after search • Depending on how FCR PRIMA Console was
configured for the ID digit setting at installation,
queries are selected and search results are
each input patient ID is registered with 0s in the
displayed.
beginning accordingly. For example, if a patient ID
of 1 is entered where FCR PRIMA Console is
1. Set search queries to narrow search in the configured for 10 digits, the ID is displayed as
keyword entry field (B). 0000000001.
• If you enter multiple keywords in the keyword entry
field, the studies that match all of these input
“Search Queries” are entered in different ways keywords are listed.
4 according to the input items. See the following table. • If keywords are entered as search queries, the
keywords entered in the keyword entry field will be
Input Items given priority.
Items Contents
→→The search for studies is narrowed down to meet
Patient ID Enter a keyword in the entry the specified set of search queries.
field and press the “Enter”
Study Instance key.
UID
Studies which match Click to update the status of the list.
# of Img
completely with the keyword
Storage Disk searches.
Patient Name Enter a keyword in the entry

field and press the “Enter”
Registration Time key.
Study Time Studies which partly match

with the keyword searches.
Study Description
DICOM
Transmission
Sex Click at the rightmost end

of each entry field to open a
Study Status
pulldown menu and select a
Measurement query.
type
Storage/Print
Lock
Images
DB Management
History
Modality
Date of Birth Click at the rightmost end

of each entry field. When the
Study Date
“Specifying the Date“ window
Date of opens, specify a date and
Registration click [Setup].

4.3.2 Creating New Queries
Create search conditions by combining the patient ID, gender, study date, etc. In addition, which items
are displayed in the results can also be configured.

- “Search Queries” tab
■ Creating New Queries
Create search conditions based upon existing
search conditions.
The settings for the creating, editing, and deleting of 4

(A) search conditions, or where the display positions
have been moved will be set per each login user

unit.
1. Click [Edit] (B) on the “Search Queries” tab

(A).
→→The “Arrange Search Condition” window opens.
(B)
2. Select the original search condition from
“Display Items” (D) and click [Edit] (C).
● “Arrange Search Condition” Window You can not select “Temporary Search Condition”.
→→The “Edit Search Condition” window opens.
3. Change the “Query name” (E).

(C)
(D)
If the “Query name” is not changed, then the “Query
name” will be overwritten by the current query name.
4. Select the kinds of tabs, and set the search

queries (F).
● “Edit Search Condition” Window • When selecting the tab, the setting window is
displayed depending on the selected tab: “Search
Items”, “Display Items” and “Sort Order”.
• Since the study list comes up with the current
choice of search queries, edit them to create new
(E)
search queries.
(F)
(G)

“Search Items” tab: “Sort Order” tab:
Set the items to be used as search conditions. Set the order of list display.
4
“4.3.1 ■ Inputting the Search Conditions to Search “4.3.1 ■ Inputting the Search Conditions to Search
for Studies” for Studies”
“Display Items” tab:

Set the items that are displayed in the “Study list”.
5. Click [OK] (G).
→→The new search conditions will be displayed in the
“Search items”.
6. Click [Save].
“4.3.1 ■ Inputting the Search Conditions to Search

for Studies”

4.3.3 Editing Queries
The following operations can be performed to registered search queries.
• Editing search queries
• Deleting search queries
• Relocating search queries
• Setting the search queries under which a search starts up right after the startup of FCR PRIMA Console
■ Operation Windows ■ Editing Queries

● “Main” Window - “Study List” Window 1. Click [Edit] (B) on the “Search Queries” tab 4
- “Search Queries” tab (A).

→→The “Arrange Search Condition” window opens.
2. Click the desired button (C) and edit study

queries.
(A)
Buttons Functions
Edit*2 *3 Open the “Arrange Search

Condition” window and edit the
setting for selected search queries.
Delete*1 *4 Delete created search queries.
Up Relocate the display position of each

Down search query in the “Study List”.
(B)
Other Set other search conditions
Return to Return search conditions to
● “Arrange Search Condition” Window

the standard settings
standard
settings
Search Import the search condition

Condition
Import
Search Export the search condition

Condition
(C) Export
Only the search conditions in “Display Items” can be

edited. To edit the search conditions in “Hide Items”,
(D) select the relevant items and then click to
move to “Display Items”.
*1 Predefined search queries cannot be deleted.

*2 You may not be able to edit some windows or
items in the predefined set of search queries
depending on the selected search queries. Or
“Temporary search condition” can not be edited.

*3 The “Edit Search Condition” window opens with
settings of the selected search query.
“4.3.2 Creating New Queries”
*4 A message displays to verify.
Click [OK] to delete.
3. Click [Save] (D).
4 Click [Cancel] to cancel the edited content.


4.4 Manipulating Studies
The following operations can be performed in the study list depending on the study status.
- Viewing images in the “Image Viewer”
- Saving images to disks
- Loading images from disks
- Deleting studies
and so on.
In a Client/Server Configuration (optional), when a study is modified, edited, or displayed in the “Image Viewer” 4
window on one PC, that study cannot be modified, edited or displayed in the “Image Viewer” window on another PC.

4.4.1 Starting up the Start Study/Image Viewer
Starts up the “Image Viewer” to view images in the “Image Viewer” window.
■ Operation Windows ■ Starting up the Start Study/

Image Viewer
1. Select the images that are in the “Completed”
- “Study Operations” tab
(C) or “Verified” study status from the list (A).
• Multiple studies can be selected.

• Depending on the selected studies and functions,
the confirmation screen may be displayed for
continuing the processing, or the processing may
not be able to be continued.
(A)
2. Click [Start study/Image Viewer] (C) on the

(B) “Study Operations” tab (B).
• When the image in the disk is selected, the

“Requesting for Disk Insert dialog“ appears and
the image starts to be imported from the disk.
“3.5 Import Various Images and Refer”
• Images that have been loaded for viewing in the
“Image Viewer” window are automatically deleted
from the FCR PRIMA Console system when a
specified retention period expires. A retention
period can be set with the “User Utilities”.
“13.7 ■Changing the Time Period for Data Storage”
• You can do the same by:

- Selecting a study in the study list and clicking
[Image Viewer] on the right-hand side of the window.
- Entering the number of the study to be viewed in
the “Image Viewer” window (item at the left end
of the list).
→→The “Image Viewer” window opens.

4.4.2 Reconducting a Study 4.4.3 Locking and Unlocking
and Editing its Study Studies
Information If a study is locked, it is no longer accessible
In conducting a restudy, sets exposure menus for deletion.
for performing additional and re-exposure If a study is unlocked, it becomes accessible
operations. Study information can be edited by for deletion.
modifying or relocating menus in the display
order, replacing images and making
modifications to the Storage/Print settings.
1. Select a study from the list.
4 Also, the patient information can be modified.
Multiple studies can be selected.
1. Select a study from the list.

2. Click [Change Lock for Deletion] on the
2. Click [Edit/Re-Study] on the “Study “Study Operations” tab.
Operations” tab.
2.
• The selected studies are locked and are marked
“Locked” in the Lock column of the list.
• The selected studies are unlocked and are marked
“-” in the Lock column of the list.
2.
1.
1.
→→The “Main Menu Modification” window opens.

“Chapter 9 Editing Study Information”

4.4.4 Completing and Verifying Studies
Updates the study status to “Completed”, and verifying the study updates the study status from
“Completed” to “Verified” (the status appears in the list as “Verified”).
In case of connection to a Console, operation of [Complete Study] is not possible.
● Completing an Exposure Operation 2. Click “Complete Study” or “Verify Study” on

Completes the exposure operation for a study the “Study Operations” tab.
after verifying that images have been properly 4
read in all studies. When a study is completed,
If multiple studies have been selected and verified,

it is updated from the “Started” to the
“Completed” study status. they might take considerable time before being
updated to the “Verified” study status depending on
the number of selected studies.
If film printing (optional) or saving in a general- If the update of the study status does not complete
purpose file format (optional) is programmed by the minutes after the start of [Verify Study], contact our
“User Utilities”, the images in the study are official dealer leaving the FCR PRIMA Console
automatically printed or saved when the study is system untouched.
verified. Do not force FCR PRIMA Console to shutdown. To
do so may result in failure to execute studies next
“13.5 Setting of Printing, Saving and Transmitting
time FCR PRIMA Console starts up.
Images”
2.
● Verifying a Study
Verifies the image quality of read images in a
study. When a study is verified, the study is
updated from the “Completed” to the “Verified”
study status.
1.
If automatic saving of the images in a study to a
storage disk is programmed, the images are saved
to the disk when the study is verified.
If film printing (optional) or saving in a general-
purpose file format (optional) is programmed, the
images in the study are automatically printed or
saved when the study is verified.
“13.5 Setting of Printing, Saving and Transmitting
Images”
→→The verification dialog appears.
1. Select the study to change the study status 3. Click [OK].

from the study list.
When the status of study that an unexposed menu

exists is changing to “Completed”, the verification
window opens.
To delete the exposure menus from which images
are to be read and change study status to
“Completed”, click [OK].

4.4.5 Deleting Studies 4.4.6 Saving, Printing, and
Delete the study from the database of FCR
Transmitting Study Images
PRIMA Console. Save and print the selected study image.
1. Select the study from a list.

The deleted study cannot be restored.
Studies in the following study status cannot be

2. Click each item on the “Study Operations” tab.
4 deleted:
• Study in progress
The following functions can be used for study images:
• Studies being printed or being saved Selection Items

• Locked studies Items Contents
Thumbnail image Save as thumbnail images

output “7.8 Outputting
1. Select the study from a list. Thumbnail Images”
Create PDI Save into the PDI disk

“7.7 Saving to PDI Disks”
Printing on a film*1 Print on film
“8.3 Printing on a Film
2. Click [Delete study] on the “Study (Optional)”
Operations” tab.
Free layout printing Print images in Freelayout
2.
“8.4 Free Layout Printing”
Saving to Work disks Save into the work disk

“7.5 Saving to Work
Disks”
Saving to storage Save into the storage disk

disks “7.3 Saving to Storage
1. Disks”
DICOM Transmit to DICOM server

transmission*1 “7.4 Transmitting Studies to
DICOM Server (Optional)”
*1 Optional function
2.
→→The verification dialog appears.
3. Click [OK].
1.
If a study which cannot be deleted is existed, the

verification window opens.
To delete only those studies that can be deleted
among all selected studies, click [OK].

4.4.7 Outputing Study Information in Tabular Format
Outputs the displayed inspection in a tabular format.
1. Display the study to be output on the study

list.
2. Click [Tabular Format Data Output] on the

“Study Operations” tab.
2.
4

1.
3. Enter a file name, and click [OK].

→→Study information is output in tabular form.

4.5 Referring Images
Selects a study of the patient found to refer the study image in “Image Viewer” window.
■ Operation Window ■ Manipulating Studies

● “Main” Window - “Study List” Window, 1. Search a study to refer the image.
“Refer” Window
Select a patient to refer the image.
4 2. From the “Study List” (A), select the patient
in a “Completed” or “Verified” study status.
→→The study of the selected patient is displayed in

“Refer” window (B).
(A)
3. Select a study (B) to be referred.
4. Click (C).
→→The selected study is displayed in the “Image
Viewer” window.
“5.1 Flow of Verifying and Processing Images”
• When is clicked, the display is changed

to the following two types of layout.
- Layout for study date (default)
- Layout for study frequency
(B)
(C)
• displays on the image which the report is

registered. By clicking , input contents can be
confirmed.
• When (C) is not displayed at the bottom of “6.2 Creating/Editing the Report”
the “Refer” window, add operation items in the • You can do the same by:
“Display Settings”. - Double-clicking the study to refer in “Study List”
“11.1.11 Display Settings of “Refer” window” (A).
• If the items are not displayed underneath the - Dragging and dropping the thumbnail image
displayed in the “Image Viewer”.
“Refer” tab, then click .
- Starting up the “Image Viewer” from the “Study
List”. However when the “Image Viewer” is
started up from the “Study List, the simplified
“Image Viewer” which limits the output function
of image and so on opens.
“4.4.1 Starting up the Start Study/Image
Viewer”


The following functions are also available for a study.
: Reconduct a Study and Editing Information
A restudy can be set to perform additional and

re-exposure operations.
Also, the study information such as the menu
change of the exposure images can be modified.
“9.1 Starting up the Editing Function”
: Saving to a PDI Disk
Images for a study are saved in a CD-R disk or a 4

DVD-R disk in PDI format.

: Printing on a Film (optional)

Print the study images on a film.
“8.3 Printing on a Film (Optional)”
: Saving to a Storage Disk

Images for a study are saved in a storage disk which
is set in the DVD drive of a PC.
“7.3 Saving to Storage Disks”
: Transmitting Studies to DICOM Server

(optional)
Transmit images for a study to DICOM server.
“7.4 Transmitting Studies to DICOM Server
(Optional)”
: Measurement Summary
Display the measurement logs and create a report of
the measurement results.
“5.7 Using the Measurement Summary”
Click , when the item is not displayed in the

bottom of “Refer” window.

4.6 Right-click Operation on the Study List
You can operate several functions through the menu by right-clicking any study in the study list.
• Change Lock for Deletion

Switch between delete lock/unlock inspection.
“4.4.3 Locking and Unlocking Studies”
• Printing on a film
Print images of a study on a film
4 “8.3 Printing on a Film (Optional)”
• Free layout printing

Print multiple images on a film in a free layout.

• DICOM transmission
Transmit images of a study to a DICOM server.
“7.4 Transmitting Studies to DICOM Server (Optional)”
• Saving to work disks

Save images of a study to a work disk.
• Add to Search Condition “7.5 Saving to Work Disks”
Add the selected study items to the search
• Saving to storage disks
conditions, and narrow down the search
Save images of a study to a storage disk.
results.
• New Search
• Stored Image Import
Perform a new search.
Import stored images to the selected study.
• Start study/Image Viewer
“3.5 Import Various Images and Refer”
Start up the exposure of a selected study or
the viewer depending on the status.
• Patient information edit
Edit patient information.
• Edit/Re-Study
Perform a re-exposure or edit study information.
“9.1 Starting up the Editing Function”
• Complete study
Set the status of a selected study to “Completed”.
• Verify study
Set the status of a selected study to “Verified”.
• Delete study
Delete a selected study.
• Create PDI
Save images of a study to a CD-R or DVD-R
disk in the PDI format.

Chapter 5
Verifying and Processing 5
Images
Verifying and Processing Images

5.1 Flow of Verifying and Processing Images......................... 5-2
5.2 Outline of "Image Viewer" Window.................................... 5-3
5.3 Selecting and Arranging Images........................................ 5-4
5.4 Adjusting Image Display................................................... 5-12
5.5 Adding Annotations on Images........................................5-25
5.6 Free Drawing on “Image Viewer” for Informed Consent.... 5-39
5.7 Using the Measurement Summary................................... 5-41

5.7.1 Outline of “Measurement summary” Window........... 5-41
5.7.2 Creating and Editing the Measurement Summary..... 5-42
5.7.3 Saving/Outputting the Measurement Summary......... 5-45
5.7.4 Changing the Measurement Summary Settings........ 5-46
5.8 Applying Blackening Processing..................................... 5-51
5.9 Applying Trimming Processing........................................5-55
5.10 Saving/Verifying/Suspending Images.............................. 5-60

5.1 Flow of Verifying and Processing Images
This section describes the flow of verifying and processing images that are exposed/read or searched/
referred.
Expose/Read Search/Refer
“Chapter 3 Taking and Reading X-ray of a Subject” “Chapter 4 Searching and Referring Studies”
Select and arrange images Adjust image display

5
Select images Adjust gradation, rotate/flip

Adjust place and display pattern Magnify/reduce, apply presets
“5.3 Selecting and Arranging Images” “5.4 Adjusting Image Display”
Display of Confirmation Results Verify/suspend images
Arrow, marker, measured value of length, CTR, and angle Verify/suspend

between two line segments
“5.10 Saving/Verifying/Suspending Images”
Free Drawing for Informed Consent
Past measurement log referring and output of measurement
result report
Applying every kind of processings
Print/Save
“5.5 Adding Annotations on Images” “Chapter 6 Using Report Function”
“5.6 Free Drawing on“ Image Viewer” for Informed Consent” “Chapter 7 Image Storage from Each Window”
“5.7 Using Measurement Summary” “Chapter 8 Printing Images”
“5.8 Applying Blackening Processing”
“5.9 Applying Trimming Processing”

5.2 Outline of "Image Viewer" Window
This section describes the outline of names of each part and functions for "Image Viewer" window.
7) Indicator
1) Display Check Box
2) Patient Information
8) [Customize]
3) Tool bar
9) [Restore]/[Retry]
4) Study Summary
6) Sub-window
5
10) Report

5) Image Cart
1) Display Check Box 5) Image Cart

Display/Hide each window of toolbar, patient A window to put images to save or print.
information, study summary, image cart, and Images in the image cart can be saved/printed.
report. "Chapter 7 Image Storage from Each Window"
2) Patient Information 6) Sub-window
The patient ID, name, sex, date of birth and Sub-window to display images.
age of the displayed image displays. Multiple sub-windows can be displayed, and
When the patient information is set to hide in multiple images can be displayed in the sub-
“1) Display Check Box”, the patient information window.
is displayed in the header of the sub-window. "5.3 ■Displaying Multiple Sub-windows Lined up"
The patient information of the displayed image "5.3 ■Displaying Multiple Images Lined up in the
can be modified by clicking the [Edit Patient Sub-window"
information] button at the left side.
7) Indicator
The patient information can also be modified
The indicators show the statuses of hardware
by clicking the patient information column.
being connected to this product and events,
"9.9 Editing Patient Information"
which can be used for checking.
3) Toolbar 8) [Customize]
Each function of button to place a image into Display settings of "Image Viewer" window can
sub-window, to adjust display of image, and so be changed.
on displays.
"11.2 Changing Settings of “Image Viewer” Window"
"5.3 Selecting and Arranging Images” to “5.8
Applying Blackening Processing” 9) [Restore]/[Retry]
Image adjustment, such as changing gradation
4) Study Summary and so on, can be undone/redone.
The study image of the patient selected in the
"5.4 ■Resetting the Image Processings”
"Main" window displays as a list.
By selecting the modality in the pull-down 10) Report
menu, the study which displays in the image Report can be created by adding comments to
summary can be narrowed. study images, putting annotations to schema
"5.3 Selecting and Arranging Images” images. Only one report can be created for
each study image.
"Chapter 6 Using Report Function"

5.3 Selecting and Arranging Images
Displays images that are exposed/read, searched/referred in the “Image Viewer” window.
Switches image, changes the display pattern of images, or displays past study images side by side
with the current image to adjust image display, process images or add annotations on images.
■ Descriptions of Functions ■ Operation Windows

● Switching images ● “Basic Operation” Tool Bar
Images which display on the sub-window can
be switched by the image unit inside the study
or study unit. Also, images can be displayed by
5 adding a window.
“■ Switching Displayed Images”
“■ Displaying the Image of Previous or Next

Study”
“■ Adding a Sub-window and Displaying the
(A)
Image”
● Displaying Sub-windows and Images ● “Other” Tool Bar

Lined up
When comparing multiple studies and so on,
images can be displayed and lined up in
columns by lining up multiple sub-windows or
dividing the sub-window.
“■ Displaying Multiple Sub-windows Lined up”
“■ Displaying Multiple Images Lined up in the
Sub-window”
(B)
● Switching and Maximizing Sub-windows,

Displaying information, etc.
Images can be displayed easier to see by
● “Study summary” Window
(E) (D)
switching the display position of sub-window,
maximizing sub-window itself, and switching (C) (F)
the display of images and sub-windows.
“■ Maximizing the Sub-window”
“■ Close the Sub-window”
“■ Switching the Display Position” (G)
“■ Displaying/Hiding Thumbnail Images”
“■ Displaying/Hiding Various Information on the Image”
“■ Displaying as a Cine Display Mode”
“■ Registering Displayed Images as a Key Image”
“■ Registering Displayed Images as a Bookmark”
“■ Comparing with an Image Registered as a
Bookmark”
“■ Displaying the DICOM Header Information”
“■ Clearing Images”

● “Sub-window” ■ Displaying the Image of
Previous or Next Study
The image display can be changed to the
image of previous or next study in the study
list.
(H) (I) (J)
1. Click “Previous Study” or “Next Study” (B)

● “DICOM header information” Window on the “Other” tool bar.
The display of the study list is changed as follows.

• “Previous Study”: The study listed one above is
selected.
(K) • “Next Study”: The study listed one below is 5
selected.

→→The image of previous or next study is displayed.
■ Adding a Sub-window and

(L)
Displaying the Image

■ Switching Displayed Images Displays an image in a new sub-window.
Switches images which display in the sub- An image displayed previously moves onto the
window by the image unit inside the study or previous page.
study unit.
1. Select the study or image in the "Study
1. Select the study or image (G) in the "Study Summary".
Summary".
By selecting the modality in the pull-down menu of

By selecting the modality in the pull-down menu of "Study Summary" (F), the study of "Study Summary"
"Study Summary" (F), the study of "Study Summary" can be narrowed with the selected modality.
can be narrowed with the selected modality.
2. Click [Add] (E) in the "Study Summary".

2. Click [Switch] (C) in the "Study Summary". →→The new sub-window added and the image
→→Display on sub-window switches on the selected displays.
study image.
Sub-window can be switched by [Previous page]/

• Displayed images can be switched by the following [Next page] in the toolbar.
operations.
- Double-click the study of "Study Summary" or
image
- Drag and Drop the study of "Study Summary" or
image into the sub-window
• If one study has multiple images (study view/series
view etc.), displayed images can be switched by
clicking [Previous page]/[Next page] or rotating
mouse wheel on the image.
Navigation can be changed to per 1-page/1-image
by operating while pressing the Shift key.

■ Displaying Multiple Sub-windows ■ Displaying Multiple Images
Lined up Lined up in the Sub-window
When multiple studies are compared, multiple If one study has multiple images (series
sub-windows displayed lined up in columns. images etc.), the sub-window is divided and
multiple images are displayed lined up in
columns.
Maximum of 4x4 (16 windows) sub-windows can be
displayed lined up in columns.
• Maximum of 6x6 (36 windows) images can be
displayed lined up in columns on one sub-window.
1. Click [Layout] (A) on the "Basic operation" • To display how many images lined up as a default
tool bar.
display can be set by each modality.
→→The display pattern displays under the button.
5
"11.2.4 ■Setting the Display of each Modality"
2. Move the mouse on the display pattern and

click the display pattern of the sub-window to 1. Click (H) in the sub-window.
arrange. →→The display pattern displays under the button.

→→The sub-windows display lined up.
2. Move the mouse on the display pattern and
click the display pattern of the sub-window to
• If only one sub-window is displayed, the sub- arrange.
window reduces for fitting with the selected display
→→The sub-window is being divided and images are
pattern. To display images lined up, add a sub-
displayed lined up.
window.
■ Maximizing the Sub-window

"■Adding a Sub-window and Displaying the
Image"
• Also, the displayed sub-window and selected
When sub-windows are displayed smaller, for
image can be displayed lined up by selecting the
study (image) in the "Study Summary" and clicking example multiple sub-windows are displayed
[Compare] (D) when the sub-window is displayed. lined up in columns, maximize one sub-window
by hiding the buttons on toolbar except tabs.
1. Click ( I ) on the sub-window.

→→Buttons on toolbar hides and the sub-window
maximizes.
• The sub-window can maximize by double-clicking

the image.
• By clicking ( I ) once again, the window returns
to layout which displays sub-windows lined up.
■ Close the Sub-window

1. Click (J) on the sub-window.
→→The sub-window closes.

■ Switching the Display Position
When multiple sub-windows are displayed The display order of thumbnail images will not
change from the previous condition.
lined up and when the sub-window is divided
and multiple images are displayed lined up,
position of each sub-window (image) can
switch. ■ Displaying/Hiding Thumbnail
"■Displaying Multiple Sub-windows Lined up" Images
"■Displaying Multiple Images Lined up in the Switches the display/hide of the thumbnail of
Sub-window" study images.
The switched display position will not save. If the

1. Click [Thumbnail display] (A) on the "Basic
operation" tool bar.
image is displayed again, it will display as a previous
condition. →→The thumbnail image displays under the sub-
window.
5
1. Select the sub-window (or image) to be

dragged.
Each time of clicking, display/hide of thumbnail
→→The sub-window is being selected (In case of images can be switched.
images, the frame turns to green.).
2. Drag and drop the sub-window onto the

desired position of other sub-window (or
image).
● In case of switching the display position

of the sub-window
Select
Drag and drop
● In case of switching the multiple images

on the sub-window
Select
Drag and drop
→→The position of two images switches.

■ Displaying/Hiding Various ■ Displaying as a Cine Display
Information on the Image Mode
Set the following information to display/hide. Cine display mode can display and switch
• Attribute Information images automatically in the order when one
• Annotation/Shuttering processing study has multiple images.
• Ruler Display images after setting the switching
• Patient Positioning speed and repeating.
• Reference Line
1. Click [Cine display] (B) on the "Other" tool
bar.
• Attribute information does not display when the
→→The control bar displays under the sub-window
layout of an image is small.
and switches to the cine display mode.
• The ruler, patient positioning, and reference line
5 may not display due to the DICOM information of
2. Set the display method.
an image.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
1. Click [Overlay] (B) on the "Other" tool bar.

(6) (7) (8)
→→The item to display/hide displays.
(1) Cine progress bar

2. Put a check mark to the information to
(2) fps measured value
display.
(3) Reverse
Selection Items
(4) Repeat play
Items Contents (5) Play speed
Attribute Image incidental information of (6) Start position of the frame in the playback
Information exposure menu name, range
magnification rate, and etc. (7) Last position of the frame in the playback
Annotation/ Annotation or shuttering range
Shuttering processing inhering in the image (8) Current frame position
processing
Ruler A ruler
Images may not play in a set speed even fps has
Patient Position of the patient on the
been set.
Positioning image
Confirm images after confirming the measured value
Reference line Reference line on the image of fps.
The range of the frame to perform cine display mode

can be changed by dragging the start position of the
frame of cine progress bar (▲ on the left side) and
last position of the frame cine progress bar (▲ on
the right side) to the left or right.
3. Click (play).
• When is ON, images are playing reversely.

Reference line • When is ON, images are playing repeatedly.
→→The information which put a check mark on

displays on the image.
4. To stop, click .

■ Registering Displayed Images 2. Click [Register Bookmark] (B) on the “Other”
tool bar.
as a Key Image
Registers the displayed image as a key image.
You can do the same by:
• Pressing “Ctrl+B” on the keyboard while selecting
By registering the key image, only the key image can the image.
be easily displayed from the pull-down menu of the • Right-clicking anywhere in the image pane and
sub-window. selecting “Bookmark” - “Bookmark Register”.
→→The “Register bookmark” window opens.
3. Register the bookmark information.

Items Contents
5
1. Select the image. Bookmark name Enter the bookmark name.

→→The frame of the selected image turns to green.
Anatomical Enter a body part. *1
Region
2. Click [Register key image] (A) on the "Basic
Free Enter a free classification. *1
classification
Comment Enter comments.

You can do the same by pressing "K" on the
keyboard while selecting the image. *1 You can select the character string used in the
image registered as a bookmark from the pull-
→→The image registers as a key image. down menu.
4. Click [OK].
For the key image, an icon displays on the upper left
of the image.
3.
■ Registering Displayed Images

as a Bookmark
4.
Register a displayed image as a bookmark.
→→The selected string is set as a bookmark.

1. Select the image.
→→The frame of the selected image turns to green.
An icon is displayed on the upper left of the image
registered as a bookmark.

■ Comparing with an Image ● Changing the display settings of
“Bookmark setting Window”
Registered as a Bookmark
Display additionally an image registered as a 1. Click and select “User setting”.
bookmark, and compare the image on the
viewer.
- To export the bookmark information, select
● Referring to the bookmark image “Bookmark export”.
- To import the bookmark information, select
1. Click [Bookmark Reference] (B) on the “Bookmark import”.
“Other” tool bar.
5 • Pressing “B” on the keyboard while selecting the

image.
• Right-clicking anywhere in the image pane and →→The “Bookmark setting” window opens.
selecting “Bookmark” - “Bookmark reference”.

2. Select each tab, and change the settings.
→→The “Bookmark reference” window opens.
○ “List” tab
2. Select the bookmark image to be referred to. Sets the row and order to be displayed in
the list, and the sort conditions.
• Enter a character string in the “Characters for

Search” and click then the bookmark
information including the string can be displayed.
• When editing a registered bookmark, select the
bookmark and click [Edit]. The “Register
bookmark” window opens.
• When deleting a bookmark, select the bookmark
and click [Delete].
• When changing the display settings of “Bookmark
setting” window, click .
“●Changing the display settings of “Bookmark
setting” window”
○ “Filter” tab
3. Click [Select]. Sets the row and order to be used for
filter, and ON/OFF of the automatic filter.
2.
3.
→→A sub-window is added, and the image of the
selected bookmark is displayed.

○ “Other” tab ■ Displaying the DICOM Header
Sets the thumbnail size or font size.
Information
Displays the DICOM header information of the
selected image.
1. Click [DICOM header] (B) from the "Other"

tool bar.
→→The "DICOM header information" window opens.
You can do the same by selecting the "DICOM

header information" from the right-click menu.
2. Confirm the DICOM header information (J).

The following setting items selectable with “Other” on
the “Bookmark setting” window are the same as
• The display contents of the header information can
those of “Other” on the display settings window on
be filtered by selecting the tag from the "Tag
the viewer screen.
selection" column.
- Public & Private
- Public Only
- Private Only
• Return to the standard settings
• By entering a character string into the "Characters
“11.2.12 Returning to Standard Settings”
for Search" column and clicking , the DICOM
• Export of setting information, Import of setting
header information which contains the character
information
string can be displayed.
“11.2.13 Importing/Exporting Settings”
3. Click [OK]. 3. Click [Close] (K) to close the "DICOM header

information" window.
→→Returns to “Bookmark reference” window.
■ Clearing Images
1. Click [Clear image] (A) on the "Basic
→→The sub-window closes, and images displayed will
be cleared.

5.4 Adjusting Image Display
Adjusts gradation, rotates/flips, magnifies/reduces selected or arranged images.
■ Descriptions of Functions ● Printing the Current View of the

Displayed Image
Images that are displayed in the “Image
Print the image being displayed on the Image
Viewer” window can be subjected to the image
Viewer with the current view.
processing listed below.
"■ Printing the Current View of the Displayed Image"
● Changing the Gradation

(Contrast and Density) of Images ● Resetting the Image Processings
Changes the contrast and density temporarily. Resets the image processings and reverses
5 "■ Changing the Gradation (Contrast and Density)" the image status.
"■ Resetting the Image Processings"
● Magnifying/Reducing Images and
● Switching the Tool Using the Quick
Moving the Display Position

Magnifies and reduces images temporarily. The Mouse Function
display position can be moved by dragging while The tool can be switched by the mouse
the image is magnified. Also, one part of the operation.
image can be magnified by magnifying glass. "■ Switching the Tool Using the Quick Mouse
"■ Magnifying/Reducing" Function"
“■ Moving a Display Position while Magnification/
reduction” ● Operation with the Touch Panel Monitor
The “Image Viewer” window can be operated
"■ Moving Images"
by input with finger movement on the touch
"■ Magnifying Images by Magnifying Glass" panel monitor.
● Reverse/Rotate and Flip "■ Operation with the Touch Panel Monitor"
Reverses and rotates/flips the image.

"■ Reversing Images"
"■ Rotating and Flipping"
● Changing the FCR Image Processing

Parameters
For the image of FCR study (unprocessed),
FCR image processing parameters can be
changed. Also, the changed parameters can
be registered as a preset settings and images
which are displaying by applying the registered
preset settings can be processed at once.
"■ Editing FCR Image Processing Parameters"
"■ Registering Preset Image Processing Settings"
"■ Applying Preset Image Processing Settings"
● Linking the Image Processing Settings

Among Multiple Images
Applies the image processing, which have
been done to one image, to other images at
once by linking multiple images.
"■ Linking Image Processing Among Multiple Images"

■ Operation Windows ● “Organize preset list”
● “Basic operation” Tool Bar (K)
(M)
(N)
(L)
(O)
(P)
(Q)
(R)
● “Register Preset Name”

(A)
● “Image rotation/reversal settings” (S)

5
Window

(T)
(B)
(C)
(D)
● “Changing FCR Image Processing

Parameters” Window
(E)
(F) (H)
(I) (G) (J)

■ Changing the Gradation
(Contrast and Density) In case of monochrome images other than FCR
images, the gradation changes as follows by
Changes the image contrast temporarily. dragging up, down, to left, or to right.
Operation Items
Only the monochrome image can change the Items Contents
gradation.
Drag up Window center (WC) increases
Drag down Window center (WC) decreases
Changes of contrast and density are temporary. To Drag to left Window width (WW) becomes
save the changing result of gradation, change it by narrower
FCR image processings.
Drag to right Window width (WW) becomes wider
5
"■Editing FCR Image Processing Parameters"
1. Click [Change gradation] (A) on the "Basic 4. To exit the gradation change mode, click
operation" tool bar. [Change gradation] (A) once again.

→→The system enters the gradation change mode.
You can do the same by right-clicking the image

You can do the same by right-clicking image pane pane and selecting “Gradation” once again.
and selecting "Gradation".
→→The shape of the mouse pointer will return to .
2. Move the mouse pointer over the image.

→→The shape of the mouse pointer will turn to .
3. Drag the mouse pointer up, down, to left or to

right.
Operation Items
Items Contents
Move up Increase contrast (GA)
Move down Reduce contrast (GA)
Move to left Reduce density (GS)
Move to right Increase density (GS)
Up: Increased GA
Left: Reduced GS Right: Increased GS
Down: Reduced GA
→→The image changes contrast (GA) and density (GS).

■ Magnifying/Reducing 4. To exit the magnification/reduction mode,
click [Magnification/reduction] (A) once again.
Magnifying/Reducing images do not reflect for

printing or saving. You can do the same by right-clicking the image pane
and selecting "Magnification/reduction" once again.
Images will come up having their original status next →→The shape of the mouse pointer will return to .
● Magnifying or Reducing with the Set

time they are displayed.
Images can be magnified or reduced in 2 Conditions

methods: gradually magnifies or reduces, and Magnifies or reduces with the following settings.
magnifies or reduces with set conditions (fit to
• AutoFit to Window :
the window, in full size, or in pixel scale).
Displays images in a width fit to the image
5
● Gradually Magnifying or Reducing pane.
With the magnification/reduction mode, images • 100%-Size Image :

can be magnified/reduced by dragging up or Displays images in actual life size (100%)
down on the image. magnification based on the aspect ratio of an
image.
1. Click [Magnification/reduction] (A) on the • Pixel Scale :
"Basic operation" tool bar.
Displays images with their picture elements
→→ The system enters the magnification/reduction mode. being represented each as one pixel of
monitor resolution.
You can do the same by right-clicking image pane
and selecting "Magnification/reduction". 1. Select a image you want to magnify or
reduce.
2. Move the mouse pointer over the image. →→The selected image pane will appear in bold
frame.
2. Select [▼] of [Magnification/reduction] (A) on
3. Drag the image and move the mouse pointer the "Basic operation" tool bar, select "Fit to
up or down. window", "100%-Size Image", or "Pixel
Operation Items Scale".
→→The image is magnified or reduced with the
Items Contents
selected setting.
Move up Magnifies
Move down Reduces

and selecting "Fit to window", "100%-Size Image", or
"Pixel Scale".
Size of images cannot reduce any smaller than its
original size.
→→The image magnifies or reduces.
When magnifying, the display position can be moved

by selecting "Panning" and dragging the image.
"■Moving Images"

■ Moving a Display Position while ■ Magnifying Images by
Magnification/reduction Magnifying Glass
Magnify/reduce an image by clicking the
mouse, and move the image display position
by dragging the mouse. The size of magnifying glass can be changed.
"11.2.2 Initial Settings of Annotation"
1. Select [Magnify] or [Reduce] from the toolbar.
1. Click [Magnifying glass] (A) on the "Basic
→→The system enters the magnifying glass mode.
5 [Magnify] and [Reduce] of the toolbar are not

• You can do the same by right-clicking image pane
and selecting "Magnifying glass".
displayed in the standard settings. To display a
• To change the magnification of magnifying glass,
button on the toolbar, make setting on the “Set

click [▼] under the [Magnifying glass] and select
Viewer tool bar” window.
the magnification.
“11.2.5 Display Settings of Toolbar”
→→Magnify mode or reduce mode is set. 2. Move the mouse pointer on the image.
2. Move the mouse pointer over the image. →→The shape of the mouse pointer will turn to .
→→The shape of the mouse pointer will turn to or 3. Click (hold) the image.
. →→The magnifying glass displays and the position
where clicked (held) displays and magnifies. By
3. Click an image. releasing the mouse button, magnifying glass exits.
→→The image magnifies or reduces.
By dragging the image up, down, to left, or to right,

With each click, the image is continuously magnified/ the position of mouse pointer on the image magnifies.
reduced around the center of the click.
4. To exit the magnifying glass mode, click

4. To continuously move the display position, [Magnifying glass] (A) once again.
drag the mouse to a desired position while
pressing the left button of the mouse on the
image.
and selecting "Magnifying glass" once again.
This is the same as the operation of [Panning].
→→The image moves to the way it is dragged.
5. To finish magnify or reduce mode, click again

[Magnify] or [Reduce].

■ Moving Images ■ Reversing Images
You can move the image only when the image is Reversing is a temporal function. Images will come
magnified. up in their original status next time they are
displayed.
"■Magnifying/Reducing"
1. Click [Panning] (A) on the "Basic operation" 1. Select the image to be reversed.
tool bar. →→ The selected image pane will appear in a bold frame.
→→The system enters the image move mode.

2. Click [Reverse] (A) on the "Basic operation"
tool bar.
• You can do the same by right-clicking the image
pane and selecting “Panning”.
→→The target image is reversed.
5
• To enlarge the panning range to the outside of the

image display region, click “▼” under [Panning] You can do the same by right-clicking image pane
and uncheck “Limit the panning range”. and selecting “Processing” - “Reverse”.

3. With the left-hand button of the mouse held

pressed, drag the hand-shaped pointer over
the image to an optional position.
→→The image moves to the way it is dragged.
4. To exit the image move mode, click [Panning]

(A) once again.

pane and selecting “Panning” once again.

■ Rotating and Flipping ■ Editing FCR Image Processing
Parameters
1. Select the image to rotate or flip.
→→The selected image pane will appear in bold frame.
If you select an image other than an unprocessed
2. Click [Rotate] (A) on the "Basic operation" FCR image, the FCR image processing parameters
tool bar. cannot be modified.
→→The “Image rotation/reversal settings” window
opens. 1. Select the image to edit FCR image
processing parameters.
→→ The selected image pane will appear in a bold frame.
pane and selecting “Processing” - “Rotate”. 2. Click [FCR image processing] (A) on the
5 "Basic operation" tool bar.
3. Select the direction to be rotated or flipped →→The "Changing FCR Image Processing
(B) (C). Parameters" window opens.
Selection Items
Items Contents You can do the same by right-clicking the image

pane and selecting "Processing" - "FCR image
No Horiz Flip Images not horizontally flipped processing".
Original Image The original image in the
current direction shown in the 3. Change the parameter values by sliding the
“Image Viewer” window
status bars.
Rotate Right 90° Rotated 90 degrees to the right
Rotate Left 90° Rotated 90 degrees to the left • The parameter values can also be changed by
Rotate 180° Rotated 180 degrees clicking [+] or [-]. When [+] or [-] are held, the
parameter value changes continuously.
Horiz Flip Horizontally flipped image • To edit DRC processing parameters, select [DRC]
and then click [+] or [-].
Original Image The original image in the
current direction shown in the • Certain image processing sequences have no
"Image Viewer" window effect when carried out concurrently. Each image
processing sequence takes the course shown
Horizontal Flip Horizontally flipped
below.
Vert Flip Vertically flipped
DRC GP/MFP
H-Flip + Right Horizontally flipped and then
90° rotated 90 degrees to the right
H-Flip + Left 90° Horizontally flipped and then TAS GP/RP

rotated 90 degrees to the left
○: Exclusive control
• By clicking [Default] (G), the parameter values can
The frame of the selected image turns to green. be changed to the default image processing
parameters according to exposure menus.
• By clicking [Preset Setting] (F), if an image is an
4. Click [Selection] (D). unprocessed FCR image, the "Organize preset
→→The image rotates/flips. list" window opens and image processing
parameters can be changed to preset settings
which have been registered.
• For CR images, the images can be rotated in the 1) Select [Anatomical Region] (K) and [Preset
"Read Image" window when reading the image. Name] (L).
"3.4 ■ Viewing Read Images" 2) Click [Apply] (Q).
• For images other than FCR images, the images →→Image processing parameters change to preset
can be rotated/flipped only on the Image Viewer. settings and the previewing image of "Changing
Changes due to rotation/flipping cannot be saved. FCR Image Processing Parameters" renews.

GP (Gradation Processing) Parameter DRC (Dynamic Range Control Processing) Parameter
Items Contents Items Contents
GA Slope of the gray level curve DRN Mask size of DR compression
Characteristics Adjust the image contrast Characteristics Set the processing region to
match DRT
GT Shape of the gray level curve
DRT DR compression filter type
Characteristics Yield the same result as
changing the γ-curve of X-ray Characteristics Set the density region for
films processing
GC Center density of gray level DRE Enhancement of DR

curve slope compression filter processing
Characteristics Change GA according to the Characteristics Change the enhancement level

density specified here of processing in accordance with
GS Parallel shift of the gray level

the specified value
5
curve

Characteristics Change the display density of TAS (Tomographic Artifacts Suppression
the entire image Processing) Parameter
Items Contents
RP (Spatial Frequency Processing) Parameter ORN One-dimensional unsharpness

mask
Items Contents
Characteristics Set the most effective size for the
RN Enhanced frequency band for tomographic angle
frequency processing
ORE Enhancement level of one-
Characteristics The frequency band specified dimensional unsharpness mask
here is subjected to enhanced processing
processing
Characteristics Change the enhancement level
RT Shape of the enhanced curve of processing in accordance with
corresponding to the density of the specified value
the image
ORD Processing direction of one-
Characteristics By changing this parameter, the dimensional unsharpness mask
enhancement level can be
adjusted within a certain density Characteristics Set in accordance with the
region reading direction and orbital
direction of tomography
RE Enhancement of frequency
processing

of processing in accordance with
the specified value

MFP (Multi-objective Frequency Processing) 4. Click [Refresh] (H).
Parameter (Optional)
→→The image processes with modified condition and
Items Contents the previewing image reproduces.
MDB DR compression frequency type 5. Check the previewing image and click [Apply]
(J).
Characteristics Set the processing region to
match MDT →→The image in the sub-window changes and
displays according to the parameters.
MDT DR compression filter type
Characteristics Set the density region for

processing
MDE Enhancement of DR
compression filter processing

5 of processing in accordance with
the specified value
MRB Enhanced frequency band for

frequency processing
Characteristics This frequency band is subjected

to enhanced processing
MRT Shape of the enhanced curve

corresponding to the density of
the image
Characteristics By changing this parameter, the

enhancement level can be
adjusted within a certain density
region
MRE Enhancement of frequency

processing

of processing in accordance with
the specified value
Sensitivity, Latitude
Items Contents
Sensitivity Central point of the image reading

(S-value) sensitivity established by the EDR
(automatic sensitivity adjustment
feature)
Characteristics The higher the incident X-ray level,
the lower the S-value becomes;
the lower the incident X-ray level,
the higher the S-value becomes
Latitude Reading latitude point of the image
(L-value) reading sensitivity established by
the EDR (automatic sensitivity
adjustment feature)
Characteristics Give a logarithmic reading of the
range of incident X-ray levels
(minimum to maximum)

■ Registering Preset Image ■ Applying Preset Image Processing
Processing Settings Settings
The image processing settings for the selected Batch processing of displayed images is
image are registered as preset settings. possible by selecting saved preset image
processing.
1. Select the image.
2. Click [FCR image processing] (A) on the Preset settings are applicable to FCR study
"Basic operation" tool bar. (unprocessed) images and monochrome images
except FCR study images.
→→The "Changing FCR Image Processing
Parameters" window opens.
1. Select the image to be manipulated.
3. Click [+] or [-] and set the parameter values
register as a preset settings (E).
→→The selected image pane will appear in a bold
frame.
5
"■Edting FCR Image Processing Parameters"

2. Click [Preset] (A) on the "Basic operation"
4. Click [Preset Setting] (F). tool bar (or [Preset all] on the "Other" tool
→→The "Organize preset list" window opens. bar).
→→The preset displays in the list.
5. Click [New Registration] (M).
→→The "Register Preset Name" window opens. 3. Select the preset settings.
6. Input the preset name in [Preset Name] (S).
When the [Preset all] is clicked, settings to apply
7. Click [OK] (T). from the preset settings of all of the body parts can
be selected, regardless of the displayed body part of
→→The preset name registers.
the image.
8. Check the preset name. →→Image processing is done according to the

selected preset settings.
• By clicking [Show/Hide] (O), whether to display as

a preset can be set.
When preset settings are assigned to keypad keys,
• By clicking [Change Name] (N), the preset name image processing can be done by pressing a keypad
can be changed. key.
• By clicking [Delete] (P), the preset can be deleted.
"13.17 Preset Setting"
• By dragging and dropping, the display order of
preset can be changed.
9. Click [Close] (R).

→→The system returns to "Changing FCR Image
Processing Parameters" window.
10. Click [Cancel] ( I ).

■ Linking Image Processing ■ Printing the Current View of the
Among Multiple Images Displayed Image
When multiple images are displayed, applies Prints images with their processing being
the image processing, which have been done applied on the paper.
to one image, to other images at once by
linking multiple images. 1. Click [Simplified Print] on the "Basic
• Apply the image processing of one sub- operation".
window to other sub-window
• Apply same image processing to all of
images in the sub-window
1. Display the image to be linked.

5
2. Link images and sub-windows.
• When an image processing of one sub-window is
applying to other sub-window, click all of on

By clicking ▼ on [Simplified Print], the paper
sub-windows to be linked.
orientation and printing format can be changed.
• When a same image processing is applying to all of
images in the sub-window, click on the sub-

window.
3. Perform the image process.

"■Changing the Gradation (Contrast and Density)"
"■Magnifying/Reducing" Selection Items
"■Moving Images" Items Contents

"■Reversing Images" Paper Orientation
"■Rotating and Flipping" Vertical Set to portrait orientation
"■Editing FCR Image Processing Parameters" Horizontal Set to landscape orientation
"■Registering Preset Image Processing Settings" Automatic * 1
Automatically set the paper
"■Applying Preset Image Processing Settings" orientation according to the
image size
→→Applies the image processing, which have been
Printing method
done to one image, to other images at once by
linking multiple images. Launch the Adobe Reader starts up and
Image Viewer *1 displays the preview window
Display print Skip displaying the preview
dialog window and display the printing
dialog
Direct print Printing process starts when
[Simplified Print] is clicked.
*1 Default setting
2. Print the image.
The template file for the simplified print can be

changed. Also, the attribute information to be
displayed on the image can be changed.
"11.2.8 Display Settings of Simplified Print"

■ Resetting the Image Processings ■ Switching the Tool Using the
Resets the image processings and reverses Quick Mouse Function
the image status. The tool to be used can be switched by mouse
operation.
By resetting, the data returns to the state it was in

prior to being saved. Once results are saved, they
1. Right-click while holding the left button on
the mouse.
would not be undone if [Reset] is clicked.
→→The mouse pointer switches to the one for the set
"5.9 ■Saving the Image Processing Result and
tool.
Annotation"
Quick mouse setting: "11.2.7 Quick Mouse
Setting"
5
The image processing can be undone or redone by
clicking [Restore]/[Retry] on the toolbar. With each right-clicking while holding the left button
on the mouse, the tool switches in the order of the

setting.
1. Click [Reset] (A) on the "Basic operation" tool
bar.

• Pressing “R” on the keyboard while selecting the
image.
• Right-clicking anywhere in the image pane and
selecting “Reset”.
To reset including magnification/reduction and

display position change by panning, click “▼” under
[Reset], and check “Reset the image magnification/
reduction”.
→→The image process resets and the data returns to

the state it was in prior to being saved.

■ Operation with the touch panel
monitor
When the touch panel monitor is used,
operation is possible by finger movement on
the “Image Viewer” window. Operation by
finger movement is done as shown below.
Always wipe the screen of the touch panel

monitor clean when there are fingerprints on it.
A dirty screen can lead to a wrong diagnosis.
5 ● Selection/Execution (operation
corresponding to a left click with the
mouse)
Lightly touch (tap) a display item or a button

with a finger.
● Page movement
Move quickly left/right while pressing with the
finger and then release (flick).
• Flick from right to left: Next page
• Flick from left to right: Previous page
● Zoom in/out
Widen or narrow the distance between the
finger tips while pressing with two fingers.
• Widen the distance between the finger tips:
Zoom in
• Narrow the distance between the finger tips:
Zoom out
● Panning
Move in parallel while pressing with two
fingers.
● Rotation
Press with two fingers, use one finger as the
center of rotation and draw a circle with the
other finger.
• Clockwise finger movement:
90° rotation to the right
• Counterclockwise finger movement:
90° rotation to the left
● Quick mouse operation

Lightly touch (tap) the screen with two fingers.
The tool is switched in the same way as quick
operation (right click with the left button
pressed) of the mouse.

5.5 Adding Annotations on Images
Arrows, shapes, text (character strings), and markers can be added to an image.
■ Descriptions of Functions ● Adding Measured Pixel Values

The pixel value of one point on the image can
be displayed, and pixel values (average,
standard deviation, maximum value, minimum
When a button on the toolbar is selected by a right-
click, the function of the selected button can be used value, and etc.) of range surrounded by the
continuously. diagram (ellipses, rectangles, and polygon)
To cancel the selection, click the toolbar button can be measured and added.
again. "■Adding Measured Pixel Values"
● Editing/Deleting Added Annotations 5

● Adding Arrows, Shape, and Text Annotations added on the image can be
Arrows and shapes (ellipses, true circles,

edited/deleted.
rectangles, or polygons) can be drawn on
"■Editing the Added Annotations"
images and text can be added.
Also, system markers registered in advance "■Deleting Added Annotations"
and user markers registered by a user can be
added.
As in case of image editing, the data can be returned
"■Adding Arrows/Shapes (Ellipses, True Circles, to the state where it was in prior to being saved by
Rectangles, and Polygons)" resetting the annotation before saving.
"■Adding Texts" "5.4 ■Resetting the Image Processings"
"■Adding Markers"
● Adding Measured Values ● Switching the Tool Using the Quick

The following kinds of measured values can be Mouse Function
added. The tool can be switched by the mouse
• Measure line segment operation.
• Simplified cardiothoracic ratio "■ Switching the Tool Using the Quick Mouse
• Cardiothoracic ratio Function"
• Interline angle
• Dual angle
• Cobb angle
• Vertical interline angle
• Three line segments angle B
• Perpendicular segment measurement B
“■Adding Measured Lengths” to “■Adding
Perpendicular segment measurement B”
The measuring procedures can be displayed in a

guide in regard to the following kinds of measuring.
• Simplified cardiothoracic ratio
• Cardiothoracic ratio
• Cobb angle

■ Operation Windows
● “Measurement function” Tool Bar
(D)
(A)
(B)
(E)
5
(C) ● “Marker Setting” Window
● “Property change” Window
(F)
(D)
(G)
(E)
(D)
(E)

■ Adding Arrows/Shapes
(Ellipses, True Circles, • Arrows, ellipses, and rectangles can be drawn by
clicking the start point and end point (same as
Rectangles, and Polygons) start point and end point of range to surround).
• It is possible to drag a mouse only inside the
1. Click an icon ([Arrow], [Ellipse], [True Circle], image pane.
[Rectangle], [Polygon]) (A) on the • When only two points or fewer are specified as
"Measurement function" tool bar. apex and the mouse is double-clicked, the display
returns to the status before apex specification.
→→An annotation is drawn over the range specified

You can do the same by right-clicking the image and
selecting “Annotation” - “Arrow” / “Ellipses” / “True with the mouse. The shape of the mouse pointer
Circles” / “Rectangles” / “Polygon”. will return to .
5
2. Move the mouse pointer over the image. ■ Adding Texts

→→The shape of the mouse pointer changes.
1. Click [Text] (A) on the "Measurement

function" tool bar.
The shape of the mouse pointer changes as follows,
according to the selected annotation.
• Arrow : You can do the same by right-clicking anywhere in

the image pane and selecting “Annotation” - “Text”.
• Ellipse :
• True Circle : 2. Move the mouse pointer over the image.

• Rectangle :
3. Click the mouse to specify the location to

• Polygon :
input texts.
→→The text input area and the insertion point are
displayed.
3. Specify a range of drawing with the mouse.
Operation Items 4. Input text.
Items Contents →→The entered text is displayed.
Arrows Drag the range from the start point

to the end point
Inputting texts up to a maximum of 120 characters
True Circle Drag the true circle’s range are possible.
Ellipses Drag the ellipse’s range
Rectangles Drag the rectangle’s range 5. Click the mouse at a position outside the text
Polygon Click to specify each apex of input area.
polygon, and double-click on the →→This operation will verify the text.
last apex
The shape of the mouse pointer will return to .

■ Adding Markers ■ Adding Measured Lengths
Adds system markers registered in advance or
user markers registered by a user.
Measurement results yielded by this processing are
1. Click [Marker] (A) on the "Measurement presented only for reference purposes without any
warranties of their accuracy. It is the user’s
function" tool bar.
responsibility to evaluate the measurement results.
→→The "Marker Setting" window opens.
You can do the same by right-clicking anywhere in The measured results are displayed to two digit of
the image pane and selecting “Annotation” - “Marker”. decimal point by round to the thousandth digit.
2. Select the marker to use (F). 1. Click [Measure line segment] (B) on the
5 "Measurement function" tool bar.
• Click [System] to use system markers or [User] to

use user markers and switch the displayed You can do the same by right-clicking anywhere in
markers. the image pane and selecting “General
• The user markers can be registered or deleted. measurement” - “Measure line segment”.
System markers cannot be registered or deleted.
"13.16 Adding/Deleting User Marker"
3. Click [Selection] (G). →→The shape of the mouse pointer will turn to .
4. Move the mouse pointer over the image. 3. Click the start point and the end point of a
straight line.
5. Click the mouse at a location where a marker Measurement can be performed by dragging the
is to be added. mouse pointer from the start point to the end point of
→→A marker is displayed on the clicked point, and a straight line.
The shape of the mouse pointer will turn to .
→→A linear length displays.
You can drag the mouse pointer from the start point
or the end point to adjust the line you drew.

■ Adding Measured Simplified 3. Click both edges of the longest span of the
medial borders of the thoracic cage.
Cardiothoracic Ratios
• When the mouse pointer is moved over an image,

Measurement results yielded by this processing are the vertical line guide appears.
presented only for reference purposes without any * The picture below shows an operational
warranties of their accuracy. It is the user's procedure.
The measured results are displayed to thousandth

digit of decimal point by round to the ten-thousandth
digit. 1) Click 2) Click
5
1. Click [Simplified cardiothoracic ratio] (B) on

the "Measurement function" tool bar.

• The longest span of the medial borders can be

• You can do the same by right-clicking anywhere in specified by dragging both edges of it.
the image pane and selecting “Special
measurement” - “Simplified cardiothoracic ratio". →→The maximum inside diameter of the thoracic cage
• If it is set to display the measuring guide, the is indicated.
measuring guide will be displayed. Perform
measuring in accordance with the guide’s 4. Click both edges of the longest span of the
explanations.
cardiac shadow.
• By clicking the image, the vertical ruled line guide

displays.
* The picture below shows an operational
procedure.

1) Click
2) Click
• The longest span of the medial borders can be

specified by dragging both edges of it.

3. Click the start point and end point of the

midline.
A guideline parallel to the centerline connecting the

start and end points of a midline appears.
→→The maximum transverse diameter of the cardiac

shadow and CTR are indicated. 4. Click both edges of the longest span of the
CTR mode exits and the shape of the mouse medial borders of the thoracic cage.
5 pointer will return to .
The vertical ruled line guide displays ajusting with

You can drag the mouse pointer from the start point the angle of midline.
→→The maximum inside diameter of the thoracic cage
is indicated.
■ Adding Measured 5. Click both edges of the longest span of the

Cardiothoracic Ratios cardiac shadow.
Measurement results yielded by this processing are The longest span of the medial borders can be
presented only for reference purposes without any specified by dragging both edges of it.
warranties of their accuracy. It is the user's
The measured results are displayed to thousandth

digit of decimal point by round to the ten-thousandth
digit.
1. Click [Cardiothoracic ratio] (B) on the

"Measurement function" tool bar.
→→The selected image pane appears in bold frames.
→→The maximum transverse diameter of the cardiac
shadow and CTR are indicated.
Cardiothoracic ratio mode exits, and the shape of
• You can do the same by right-clicking anywhere in
the image pane and selecting “Special the mouse pointer will return to .
measurement” - “Cardiothoracic ratio”.
• If it is set to display the measuring guide, the
measuring guide will be displayed. Perform You can drag the mouse pointer from the start point
measuring in accordance with the guide’s or the end point to adjust the line you drew.
explanations.

■ Adding Measured Interline Angles 3. Click the start point and the end point to draw
the 1st line segment and the 2nd line segment
Two lines are drawn on the image in the "Image of a straight line.
Viewer" window and the angle between those
two lines is measured and added on the image.
Also, if there is no intersection on the screen, Lines can be drawn by dragging the mouse pointer
the angle of the intersection of the lines from the start point to the end point for the 1st line or
extended off screen is displayed. the 2nd line.

presented for reference purposes without any
5
• Measurement result is rounded to first decimal

place and displayed to second decimal place. →→The angle (measurement result) between the two
• The angles which are to be measured can be line segments is displayed.
edited from within the lines drawn. The shape of the mouse pointer will return to .
"■Editing the Added Annotations"
1. Click [Interline angle] (B) on the or the end point to adjust the line you drew.
"Measurement function" tool bar.
You can do the same by right-clicking anywhere in

the image pane and selecting “Annotation” -
“Interline angle”.


■ Adding Measured Dual Angles ■ Adding Measured Cobb Angles
Adds on the image by drawing optional three
lines on the image of "Image Viewer" window
and measuring angles within 1st and 3rd line
and within 2nd and 3rd line. warranties of their accuracy. It is the user’s
Also, when the intersection does not exist on responsibility to evaluate the measurement results.
the image, the angle of the intersection existed
outside of the image can be displayed.
place and displayed to second decimal place.
• The angles which are to be measured can be
edited from within the lines drawn.
5 responsibility to evaluate the measurement results. "■Editing the Added Annotations"
1. Click [Cobb angle] (B) "Measurement

function" tool bar.

• The angles which are to be measured can be • You can do the same by right-clicking anywhere on
edited from within the lines drawn. the image pane and selecting "Special
"■Editing the Added Annotations" measurement" - "Cobb angle".
• If it is set to display the measuring guide, the
1. Click [Dual angle] (B) on the "Measurement measuring guide will be displayed. Perform
measuring in accordance with the guide’s
function" tool bar.
explanations.
You can do the same by right-clicking anywhere on

the image pane and selecting "General
measurement" - "Dual angle".

3. Click the start point and the end point to draw
the 1st line segment and do the same way to
the 1st line segment.
draw the 2nd line segment and the 3rd line
segment. 4. Click the start point and the end point to draw
the 2nd line segment.
Lines can be drawn by dragging the mouse pointer
from the start point to the end point for the 1st line,
the 2nd line and the 3rd line.
from the start point to the end point for the 1st line or
the 2nd line.
→→The angles within 1st and 3rd line and within 2nd
and 3rd line (measured result) display. The shape
→→ The angle within two lines (measured result) displays.
of the mouse pointer will return to .

■ Adding Vertical Interline Angle 3. Click the start point and the end point to draw
the 1st line segment and do the same way to
Draw optional two line segments on an image draw the 2nd line segment.
on the “Image Viewer” window, measure the
angle between the 1st vertical lines of the 1st
and 2nd line segments, and then add a mark Lines can be drawn by dragging the mouse pointer
to an image. from the start point to the end point for the 1st line or
Also, if there is no intersection on the screen, the 2nd line.
the angle of the intersection of the lines
extended off screen is displayed.

5

→→The angle formed by the vertical lines of the 1st
and 2nd line segments (measurement result) is
displayed. The shape of the mouse pointer will
“■Editing the Added Annotations”
return to .
1. Click [Vertical interline angle] (B) on the

“Measurement function” tool bar. You can drag the mouse pointer from the start point
[Vertical interline angle] is not displayed on a

toolbar in the standard settings.
To display a button on a toolbar, make settings
on the “Set Viewer tool bar” window.

measurement” - “Vertical interline angle”.


■ Adding Orthogonal Line 5. Drag the mouse pointer from the start to end
points at a desired position on an image.
Compare
→→The result of comparing the lengths of the 1st and
Measure the lengths of two intersecting line 2nd line segments is displayed at the dragged
segments, and add a mark to an image. position.

Measurement result displays until the second

5 decimal place.
1. Click [Orthogonal line compare] (B) on the You can drag the mouse pointer from the start point
“Measurement function” tool bar. or the end point to adjust the line you drew.

■ Adding Three line segments
measurement” - “Orthogonal line compare”. angle B
Adds on the image by drawing optional three
2. Move the mouse pointer over the image. lines on the image of “Image Viewer” window
and measuring angles within 1st and 2nd line
→→The shape of the mouse pointer will turn to . and within 2nd and 3rd line.

the 1st line segment.
→→The length of the 1st line segment is measured. warranties of their accuracy. It is the user’s
the 2nd line segment.
→→The length of the 2nd line segment is measured.
from the start point to the end point for the 1st line or
the 2nd line. “■Editing the Added Annotations”
1. Click [Three line segments angle B] (B) on the

“Measurement function” tool bar to add a
measurement value.

measurement” - “Three line segments angle B”.

■ Adding Perpendicular segment ■ Adding Measured Various ROIs
measurement B Adds on the image by measuring pixel values
Measure the length of the perpendicular line, (average value, standard deviation, maximum
and attach it to the image. value, minimum value, etc.) of region
surrounded by diagrams (ellipse, rectangle,
polygon).
presented for reference purposes without any 1. Click the button ([Ellipse ROI], [Rectangular
ROI], [Polygonal ROI]) (C) on the
"Measurement Pixel value" tool bar.
Measurement result is displayed to two digit of You can do the same by right-clicking anywhere on
decimal point by round to the thousandth digit. the image pane and selecting “Measure Pixel value” 5
- “Ellipse ROI” / “Rectangular ROI” / “Polygonal ROI”.
1. Click [Perpendicular segment measurement

B] (B) on the “Measurement function” tool 2. Move the mouse pointer over the image.
bar to add a measurement value.

the image pane and selecting “Special measurement”
3. Specify the range to measure ROI.
- “Perpendicular segment measurement B”. Operation Items
Items Contents
■ Adding Measured Pixel Values Ellipse ROI Click the start point and the end
point of the range surrounded by
ellipse.
1. Click [Pixel value] (C) on the "Measure Pixel Rectangular ROI Click the start point and the end
value" too bar. point of the range surrounded by
rectangle.
Polygonal ROI To create the range of the

You can do the same by right-clicking anywhere on polygon, click the vertices of the
the image pane and selecting “Measure Pixel value” polygon and double-click the last
- “Pixel value”. vertice.

The range of ellipse ROI and rectangular ROI can be
→→The shape of the mouse pointer will turn to . specified by dragging the mouse pointer.
3. Click the position to measure the pixel value. →→The shape of the mouse pointer will return to .
→→While clicking, the pixel value displays on the

upper part of mouse cursor.

■ Editing the Added Annotations ● Editing Properties of Annotations
Edits the width of lines, colors of lines,
Edits the position and angle of annotations.
background/font/style of texts.
Also, properties (thickness of lines, fonts, etc.)
of annotations can be edited. 1. Right-click the annotation and select the
"Properties".
→→The "Property change" window opens.
If a new annotation is added surrounding the original
annotation, the original annotation cannot be Select the tab of the object to be edited, and set
selected. By moving or editing the added annotation, the width of line/color of line or font type/style/size.
the original annotation can be selected again.
2. Edit the properties (D).
● Editing the Position and Angle of
Annotations
5
Depends on the annotation, items are different.
1. Select the annotation. Annotations Editable properties

Arrow, Ellipse, Width and colors of lines

2. Edit the annotation. Rectangle, Polygon
True Circle Width, colors of lines, and

Selection Items displaying a center point
Items Contents Text Font (character, style, size),
font color, background
Move Drag the mouse pointer to the
position destination Measure line Width and colors of lines
segment, Simplified
cardiothoracic ratio,
Drag
Cardiothoracic ratio,
Orthogonal line
compare, Ellipse
ROI, Rectangular
ROI, Polygonal ROI,
Perpendicular
segment
measurement B
Move 1) Select the apex of the annotation
measuring Marker Direction of marker
position (horizontal flipping, rotation),
font color, background
Select
Interline angle, Display the line style, line
Dual angle, Vertical color, measurement angle,
2) Drag the mouse pointer to the interline angle, and supplementary angle
destination Cobb angle,
→ The linear length is remeasured Three line segments
while moving and displayed angle B
Drag

Selection Items
Items Contents
Items Contents Measurement Select the area of angle to be
Width of line Select the thickness of lines of angle measured
each annotation *1 • Reference angle
Base of an angle at the time of
Color of line Select the colors of lines of each measurement
annotation *2 • Adjacent angle 1/Adjacent angle 2
Displaying a Put a check mark when displaying An angle next to the reference
center point the center point of the annotation angle
(settable only for the true circle • Vertically opposite angle
annotation) An angle on the diagonal line of
the reference angle
Font
Character Select the type font
Vertically Vertically
Style Select from normal, italic, bold, opposite Adjacent opposite
bold italic angle angle 1 angle
Size Select from 5 to 96 points Adjacent Adjacent 5

angle 2 angle 2
Font color and Reference

background angle
Font color Select the font color *2

Background Select the background *2 Supplementary Put a check mark when displaying
Flip horizontal angle will be the supplementary angle of an
displayed angle measured
Rotate
Original Image *1 In case of an arrow, the apex of an arrow becomes
90 right rotation bigger or smaller in proportion to the setting of
width of line.
180 rotation
*2 Color which has been set displays on the box.
90 left rotation By clicking the box, the window to select colors
opens and the color can be changed.
Font color and
background
3. Click [Apply] (E).
(A) (B) (C) (D)
→→Properties changes according to the settings.
A:W hite characters on black
background
B : White characters on transparent
background
C : Black characters on white
background
D : Black characters on transparent
background

■ Deleting Added Annotations
If a new annotation is added surrounding the original
annotation, the original annotation cannot be
selected. By moving or editing the added annotation,
the original annotation can be selected again.
1. Select the annotation to be deleted.

2. Right-click anywhere in the image pane and
click [Delete].
→→The selected annotation will be deleted.
5
To delete all of annotations on the image, right-click

the image pane and select "Delete all annotations on
image".
■ Switching the Tool Using the

Quick Mouse Function
The tool to be used can be switched by mouse
operation.
1. Right-click while holding the left button on

the mouse.
→→The mouse pointer switches to the one for the set
tool.
Quick mouse setting: "11.2.7 Quick Mouse
Setting"
With each right-clicking while holding the left button

on the mouse, the tool switches in the order of the
setting.

5.6 Free Drawing on “Image Viewer” for
Informed Consent
Lines can be drawn freely on the “Image Viewer” window with a pen.
■ Operation Windows ■ Using the Free Drawing Function

● “Other” Tool Bar
During use of the free drawing function, other
operations cannot be used. To use operations other
than free drawing function, click to turn the free
drawing mode off, or click
drawing mode.
to cancel the free
5

1. Click [Free Drawing] (A) on the "Other" tool
bar.
You can do the same by right-clicking the image and

selecting "Free Drawing".
(A) →→"Function" window appears.
2. Click each button (B) on the "Function"

● “Function” Window window to free draw.
Buttons Functions
Pen size
Click and select from the following
pen size
• Thin pen (3 points)
• Medium pen (9 points)
• Thick pen (27 points)
Pen color
Click and select the color
Drawing mode ON/OFF

Switching the function ON/OFF each
time of clicking
(B)
*1 *2
By clicking, capture the drew line and
screen
Delete all the drawn lines

*1 Captured image data displays in the "Paint".
*2 When images are displayed on multiple monitors,
the image data of both monitors are copied to the
clipboard as one file. In case of different screen
sizes, the images copied to the clipboard with their
upper edges aligned.
Image save arrangement:

Monitor configuration Image arrangement
Monitor 1 Monitor 1
Monitor 2 Monitor 2
5
Monitor 2 Monitor 2
Monitor 1 Monitor 1
3. Drag the mouse on the “Image Viewer”

window to draw a line.
4. To exit the free drawing function, click (B).

→→The “Function” window closes.
• When the free drawing function is ended, the

drawn lines are all deleted.
• When exiting the Free Drawing function, the
selected pen size and pen color are stored, and
they are set again when the Free Drawing function
is started again.

5.7 Using the Measurement Summary
5.7.1 Outline of “Measurement summary” Window
With the measurement summary function, logs of past measurement results can be referred in a graph
and the measurement results can be output.
This section describes about creating/editing the display settings for the graph of the measurement
summary and about importing/exporting the measurement summary settings.
1) Side bar for the measurement type 2) Graph

3) Measurement log list
4) Study assessment column
8) Save
5) Customize 7) Print a report

6) CSV output
1) Side bar for the measurement type 3) Measurement log list

Display the types of annotations on the image. Display all the measurement logs of the
By clicking a measurement type, the displayed currently referring patient as a list.
information switches to the information of the
clicked measurement type.
By double-clicking a measurement result, the
2) Graph correnponding study will be displayed in the Image
Display the measurement results until now in Viewer.
the graph.
4) Study assessment column
Input the study assessment for the
By dragging the bar between graph 1 (left side) and measurement result.
graph 2 (right side), the width of the graphs can be
adjusted. 5) Customize
Also by clicking the bar, graph 2 will be hidden. Change the settings for individual users or for
the entire system.
6) CSV output
Save the measurement results in CSV format.
7) Print a report
Create and print the report of the
measurement result.
8) Save
Save the created or edited measurement
summary.

5.7.2 Creating and Editing the Measurement Summary
Creates or edits the measurement summary for the measurement result, and saves it.
■ Operation Windows ● “Graph properties” Windows -

“Common” Window
● “Measurement function” Tool Bar
(A)
(H)
5
(I)
● “Measurement summary” Window

(B)
(C)
(D)
(E)
● “Graph properties” Windows -

“Individual graphs” Window
(F)
(G)

■ Creating/Editing the ■ Editing the Display Settings of
Measurement Summary Graph
Edits the display settings for graphs, such as
1. Click [Measurement summary] (A) on the items in X-axis and Y-axis, display font size,
“Measurement function” tool bar. and colors.
1. Right-click on the graph (C) and select

"Properties" from the right-click menu.
• Clicking in the "Refer" window after →→The “Graph properties” window opens.
selecting the patient in the “Main” window.
2. Select each tab (F) and set each item of the

graph.
○ “Individual graphs” Window 5

• Pressing "M" on the keyboard while selecting the
Changes the settings (G) for the applicable
image.

graph.
→→The “Measurement summary” window opens. Input/Selection Items
2. Select a measurement type (B) you wish to Items Contents
display. Item in X-axis Select the item to be set as a

→→The measurement summary of the selected X-axis.
measurement type will be displayed in a graph. Item in Y-axis Select the item to be set as a
Y-axis.
3. Edit the graph (C). Display in line Select to display the
"■ Editing the Display Settings of Graph" measurement result in line graph.
Display values Select to display the values of the

4. Select a study (D) to which you wish to input measurement results in the
the study assessment from the measurement graph.
log list. Display the base Select to display the set base
line line.
Ignore the sex Select to ignore the sex when

If the check mark on "Display target" is removed, the displaying the base line.
measurement result of the corresponding study will
be removed from the graph. Display legends Select to display the legend.
Age display Set the range of the ages to be

range *1 displayed in the graph.
5. Input the study assessment (E) based on the
measurement result. Maximum Select the maximum number of
display number measurement results to be
"■ Editing the Study Assessment" (from the latest) displayed in the graph.
*1 This item can be set when "Age" is selected in

"Item in X-axis".

○ "Common" Window ■ Editing the Study Assessment
Changes the settings (H) for all of the graphs.
Edits the study assessment (E) based on the
Input/Selection Items measurement result.
Items Contents
Font size Set the font size for all the texts The study assessment also can be set automatically
to be displayed in the graph.
based on the measurement result.
Background Set the background color of the Types of the study assessment results:
color graph.
“5.7.4 ■ Changing the Setting for Individual
Marker color Set the marker color in the graph. Users”
Assessment condition for the study assessment:
Marker size Set the size of the markers in the
graph. “5.7.4 ■ Changing the Setting for the Entire
System”
5
3. Click [OK] ( I ).
→→The system returns to the “Measurement
1. Select the study assessment.
summary” window.
2. Input the date of the next expected study.
3. Input the comment for the study assessment.
• By clicking [Paste], the “Select fixed phrase”

window opens. By selecting the registered fixed
phrase and clicking [Select], the fixed phrase will
be input into the study assessment comment
column.
• By clicking [Register], the comment input in the
study assessment comment column can be
registered as a fixed phrase.
• By clicking [Clear], the input comment can be
deleted.

5.7.3 Saving/Outputting the Measurement Summary
The measurement summary can be saved and can be output in the report or CSV format.
■ Operation Window ■ Printing the Measurement

Summary in the Report Format
● “Measurement summary” Window
1. Click (C).
Click ▼ on (C) to change the printing

format.
5

(A)
(B) (C)
Selection Items
■ Saving the Measurement Items Contents
Launch the Image Adobe Reader starts up and

Summary Viewer *1 displays the preview window
1. Click [Save] (A). dialog
→→The measurement summary will be saved. Direct print Printing process starts when
(C) is clicked.
*1 Default setting
2. Print a report.
■ Outputting the Measurement

Summary in the CSV Format
1. Click (B).
→→The “Save As” window opens.
2. Input the file name and click [Save] (A).

5.7.4 Changing the Measurement Summary Settings
The types of study assessment results for each measurement type and the study assessment condition
can be set.
Some setting items are set for individual users, and other are set for the entire system.
“■ Changing the Settings for Individual Users”
“■ Changing the Settings for the Entire System”
Also, the settings for the measurement summary in another PC or another user can be used by
importing/exporting them.
“■ Importing the Settings”, “■ Exporting the Settings”
Both the settings for individual users and for the entire system can be restored to the standard settings at the time
5 of installation even if the settings for the measurement summary have been changed.
“■ Restoring to the Standard Settings”
■ Operation Window ■ Changing the Settings for

Individual Users
● “Measurement summary” Window Changes the settings of the measurement
summary for individual users.
Settings which can be set for individual users
are as follows.
For each measurement type:

• Types of study assessment results
Example: Normal, need a complete
examination, etc.
(A) (B) • Display items in the measurement log
● “Measurement summary User setting”

Example: Study date, age of patient studied,
measurement type, etc.
Window
Common to all the measurement types:
(C)
• Action when a study log is double-clicked
• Default display of the side bar
• Font size
1. Click (A) and select "User setting".

→→The “Measurement summary User setting” window
opens.
(E) (D)
2. Select each tab (C) and change the settings.
● “Measurement summary System setting” • Settings for the study assessment result types and
Window display items in the measurement log list for each
measurement type
(G)
"● "Setting by measurement" Window"
• Action when the study log is double-clicked, default
display of the side bar, and font size
(F)
"● "Display Setting" Window"
3. Click [OK] (D).

(I) (H) summary” window.

● "Setting by measurement" Window ● "Display Setting" Window
1. Select a measurement type.
2. Select the "Study assessment" tab and set
the study assessment items.
Input/Selection Items
Items Contents
Operation when Put a check mark to close the

5
double-clicking a “Measurement summary” window
1. 2. study log when the study in the

measurement log list is double-
clicked.
Function of Each Button
Default side bar Select the default status of the
Buttons Functions
status side bar for the measurement
[Add] The “Add” window opens. Add type when the “Measurement
the study assessment item input summary” window is opened.
in the “Add” window to the list. Font size Set the font size of the study list.
[Change] The “Change” window opens.
Edit the selected study
assessment item.
[Delete] Delete the selected study

assessment item.
[Up] [Down] Switch the order of the selected

study assessment item.
3. Select the "Display column setting" tab and

set the items to be displayed in the
measurement log list.
3.
Items Contents
Display status If the check mark is removed, the

corresponding item will not be
displayed in the study list.
[Up] [Down] Switch the order of the selected

study assessment item.

■ Changing the Settings for the ● "Report setting" Window
Entire System
Changes the settings of the measurement
summary for the entire system.
Settings which can be changed for the entire
system are as follows.
For each measurement type:

• Settings outputting reports
Example: Title, display position of the graph,
template file to be used, etc.
• Assessment condition for the study
assessment Items Contents
5 Example: Normal if Time to next Input the time interval between
Ratio for younger ages > = 80, etc. study studies. When input, the date of
next study will be input
• Position of the base line in the graph

automatically into the "Next
Example: Base line is set on YY value of expected study" column in the
Y-axis and XX value of X-axis, etc. study assessment column.
Report title Input the title for the report of

1. Click (A) and select "System setting". measurement summary.
→→The “Measurement summary System setting” Report graph Set the default properties of
window opens. setting graph 1 and graph 2.
Properties setting of the graph:
2. Select a measurement type for which you "5.7.2 ■ Editing the Display
wish to change the settings. Settings of Graph"
Report template Set the template file to be used in

3. Select each tab (G) and change the settings. file the report of the measurement
• Settings for outputing report summary.
"● "Report setting" Window"
• Assessment condition for the study assessment
"● "Study assessment support" Window"
• Position of the base line in graphs
● "Study assessment support" Window
"● "Base line" Window" 1. Put a check mark to "Enable the study
assessment support function".
4. Click [OK] (H).
2. Click [Add].
1.
3. 2.
2. 4.
→→The system returns to the “Measurement →→The “Conditional equation setting” window opens.
summary” window.

3. Set the conditional equation.
Input/Selection Items • To change the settings for conditional equations,
select a conditional equation and click [Change].
Items Contents
The “Conditional equation setting” window opens.
Sex Select from the following: • To delete conditional equations, select a
• All conditional equation and click [Delete].
• Male • To arrange the display order of the conditional
• Female
equations, select a conditional equation and click
• Other
[Up] or [Down] to move it.
Conditional Set a conditional equation.
● "Base line" Window

equation
Study Select a study assessment result

assessment to be displayed when the value
satisfies the conditional equation. 1. Click [Add].
Study Input a study assessment comment 5
assessment to be displayed when the value
comment satisfies the conditional equation.

Examples of the conditional equations are as follows.
Ex. 1: The case that “Large heart” is assessed if the

cardiothoracic ratio is greater than 50%.
Items Setup value

→→The “Base line setting” window opens.
Sex All
Conditional
equation
[Cardiothoracic ratio]>=50 2. Set the base line.
Study Large heart
assessment Items Contents
Ex. 2: The case that “Normal” is assessed if the Sex Select from the following:
cardiothoracic ratio is greater than 35% or • All
under 50% . • Male
• Female
Items Setup value • Other
Sex All Base line Select the item for recognizing

recognition the base line.
Conditional ([Cardiothoracic ratio]<50)&&
equation ([Cardiothoracic ratio]>=35) Item in Y-axis Select the item name to be set as
Y-axis.
Study Normal
assessment Item in X-axis Select the item name to be set as
Y-axis.
Legend name Input the name of the legend.

4. Click [OK].
Line color Select the color of the base line.
Line Select the transparency (%) of

transparency the base line.
Base line value Specify the value of the base line.

3. Specify range Put a check mark to specify the
with values range of the values to be the
base line.
4.
→→The system returns to the “Measurement summary
System setting” window.

3. Click [OK]. ■ Importing the Settings
Imports the measurement summary settings.
2.
The following procedures are common in the user
settings and system settings.
1. Click (A) and select "User setting" (or

"System setting").
3.
→→The setting window opens.
→→The system returns to the “Measurement summary
System setting” window. 2. Click [Other] (E) ( I ) and select "Import of
5 setting information".
→→The "Open" dialog appears.
• To change the settings for the base line, select the
base line and click [Change]. The “Base line
setting” window opens. 3. Select an xml file of setting informaiton and

• To delete the base line, select the base line and click [Open].
click [Delete]. →→The setting will be updated by the imported setting
• To arrange the display order of the base line, information.
select the base line and click [Up] or [Down] to
move it. 4. Click [OK] (D) (H).
summary” window.
■ Restoring to the Standard

Settings ■ Exporting the Settings
Restores the changed measurement summary
Exports the measurement summary settings.
settings to the standard settings at the time of
installation.
"System setting").
→→The setting window opens.
"System setting").
→→The setting window opens. 2. Click [Other] (E) ( I ) and select "Export of
setting information".
2. Click [Other] (E) ( I ) and select "Return to the →→The "Save As" dialog appears.
standard settings".
→→Returns to the standard setting. 3. Select an exporting destination folder and
input a file name, and then click [Save].
3. Click [OK] (D) (H). →→The setting information will be exported.
summary” window. 4. Click [OK] (D) (H).
summary” window.

5.8 Applying Blackening Processing
Apply blackening processing to a selected image.
• Blackening processing is applicable only to FCR study images.

• Before outputting a blackened image to a storage destination, be sure to check the blackening range.
The result of blacking is embedded in an image according to the data outputted to the storage destination, and
the image cannot be restored to the state before the blackening.
■ Notes for Performing Exposures necessary or correct the image appropriately

by using Manual Blackening Processing.
Be cautious for the following points when
performing exposures to take the target images • Do not set the side of the irradiated field too 5
for the Automatic Blackening Processing. short, otherwise it is highly probable that the
excessively short side may not be recognized
● General notes

properly remaining then unpainted.
Refer to each item written in "Notes for White portions marked with arrows in the
performing exposures" before performing illustration below represent those that were
exposure. recognized erroneously or those that might
● Notes on the irradiated field not be recognized properly remaining then

unpainted.
• Collimation applies only to rectangles.
Therefore, do not set collimation to irradiated
field other than rectangles, such as circle,
ellipse, semi-circle, polygon and others.
Automatic Blackening
Processing
(Good) (Not good) (Not good) Processing
• A lead character or marker should be located

within the irradiated field. If a lead character • Position the side of the irradiated field so that
or marker is outside the irradiated field, it will it does not overlap with an artificial object,
be painted out by this processing or will not such as a protector, or any thick subject. It is
be recognized appropriately or will be highly possible that the side of the irradiated
recognized incorrectly. field that appears unclear, as it overlaps with
an artificial object, such as a protector, or any
thick subject, will not be recognized
remaining then unpainted.
Automatic Blackening The white portion marked with an arrow in the
Processing
illustration below represents a portion that
might not be recognized remaining then
unpainted.
Processing
● Other notes
Processing
In the cases shown below, an image area may

not be painted out as it is not recognized
correctly or it is recognized incorrectly by
Automatic Blackening Processing. In such an
Processing
instance, devise a proper exposure method as

■ Operation Window 4. Specify the blackening range.
Operation Items
● “Modify Study” Tool Bar
Items Contents
Rectangular blackening (Inside), Drag the range
Rectangular blackening (Outside) to be enclosed
in a rectangle.
Polygonal blackening (Inside), Click the apex
(A) Polygonal blackening (Outside) of a polygon,
and double-
click at the last
apex position.
■ Applying Blackening
Processing by Specifying a
5 Range
The range of rectangular blackening (inside)/
(outside) can be specified also by clicking the start
Blacken the inside or outside of the range and end points of the range to be enclosed.
specified on an image.
→→Blackening processing is applied to the inside or
outside of the range specified with the mouse.
1. Select an image to be blackened.
• For the rectangular blackening (inside) and
2. Click the buttons [Rectangular blackening polygonal blackening (inside), blackening is
(Inside)], [Rectangular blackening (Outside)], applied to the inside of the specified area.
[Polygonal blackening (Inside)] and
[Polygonal blackening (Outside)] (A) on the
“Modify study” tool bar.
You can do the same operation by right-clicking the

image, and selecting “Blackening” – “Rectangular • For the rectangular blackening (outside) and
blackening (Inside)”/”Rectangular blackening polygonal blackening (outside), blackening is
(Outside)”/”Polygonal blackening (Inside)”/Polygonal applied to the outside of the specified area.
blackening (Outside)”.

→→The shape of the mouse pointer changes.
The shape of the mouse pointer changes as follows,

according to the selected blackening processing.
• Rectangular blackening (Inside): After the blackening processing, edit blackening

processing mode is automatically selected.
• Rectangular blackening (Outside): “■ Editing Blackening Processing”
• Polygonal blackening (Inside):
• Polygonal blackening (Outside):

■ Applying Auto Blackening ■ Editing Blackening Processing
Processing Edit the position and range of blackening
Blackening Processing is automatically applied processing.
to an image being selected.
1. Click [Edit Blackening] (A) on the “Modify
1. Selected an image to be processed. Study” tool bar.

2. Click [Automatic shuttering] (A) on the image and selecting “Blackening”-“Edit Blackening”.
“Modify Study” tool bar.
2. Select blackening processing.

image and selecting “Blackening” – “Automatic 3. Edit blackening processing. 5
shuttering”.
Selection Items

→→The “Confirmation” window opens. Items Contents
Moving the Drag the mouse to the move
3. If you want to continue the process, click position destination.
[OK].
Drag
→→Blackening processing is automatically applied to

the image being selected.
Changing 1) Select the forward end of
the range blackening
Select
2) Drag the mouse to the move

destination
Drag
→ The blackening range is

changed

■ Deleting Blackening Processing
Delete blackening processing on an image.
1. Select blackening processing to be deleted.

2. Press [Delete] on the keyboard.

blackening processing and selecting [Delete].
→→The selected blackening processing is deleted.
5 ■ Deleting All Blackening

Processing
All blackening processing on an image are

deleted, and the display is returned to the state
before the blackening processing.
1. Click [Clear Blackening] (A) on the “Modify

Study” tool bar.
→→All blackening processing on the image are
deleted.

5.9 Applying Trimming Processing
Apply trimming processing to the selected image.
Trimming processing is applicable only to study images in FujiFilm format.
■ Notes for Performing Exposures In the cases shown above, errors in automatic
recognition of the irradiation field and wrong
Be cautious for the following points when recognitions may lead to a wrong trimming frame
performing exposures to using the automatic on an area different from the ROI. In such an
irradiation field recognition. instance, devise a proper exposure method or
• A lead character or marker should be located
within the irradiated field. If a lead character
manually adjust the trimming frame as necessary.
5
or marker is outside the irradiated field, it will

be recognized incorrectly. The resulted trimming will be cleared if you change
the exposure menu or replace the images after the
trimming.
R R R
Area recognizing the Trimming

irradiation field frame
• Do not set the side of the irradiated field too

short, otherwise it is highly probable that the
excessively short side may not be recognized
properly.

• Position the side of the irradiated field so that

it does not overlap with an artificial object,
such as a protector, or any thick subject. It is
highly possible that the side of the irradiated
field that appears unclear, as it overlaps with
an artificial object, such as a protector, or any
thick subject, will not be recognized.


■ Add a Trimming Frame ■ Add a Trimming Frame
Automatically Manually
A trimming frame is automatically added to a Specify the range of a trimming frame
image. manually.
1. Display a image on the “Image Viewer” 1. Display a image on the “Image Viewer”
window. window.
2. Click [Automatic trimming] on the tool bar. 2. Click [Manual trimming] on the tool bar.
5
You can change it to the trimming mode by right- You can change it to the trimming mode by right-
clicking the image and selecting [Trimming] - clicking the image and selecting [Trimming] -
[Automatic trimming]. [Manual trimming].
→→The confirmation window opens.

3. If you wish to continue the processing, click → The shape of the mouse pointer turns to .
[OK].
→→A trimming frame is automatically added to the
selected image. If the image is not a study image in FujiFilm format,
the mouse pointer will change to the mark that
indicates “Unusable”.

4. Click the start point and the end point to
specify the range of the trimming frame.
■ Add a Standard-size Trimming
Frame
Specify the range of a trimming frame with
The smallest size of the trimming frame is 10.4 x standard size.
10.4 cm.
1. Display a image on the “Image Viewer”
window.
2. Click one of the buttons for standard-size

trimming frame on the tool bar.

You can also choose the standard size by right-
clicking on the image and selecting [Trimming] -
[Standard trimming].
→→The border line of standard-size frame is

displayed.
You can specify the trimming range by dragging the
mouse pointer from the start point to the end point of
the trimming frame.
→→The border line of the trimming frame is displayed.

The shape of the mouse pointer returns to .
You can add only one trimming frame for each

image. If you are trying to add more than one
trimming frame for the same image, the former
trimming frame will be deleted.

■ Use “Fit to window” to Magnify ■ Edit a Trimming Frame
the Image Surrounded by the Edit the range of a trimming frame.
Trimming Frame
1. Select a trimming frame.
Magnify the size of the image surrounded by
the trimming frame to fit to the window.
2. Edit the trimming frame.
1. Display a image which has been added with a
trimming frame. • The way of editing the trimming frame is same with
the operation of dragging mouse when Editing
2. Click [Fit to window] on the tool bar. blackening processing.
he way of editing blackening processing :
T
“5.10 ■ Editing Blackening Processing”.
5 • If you wish to rotate the trimming frame 90

degrees, click [Rotate trimming frame] on the tool
bar.
■ Release the Processing of

→→The image surrounded by the trimming frame is
magnified to fit the window.
Trimming
Delete the trimming frame from the image.
1. Display a image which has been added with a

trimming frame.
2. Click [Release Trimming] on the tool bar.
You can magnify the image surrounded by the

trimming frame by double-clicking the image.
You can delete the trimming frame by right-clicking
the trimming frame and selecting [Delete].
→→The trimming frame is deleted from the image.

■ Complement: The Display/output of the Image which was Applied
with Trimming Processing
The following table indicates the various situations when the processed image (image which has been
applied with trimming processing) is displayed/outputted by each function.
According to different display/output functions, the unprocessed image (image which has not been applied with
trimming processing) might be displayed/outputted.
Outputted from Display/Output function Has the Displayed/Outputted image

been applied with
trimming processing?
Image Viewer Display the thumbnail of study summary Yes
Display the thumbnail of image cart Yes
5
Display the thumbnail of series view Yes
Display the preview window of Yes

FCR image processing
Display the thumbnail of Yes
bookmark reference window
Display the thumbnail of Yes
rotation/reversal window
Output the thumbnail when Yes
saving study
Transfer the thumbnail image Yes
Output the PDF of simplified print No
Simplified report Display the thumbnail Yes
(However, the trimming processed
image will not be outputted, when you
are trying to output the display angle
of the viewer.)
Output the PDF Yes
(However, the trimming processed
image will not be outputted, when you
are trying to output the display angle
of the viewer.)
Reference tab Display the thumbnail Yes
Image cart Output the DICOM file Yes
Output the PDI Yes
Output the Bitmap/Jpeg Yes
Output the freelayout Yes
Output the film Yes
Study Operations tab of Output the thumbnail image Yes
study list window
Create PDI Yes
Printing on a film Yes
Free layout printing Yes
Transmit the DICOM Yes
Output the working disk (processed) Yes
Output the working disk (unprocessed) No
Thumbnail image capture Output the thumbnail file Yes
DICOM off-line capture Output the thumbnail file Yes

5.10 Saving/Verifying/Suspending Images
Saves the image processing result and annotation, makes the study status of images "Suspend" or
"Verified".
The studies whose status can be suspended or verified are the completed studies.
- You can also confirm the study in the “Study Operations” tab.
“4.4.4 Completing and Verifying Studies”
■ Saving the Image Processing ■ Verifying/Suspending Images

Result and Annotation
5
If the study has been verified, the (B) or (C)
Once the study is saved, it cannot be undone by cannot be clicked.

[Reset], [Restore]/[Retry].
1. Select the study and click (B) or (C).
The following contents can be saved. Functions of Each Button

• Rotated or flipped images Buttons Functions
• FCR Image Processing Parameter
• Assigned annotation (Arrows, ellipses, rectangles, [Suspend]*1 Leaves the study status as
"Completed"
polygons, texts, markers)
• Measurement (Measure line segment, simplify The quality of images in the study
cardiothoracic ratio, cardiothoracic ratio, interline [Verify]*2*3 is verified.
angle, cobb angle, Orthogonal line compare, The study is updated from the
"Completed" to the "Verified" study
vertical interline angle, Three line segments angle
status
B, Perpendicular segment measurement B)
• Pixel measurement (Ellipse ROI, rectangular ROI,
polygonal ROI)
• Blackening Processing
• Applying Trimming Processing
1. Click (A) in the sub-window.

→→The image processing result and annotation are
saved.
*1 Suspended studies are set aside from the scope of
automatic verification.
“13.6 Auto-Determine Settings"
*2 Images are automatically printed, saved, or
transmitted at the time of verification if settings are
configured to do so.
• Saving to a storage disk
• Printing images in a study on a film (optional)
• Printing thumbnail images (optional)
• Transmitting to a DICOM server(optional)
“13.5 Setting of Printing, Saving and
Transmitting Images"
*3 Buttons might be hidden due to the window display
of the viewer. To display the button, click the detail
button on the right side. You can also magnify
the sub-window to display the button.

Chapter 6
6

6.1 Outline of “Report” Window............................................... 6-2
6.2 Creating/Editing the Report................................................ 6-3
6.3 Editing the Schema or Fixed Phrase.................................. 6-6

6.1 Outline of “Report” Window
(1) (2) (1) Print/Save as PDF file
The report format can be specified, and the
(3) report can be printed out or saved as PDF file.
“8.5 Printing a Report”
(2) Save/Verify/Re-edit
The created or edited report can be saved or
(4)
verified. The saved/verified report also can be
edited again.
“6.2 ■Saving/Verifying a Report”
(3) Delete
The report can be deleted.
“6.2 ■Deleting a Report”
6 (5)
(4) Schema
Displayed by clicking the “Schema” tab.
• Select the same schema as the exposure

region and assign it.
“6.2 ■Creating/Editing the Report”
• The annotation function and the free drawing
function can be used on the assigned
schema.
(6) • The schema can be registered or deleted.
“6.3 ■Editing the Schema”
(5) Thumbnail
Displayed by clicking the “Thumbnail” tab.
Assign thumbnail images of the study.
(6) Comment
• “Comment” tab
• Comment can be input to the target patient or
study images.
• The registered fixed phrase can be inserted.
• The fixed phrase can be edited/added.
“6.3 ■Editing the Fixed Phrase”

6.2 Creating/Editing the Report
Creates or edits a report to save or verify.
■ Operation Windows ● “Select schema” Window

● “Basic Operation Tool bar”
(T)
(A)
● “Report” Window 6
(B) (C) (D) (E) (U)

(F) (G) (H) (I) ● “Select fixed phrase” Window
(J) (V)
(K) (L) (M) (X)

(N)
(W)
● “Register” Window
(S) (Y)
(Z)
(R)
(O) (P) (Q)
The display settings of a report can be performed in

the [Customize] - [Report] in “Image Viewer” window.
“11.2.6 Display Settings of Report”

■ Creating/Editing the Report 5. Attach an annotation to the schema or draw
freely(J).
1. Display the image in the sub-window. Functions of Each Button
“5.3 Selecting and Arranging Images” Buttons Functions

→→The “Report” window opens if the image is to be Select an annotation on the schema
created in the report. *1
2. To create a new report, click [Open report] (A) *1

Drag from the start point to the end
point
of the tool bar.
→→The “Report” window opens. Enter a text by clicking the position to
*1 enter a text
Draw a line on the dragged track by

• You can do the same by right-clicking anywhere on *2 dragging
the image pane and selecting [Open report].
After an arrow is drawn by dragging the
• If the default schema is set, it will be assigned *1 start and end point of an arrow, enter a
automatically. text on the end point
6 “6.3 ■Editing the Schema”
After an arrow is drawn by dragging the
*1*3 start and end point of an arrow, the number
displays automatically on the end point

3. To set a schema, click the “Schema” tab, then
click (G).
→→The “Select schema” window opens.
*1 The operation of an annotation on a schema is
the same as the operation on the “Image Viewer”
window.
• Click (F) to assign a favorite schema. ”5.5 ■Adding Arrows/Shapes (Ellipses,
“6.3 ■Editing the Schema” Rectangles, and Polygons)”, ”5.5 ■Adding Texts”
“5.5 ■Editing the Added Annotations”
• Click (H) to open the “Schema setting
edit” window opens. “5.5 ■Deleting Added Annotations”
*2 Lines drawn can be edited same as annotations.
“6.3 ■Editing the Schema”
“5.5 ■Editing the Added Annotations”
• Click ( I ) to clear the assigned schema. *3 The number can be set in the column at the right
side of the button.
4. Select a schema to be used (T) and click

[Select] (U). 6. Click the “Thumbnail” tab, then drag and
drop the image to be displayed in the report
to the thumbnail (N).
You can do the same by double-clicking the schema
→→The thumbnail images are assigned.
to be used.
→→The selected schema is assigned. • If the image which has been magnified or reduced
on the “Image Viewer” window is dragged and
dropped, the magnified or reduced image will be
placed.
• Set to ON by (K), reprint including

annotations at the time of printing report.
• Click (L) to register the key image as a

thumbnail image.
“5.3 ■Registering Displayed Images as a Key
Image”
• Click (M) to clear the thumbnail image in

the thumbnail column.

7. Click the “Comment” tab, and input
comments in each column (R).
■ Saving/Verifying a Report
• Save: Save the report temporarily. The report can
Click the desired button to use the following
be edited.
functions.
• Verify: Verify the image together. The report cannot
Functions of Each Button be edited.
Buttons Functions
(O)*1*2 Insert a registered fixed 1. Click (B) or (C).

phrase.
1. Select an fixed phrase (V) in Functions of Each Button
the “Select fixed phrase”
Buttons Functions
window.
2. Click [Select] (X). Save the report
→ The fixed phrase is inserted.
(P) Register the currently input text Verify the report

as a fixed phrase.
1. Input in the [Heading] (Y) in
the “Register” window.
6
2. Click [Register] (Z). →→ is displayed in the thumbnail of “Refer” window.

→ The fixed phrase is Also, is attached to the target tree of the study
registered. in study summary.
(Q) Clear the currently input text.
Insert the text “Nothing • The study can be verified automatically again at
(S)*3
abnormal” in all comment
columns. the time of clicking (B)
*1 Click the [Select](X) and the counts in “The • Verified report contents can be edited by clicking
number of use” of the inserted fixed phrase
increases. (D).
*2 Put a check mark to “Close the screen after Editing report:“■Creating/Editing the Report”
inserting”(W) to close the window and return to the
“Report” window after clicking [Select](X).
*3 It is possible to edit the text other than “Nothing
abnormal”.
■ Deleting Reports
1. Open a report.
2. Click (E).
→→The message to confirm the deletion appears.
3. Click [OK].

6.3 Editing the Schema or Fixed Phrase
The schema can be registered or deleted, and the fixed phrase can be added or edited.
■ Operation Windows ● “Select fixed phrase” Window

● “Report” Window (I)
(J)
(K)
(L)
(A)
6
● “Register” Window
(M)
(N)
(B)
● “Schema setting edit” Window
(C) (D) (E) (F) (G) (H)

■ Editing the Schema ■ Editing the Fixed Phrase
Types of schema can be added/deleted, and the
default schema or favorite schema can be set.
1. Click the “Comment” tab, then click
(B) in the comment column in which the fixed
phrase to be edited is registered.
1. Click the “Schema” tab, then click the
→→The “Select fixed phrase” window opens.
(A) in the schema column.
→→The “Schema setting edit” window opens. 2. Select the fixed phrase ( I ).
2. Edit the schema. 3. Click [Edit] (J).
Functions of Each Button →→The “Register” window opens.
Buttons Functions
[New item] (E) 1) Select “User setting” tab (C). Clicking [Delete] (L) to delete the selected fixed
2) Click [New item] (E). phrase.
→ The “Open” window opens.
3) Select the file of schema.
4) Click [Open]. 4. Edit the fixed phrase (M).
[Delete] (D) Delete the selected schema. Input Items 6
1) Select the schema (C) *1 (G)
Items Contents

2) Click [Delete] (D).
Register the selected schema as a Heading Edit the heading of the fixed phrase
default schema or favorite schema.
Content Edit contents of the fixed phrase
Select the schema (C).
1) Click (F) of default schema
or favorite schema according to the 5. Click [Register] (N).
destination to register.
*1 Only the schema in the “User setting” tab can be ■ Registering the Fixed Phrase
deleted.
3. Click [Setting is completed] (H). 1. Click the “Comment” tab, then click
(B) in the comment column in which the fixed
phrase is to be registered.
→→The “Select fixed phrase” window opens.
Click when the comment column is input

with text to register it as the fixed phrase.
2. Click [Add] (K).

→→The “Register” window opens.
3. Input the fixed phrase (M).

Input Items
Items Contents
Heading Input the heading of the fixed phrase
Content Input the contents of the fixed phrase
4. Click [Register] (N).

6

Chapter 7
Image Storage
from Each Window
7
7.1 Relationships between

Windows and Storage Destinations................................... 7-2
7.2 Displaying Dialogs for Saving............................................ 7-3

7.2.1 Starting from the “Refer” Window................................ 7-3
7.2.2 Starting from the “Image Viewer”................................. 7-4
7.2.3 Starting from the “Study List” Window........................ 7-5
7.3 Saving to Storage Disks...................................................... 7-6

7.3.1 Using the Storage Disk.................................................. 7-6
7.3.2 Using NAS/USB-HDD Utility (Optional)......................... 7-7
7.4 Transmitting Studies to DICOM Server (Optional).......... 7-10
7.5 Saving to Work Disks........................................................ 7-11
7.6 Saving in a General-Purpose File Format (Optional)...... 7-13
7.7 Saving to PDI Disks........................................................... 7-16

7.1 Relationships between
Windows and Storage Destinations
Saves images from the “Refer” window, “Image Viewer”, and “Study Operations” tab of study list
window. Displays dialogs for saving in accordance with media type in each window, and then specify
the storage method such as priority and density before saving.
Display the Storage Setting Window Set Storage Method Save Images to Destination
“Main” Window - “Refer” Window
Click
General-Purpose Image
7 Storage Setting Dialog of each window

“Image Cart” (The following dialog is an example
when saving to storage disks.) DICOM Server
Click
Work Disks
Storage Disks
PDI Disks
“Study List” Window - (CD-R, DVD-R)
“Study Operations” tab
Click
NAS/USB-HDD
● List of Destinations that can be Used from Each Window

Storage Disk DICOM Server Work Disk General-Purpose PDI
(NAS/USB-HDD) File Format
“Refer” Window ○ ○ × × ○
Image Viewer × × × ○ ○
“Study
○ ○ ○ × ○
Operations” tab

7.2 Displaying Dialogs for Saving
Saves images from the “Refer” window, “Image Viewer”, and “Study Operations” tab of study list window.
7.2.1 Starting from the “Refer” Window

Searches the study and saves the images shown in the “Refer” window to each media.
This section describes how to display dialogs for saving from the “Refer” window according to the
storage media.
■ Operation Window ■ Displaying Dialogs for Saving

● “Main” Window - “Refer” Window 1. Search the study.
Select the patient and the image to be “4.3.1 Searching for Studies”
referred.
(A) 2. From the “study list” (A), select the patient in
a “Verified” study status.
7
→→The image is displayed in the “Refer” window (B).
3. Select the image (B) to be saved.

(B) 4. Click the desired button (C) according to the
storage media.
Buttons Functions
Save to storage disks*1

Transmit to the DICOM Server*1

“7.4 Transmitting Studies to DICOM Server”
Save to PDI Disks*1

(C)
*1 The image whose study status is “Verified“ cannot
be saved or transmitted.
If the selected studies except for “Verified” are

(D)*1 selected, a message displays to verify.

items must be added in the “Display Settings”.

7.2.2 Starting from the “Image Viewer”
Saves images registered in the “Image Cart” in the “Image Viewer” window.
This section describes how to display dialogs for saving from the “Image Cart” according to the storage
media.

● “Image Cart” 1. Drag and Drop the images to the “Image
(A) Cart”.
• The images can be dragged and dropped from the

“study summary”, thumbnail images in the sub-
window, and the “Refer” window.
• You can do the same by right-clicking the images
in the sub-window and selecting “Put in an image
cart”.
• Click to clear the images in the “Image Cart”.
7
2. Click the desired button (A) according to the
storage media.
Buttons Functions
Save in a DICOM format *1

“7.6 Saving in a General-Purpose
File Format (Optional)”
Save in a BMP/JPEG file format

“7.6 Saving in a General-Purpose
File Format (Optional)”
Save to PDI Disks

*1 The image whose study status is other than

“Verified“ cannot be saved.

7.2.3 Starting from the “Study List” Window
Searches the study and saves the images shown in the list to each storage media.
This section describes how to display dialogs for saving from the “Study Operations” tab of study list
window according to the storage media.

● “Main” Window - “Study List” Window 1. Search the study.
- “Search Queries” tab “4.3.1 Searching for Studies”
(A)
2. From the list (A), select the patient in a
“Verified” study status.
3. Click the menu of the “Study Operations” tab

according to the storage media.
(B) Selection Items
Items Contents
Saving to Save to storage disks*1*2

7
storage disks

DICOM Transmit to the DICOM Server*1*2
Transmission
“7.4 Transmitting Studies to
DICOM Server”
Saving to Save to work disks

work disks
“7.5 Saving to Work Disks”
● “Main” Window - “Study List” Window Create PDI Save to PDI Disks*1*2
*1 The image whose study status is other than

“Verified“ cannot be saved or transmitted.
(C)
*2 If the selected studies include those other than

“Verified“, a message displays to verify.
To continue excluding the studies which are not
able to process, click [OK].

7.3 Saving to Storage Disks
The study images are automatically saved in a USB memory connected to the server PC, a storage
disk set in the control drive or any (optional) storage devices when the study is verified.
Automatic saving to the storage disk: “13.5 Setting of Printing, Saving and Transmitting Images”.
This section describes how to save or save again when [Automate Saving] is not activated.
If the same study already exists on the destination storage disk or the NAS/USB-HDD (optional), it is overwritten.
7.3.1 Using the Storage Disk

Saves images of the selected studies to the storage disk or the NAS/USB-HDD (optional).
■ Operation Window ■ Saving the Screen

7
● “Storage Disk Settings” Window 1. Select the Priority (A).
LOW: Give higher priority to other save
operations.
MEDIUM: Save with the ordinary priority.
HIGH: Start to save immediately.
(A)
2. Click [Output] (B).
When the disk access lamp is ON, do not press the

(B) Eject button on the disk drive.
“2.7 Before Using Disks“.

7.3.2 Using NAS/USB-HDD Utility (Optional)
When the device is connected with NAS/USB-HDD, the following operations can be performed on the
“NAS/USB-HDD Utility” window.
• Store the information in the image information database into the NAS/USB-HDD.
• Restore the image information database using the information in the NAS/USB-HDD.
• Re-registor the NAS/USB-HDD.
■ Functions on NAS/USB-HDD Utility

Describes the functional overview for each item in NAS/USB-HDD Utility.
1) Display NAS/USB-HDD information
7
2) Request on NAS/USB-HDD

1) Display NAS/USB-HDD information: 2) Request on NAS/USB-HDD:
Display the information on connected NAS/ For the NAS/USB-HDD displayed in “Display
USB-HDD. NAS/USB-HDD information”, perform the
following processes.
Display Items
Items Contents
• Reconfiguration of internal information
Replacing procedure: “■ Storing the Information
Device Name NAS/USB-HDD name
in the Image Information Database into the NAS/
Status Disk name and free space (%) USB-HDD”
Disk Write Whether or not writing data into • Registration of internal information to database
NAS/USB-HDD is allowed
Replacing procedure: “■ Restoring the Image
Information Database Using the Information in
the NAS/USB-HDD”
• Re-registration of equipment information to

the database
Re-gistering procedure:“■ Reregistor the NAS/
USB-HDD”

■ Starting up the NAS/USB-HDD ■ Storing the Information in the
Utility Image Information Database
into the NAS/USB-HDD
1. Select - “NAS/USB-HDD Utility” in the In case a mismatch occurs in the image
“Main” window.
management file on the NAS/USB-HDD,
reconfigure the image management file of the
NAS/USB-HDD.
→→The “NAS/USB-HDD Utility” window opens.

1. Click [Internal information reconfiguration].
■ Exiting the NAS/USB-HDD

Utility
1. Click [Close].
7
→→The “Internal information reconfiguration” window
opens.
2. Select the folder to be reconfigured and click

[Start].
→→The “NAS/USB-HDD Utility” window closes.
→→The process starts.

After the process has been completed, the system
automatically returns to the “NAS/USB-HDD
Utility” window.

■ Restoring the Image ■ Re-registor the NAS/USB-HDD
Information Database Using the Re-register the information on NAS/USB-HDD
Information in the NAS/USB- to the database.
HDD
1. Click [Re-registration of equipment
In case the equipment fails or requires information to the database].
replacement, the FCR PRIMA Console image
information database can be restored by
importing study information from the NAS/
USB-HDD to the FCR PRIMA Console system.
1. Click [Database registration of internal

information].

automatically returns to the “NAS/USB-HDD 7
Utility” window.

→→The “Database registration of internal information”
window opens.
2. Select the process to be performed when the

same study information exists in the image
information database.
3. Select the saving destination.

4. Click [Start].
2.
3.
4.
automatically returns to the “NAS/USB-HDD
Utility” window.

7.4 Transmitting Studies to DICOM
Server (Optional)
Transmits the unprocessed FCR study images to the DICOM server when the study is verified.
“13.5 Setting of Printing, Saving and Transmitting Images”
This section describes how to manually save or save again when [Automate Saving] is not activated.
■ Operation Window ■ Saving the Screen

● “Settings for DICOM Transmission” 1. Set the transmission settings (A).
Window
Selection Items
Items Contents
Destination Specify a destination

Example: DICOM Server
(A)
Density [Default Pixel Count]*1:
7 Transmit images with a reduced pixel

density and hence in a smaller file size
(B)
[Max Pixel Count]:
Transmit images with their pixel density

unchanged
Priority [LOW]:
Give higher priority to other save
operations
[MEDIUM]:
Save with the ordinary priority
[HIGH]:
Start to save immediately
*1 The transmitted image size decreases.

7.5 Saving to Work Disks
Saves all the images in a selected study to work disks.
• If the same study already exists on the destination work disk, it is overwritten.
• The Magnify/Reduce of image has no effect on storage to work disk.
■ Operation Windows ■ Saving the Screen

● “Work Disk Storage Settings” Window 1. Insert a work disk in the control drive of the
(Start from the “Study List”) PC.
2. Set the transmission settings (A).

Selection Items
Items Contents
Destination Specify a drive to be used 7

Example: DVD
(A)

Compression [Uncompressed]:
Save images without compression
[JPEG Lossless]:
Save images with compression
The image file size decreases
(B) Compressed images can fully be
restored
Density [Default Pixel Count]:

Save images with a reduced pixel
• Details on disks to be used: density and hence in a smaller file
“2.7 Before Using Disks“. size
• Operations for switching disks: [Max Pixel Count]:

“10.3 Verifying Disk Status and Maintenance“. Save images with their pixel density
unchanged
Image Proc. [Processed]:

Perform FCR image processing and
display gradation correction for the
pixel data in the images to be
saved*1
[Unprocessed]:
The FCR image processing and
display gradation correction for the
pixel data are not performed to the
images to be saved*2
Annotation [No]:
Output Annotations are not saved to work
disks
[Yes]:
Annotations are save to work disks

*1 Image data thus processed is accessible to the
DICOM server for viewing the same way as FCR
PRIMA Console views them when the DICOM
server does not support FCR image processing
and display gradation correction processing.
*2 Choose [Unprocessed] to handle images on
equipment that supports FCR image processing.
Although images that have been saved with

[Processed] being selected can be reloaded into the
FCR PRIMA Console, the images thus loaded
cannot be printed on film (optional). If you plan to
perform these operations, select [Unprocessed]
when saving.
When the disk access lamp is ON, never press the
7 Eject button on the disk drive.


7.6 Saving in a General-Purpose File
Format (Optional)
Images for a study can be saved in a general-purpose file format, such as “.jpg” or “.bmp”.
Images saved in these formats can be used for purposes such as presentation.
Patient information file

Image files
xxx.txt
xxx.jpg
xxx.bmp 7
(The file format has been set
at installation.)

No patient information file is created for images saved in the DICOM server.
• The destination is determined by the installation setting.

• If modifications have been made to the status of image display, some modifications have effects on film print but
some do not.
- FCR Image Processing : Applicable
- Annotation : Applicable
- Rotate/Flip : Applicable
- Magnify/Reduce : Not applicable
- Gradation Correction : Applicable
- Reverse : Applicable
• The image displayed in the sub-window can be saved as a thumbnail image by clicking the “Thumbnail image
transfer” of “Other” tool bar.

■ Operation Windows ■ Saving the Screen
● “General-Purpose File” Window (as a ● Saving in a BMP or JPEG File Format
BMP or JPEG File Format) All the images for a selected study can be
saved in a general-purpose file format.
1. Set the transmission settings (C).

Input / Selection Items
(C)
Items Contents
Save format JPEG: JPEG format

The file extension is “.jpg”
BMP: BITMAP format.
The file extension is “.bmp”
(D) Patient information files are always

saved in the text format
The file extension is “.txt”
Image Specify the image quality when the

● “DICOM file output” Window quality*1 image is saved in the JPEG format
7 [Low]:
Save images with low image quality
and high compression
[Standard]:
Save images with standard image
(E) quality and standard compression
[High]:
Save images with high image
quality and low compression
(F) Annotation [Yes]:
Output Annotation is saved with the image
[No]:
Annotation is not saved with the
image
File naming Select the rules for naming the files

rules to be saved.
• Input file name + Sequential
number
• Host name + Date + Sequential
number
• Patient ID + Study year/month/day
+ Exposure region + Sequential
number + Host name
Destination Click , and the “Browse for

folder for Folder” window opens. Specify a
storage destination folder to save
File name *2 Input a file name
*1 Set only if saving in JPEG file format.

*2 Displayed when “Input file name + Sequential
number” is selected in “File naming rules”.

2. Click [Output] (D). ● Saving in a DICOM Format
All the images for a selected study can be
saved in a DICOM format.
• Saving progress can be confirm in the “Progress of
saving” column
• When the same file is already existed, the
1. Set the transmission settings (E).
message to confirm whether to overwrite or not Selection Items
appears.
Items Contents
→→The “General-Purpose File” window closes after Output images Put a check mark to output images
saving process completed. with with annotations embedded
annotations
embedded
3. Check if the files have been created in the
specified folder. Save Put a check mark to save the
information information
with multi-byte
characters
(Kanji, Kana)
Folder Input a storage destination folder

targeted for name
data storage Click to open the “Browse For
Folder” window, and the folder in
which files is saved can be 7
specified.

File name Input a file name
2. Click [Next] (F).
The message “The same file exists.” is displayed

when a file with the same name already exists. Click
[OK] and execute again after changing the save
folder or the file name.
→→The saved file name and percentage progress of

the storage can be verified.
3. Click [Close] after the storage completes.

→→The “Save multi-purpose file” window close.
4. Check if the files have been created in the

specified folder.

7.7 Saving to PDI Disks
The study images can be saved to CD-R disks or DVD-R disks in PDI format.
• Studies that can be saved as a PDI file are only those with a “Verified” study status.
• Unformatted or unused formatted 640MB or 700MB CD-R disks can be used.
• Unformatted or unused formatted 4.7GB DVD-R disks can be used.
• Before saving study image in PDI disk, write the following information on the surface of the PDI disk to prevent
confusing with study image for other patient ID.
- Patient name
- Patient ID
- Birth date
- Disk creation date
- Study date (write all if more than one)
- Facility name
• The process takes time when a large quantity of PDI data is saved to a DVD-R disk. As a guide value for the
processing time, it takes about 15 minutes to save all measuring data.
7

■ Operation Windows 4. Select “Media” (C).
● ”PDI creation wizard” Window To save PDI in a local folder of PC, select “Folder”.
Set a destination folder.
(A)
(B)
(C)
5. Click [Next] (D).
→→Writing to the CD-R or DVD-R disk starts.
(D)
Progress is displayed when write to CD-R or
DVD-R disk starts. Do not press the Eject button
● “Disk writing finished.” Window or use any other program while writing.
Otherwise, write may not complete properly.
Note that once write starts, it cannot be canceled.
(E) 7

The following messages might be displayed. To
continue the PDI file creation, perform the
following procedures.
• “No disk is inserted.”, or “Unable to write to this
disk.”
Reset the correct CD-R or DVD-R disk and then
click [Next] in the “PDI Creation Wizard” window.
• “Unable to write to this disk because the
(F) capacity is exceeded.”
Remove the CD-R or DVD-R disk from the disk
drive tray and click [OK]. If multiple studies are
■ Saving the Screen selected, reduce the number of studies and redo
with a new CD-R or DVD-R disk.
1. Insert a CD-R or DVD-R into the disk drive tray. →→The dialog “Disk writing finished” (E) opens when
write to CD-R or DVD-R disk completes, and the
2. To output images with annotations drive tray opens.
embedded, put a check mark to “Output
images with annotations embedded” (A). 6. Remove the CD-R or DVD-R disk from the
disk drive tray.
3. Set a startup method when a PDI disk is
inserted according to an operation method (B). 7. Click [Close] (F).
Selection Items
Items Contents If a PDI file is created in the storage disk drive, set
the storage disk in the drive.
Launch index. The contents (index.htm) is
htm automatically launched
Launch the Display of contents is omitted,

viewer and the viewer is automatically
launched
No Automatic Nothing is launched

startup

7

Chapter 8
Image Print
from Each Window
8.1 Printing Types and Flow...................................................... 8-2
8.2 Displaying Print Dialogs...................................................... 8-4 8

8.2.1 Starting from the “Refer” Window................................ 8-4
Image Print from Each Window

8.2.2 Starting from the “Image Viewer”................................. 8-5
8.2.3 Starting from the “Study Utilities”................................ 8-6
8.3 Printing on a Film (Optional)............................................... 8-7
8.4 Free Layout Printing............................................................ 8-9
8.5 Printing Report................................................................... 8-13

8.1 Printing Types and Flow
This section describes the types of printing applicable to FCR PRIMA Console and the flow of printing.
■ Types of Printing
The following printing methods are applicable to FCR PRIMA Console.
● Film Print (Optional)

Prints images on a film with the destination and print count set. An unprocessed FCR study image
prints automatically on the film when completing an exposure or verifying a study.
Automatic output: “13.5 Setting of Printing, Saving and Transmitting Images”
When automatic output is not activated or print again, manually printing is possible.
When [Output after Re-verified] in the “User Utilities” printer settings has been unchecked (setting for no film
printing at the time of inspection re-verification), print output has to be performed manually in image units at the
time of adding study menu.
Check the indicator to check the printer status.
8 “10.5 Verifying Film Printer Status (Optional)”
● Free Layout Print

Prints multiple images to one piece of film with a free layout. The image size can be adjusted, and the
additional image information or annotation can also be added to the output.
● Print Report
Prints reports created in the “Image Viewer” window.
”8.5 Printing Report”

■ Printing Flow
FCR PRIMA Console can print a study from the “Refer” window, “Image Viewer” window, and “Study
List” window. Prints studies by displaying the printing window according to the printing method on each
window and setting contents for printing such as selecting the object to be printed or numbers of
printings.
Display Print Dialog Set Printing Method Print

“Main” Window — “Refer” Window Film Print
FUJI HOSPITAL 04001676 A 0000 A 020
G 1.1G#0.9+0.30 R 5TO.3 D 2MO.2 R-> L G 1.0G#0.9+0.30 R 5T0.31. D 2MO.2

SKULL, GENERAL 0000000001 John Smith [M] 23
1992. 11. 27 [17:43]
L 2.0 S 187 C *1.0*1.0 AP SCALE: 50% RT-04
“Image Viewer” Free Layout Print

“Study List” Window -
“Study Operations” tab Report Print
Click
● List of Print Destination that can be Used from Each Window

Film Print Free Layout Print Report Print
“Refer“ window ○ ○ x
Image Viewer ○ ○ ○
“Study Operations” tab ○ ○ x

8.2 Displaying Print Dialogs
Images can be printed from the “Refer” window, “Image Viewer”, and “Study Operations” tab of study
list window.
8.2.1 Starting from the “Refer” Window

Searches the study and prints the images shown in the “Refer” window to each media.
This section describes how to display print dialogs from “Refer” window according to the printing
method.
■ Operation Window ■ Displaying Print Dialogs

● “Main“ Window - “Refer“ Window 1. Search the study.
Select the patient and the print dialog appears. “4.3.1 Searching for Studies”
(A)
2. From the list (B), select the patient in a
“Verified” study status.
→→The image is displayed in the “Refer” window (B).
3. Select the image (C) to be printed.

8 (B)
4. Click the desired button (D) according to the
printing method.
Buttons Functions
Print images on a film

Print image with a free layout print

“8.4 Free Layout Printing“
(C)
If the selected studies include those other than
“Verified“, a message displays to verify.
(D)*1

items must be added in the Display Settings.

8.2.2 Starting from the “Image Viewer”
Prints images displayed in the “Image Cart” of “Image Viewer”.
This section describes how to display print dialogs from the “Image Viewer” according to the printing
method.

● “Image Cart” 1. Drag and Drop the images to the “Image
(A) Cart”.
• The images can be dragged and dropped from the

“study summary”, thumbnail images in the sub-
window, and the “Refer” window.
• You can do the same by right-clicking the images
in the sub-window and selecting “Put in an image
cart”.
• Click to clear the images in the “Image Cart”.
2. Click the desired button (A) according to the

printing method.
8

Buttons Functions

Print image with a free layout print


8.2.3 Starting from the “Study List”
Searches studies and prints the images shown in the list.
This section describes how to display print dialogs from the “Study Operations” tab of study list window
according to the printing method.

● “Study Utilities” 1. Search the study.
● “Main” Window - “Study List” Window “4.3.1 Searching for Studies”

2. From the list (A), select the patient in a
“Verified” or “Completed” study status.
3. Click the menu (B) in the “Study Operations”

tab according to the printing method.
(A) Selection Items
Items Contents

(B) Printing on a
film*1 “8.3 Printing on a Film
8 (Optional)”
Free layout Print image with a free layout print

printing*1
“8.4 “Free Layout Printing“
*1 The images whose study status is other than

“Verified“ or “Completed“ cannot be printed.
If the selected studies include those except for

“Verified“ or “Completed“, a message displays to
verify.

8.3 Printing on a Film (Optional)
Prints images on a film with the destination and print count set. The setting items shown in the print dialog are
different between starting from the “Refer” window / “Study Operations” tab of study list window and starting
from the “Image Viewer”.
Image magnification and reduction will have no effect on the printing of images in the case of [Film Print].
■ Operation Windows ■ Printing on a Film

● “Film Print Settings” Window ● Starting from the “Main Window” -
(Start from the “Main” Window - “Refer”
“Refer” Window or “Study List”
Window or “Study List”)
1. Set the film print settings (A).
Selection Items
Items Contents
(A) Destination Print destination
Target
All imgs Print all the images in the study on 8

included in a a film. Images already printed on a
study film are reprinted

(B)
Study imgs Print only those images in a film that

● “Film Print” Window yet-to-be
output
have not been printed on a film
(Start from the “Image Viewer”)

Print Count 1 to 9 copies can be printed
Priority
LOW Give higher priority to other save

operations
MEDIUM Save with the ordinary priority
HIGH Start to save immediately
(C)
(D)

● Starting from the “Image Viewer”
1. Set the film print settings (C).
Items Contents
Print Destination Print Destination
Print Count 1 to 9
Print Format
Single Format
2 ON 1 Format*1
4 ON 1 Format*2
Prioritized Output Print images in this study on a

priority basis
Annotation Output
8 Yes Output annotations
No Not output annotations

Film Count The film requirement is

calculated from the “Print
Count” and “Print Format” and
is shown in the “Film Count”
field
*1 P
rint two different images on a single film.
Printed images are arranged from left to right in
the study window.
*2 P
rints four different images on a single film.
Printed images are arranged from upper left to
upper right, lower left to lower right in the study
window.
2. Click [Output] (D).

8.4 Free Layout Printing
Prints multiple images to one piece of film with a free layout. The image size can be adjusted, and the
additional image information or annotation can also be added to the output.
■ Operation Windows ● “Format information setting“

Create/Set additional image information format.
● “Free layout print” (H)

Set the layout of images, display/hide the
additional image information and annotation.
(A) (B)
(I)
(C)
(J)
(D)
● “Input format name“

Sets the additional image information format
name.
(E)
8
● “Footer information setting“
(K)

Set to display/hide footer and the footer (L)
information.
(F)
(G)

■ Free Layout Printing Images can be moved inside the
cell. Move the mouse pointer
over the image and it will turn to
1. Select Printer and Film Size (C). .
Specify the range by mouse

2. Select layout orientation. dragging to trim and display the
(Landscape: , Portrait: ) specified range. The trimmed
range will be displayed with the
→→A message displays to confirm, click [OK].
frame fitted to the cell window.
If moving the mouse pointer over
3. Select print format (C). the image, the shape of the
mouse pointer will turn to .
1) Click .
Change the window level to a
2) Move the pointer on the grid and click to specify *1
monochrome image.
rows and columns. If moving the mouse pointer over
the image, the shape of the
mouse pointer will turn to .
When the cursor is moved onto the border of the
The value of WC (Window Center) and
cell, it changes to or and the cell width or WW (Window Wide) can be changed
height can be changed. according to the dragging direction of
the mouse pointer.
• Up: WC value increases.
• Down: WC value decreases.
4. Select the images for the layout from the • Left: WW value increases.
thumbnail display section (A). • Right: WW value decreases.
8 Switch the position of the image.

Move the mouse pointer over the
Images can be switched by following buttons. image and it will turn to .
: The images of the previous patient

a. Drag the selected source
appears image to be switched.
b. Drop it onto the target image to
: The images of the next patient appears
be replaced.
: The previous images of the same patient
Display in pixel scale. Move the
appears
mouse pointer over the image
: The next images of the same patient and it will turn to .
appears Display in 100%-size image.
Move the mouse pointer over the
image and it will turn to .
5. Drag an image and drop it at the desired Undo the change.
layout position (B).
→→A check mark is put on the thumbnail of the image. Delete a selected image.
A message displays to verify
6. Adjust image size and position with the deletion.
desired buttons (D). Delete all images in the image

window.
Functions of Each Button A message displays to verify
deletion.
Buttons Functions
The image zooms in with every *1 Edited WC and WW values can be set to display/
click. Move the mouse pointer hide as an image attribute information.
over the image and it will turn to
.
The image zooms out with every The deletion of image cannot be undone.
click. Move the mouse pointer Select an image again on the thumbnail (A) and the
over the image and it will turn to image can be added to the image window.
.

9. Select the additional image information
format when displaying them.
• In magnifying or reducing operation, images can
1) Click (D).
be moved without clicking .
The “Format information setting” window opens.
• The image display positions are switched by
drag-and-drop of the image. 2) Select the format in “Current Format“ (H).
3) Click [OK].
• The Display/Hide settings for layout format,
additional image information and footer are not
deleted.
The additional image information format can be created
or set in the “Format information setting” window.
7. Set the footer information. “■Creating Additional Image Information Format”
1) Click (D). “■Editing Additional Image Information Format”
2) Set the footer information (F).
Selection Items 10. Click (E).

Items Contents →→Click [OK] if a message displays to verify.
The film print starts.
Display footer Select from [Yes] or [No]
Footer Select from [Left], [Center], or

position [Right]
When is clicked, Patient ID, patient name,

sex, date, and facility name are added to the text
8
box. The added information can be edited.

3) Click (G).
8. Select the annotation, additional image

information, and ruler to display/hide.
Selection Items
Buttons Functions
All the annotations appear
All the additional image information

appear
The scale of the selected cell

displays
All the scale of the selected cell

displays

■ Creating Additional Image ■ Editing Additional Image
Information Formats Information Formats
1. Click (D). 1. Click (D).

→→The “Format information setting“ window opens. →→The “Format information setting“ window opens.
2. Click (H). 2. Select the format in “Current Format“ (H).

→→The “Input format name“ window opens. →→The displaying position and contents of additional
image information are shown.
3. Enter format name (K).
3. Modify items to be displayed as creation.
4. Click [OK] (L). “■ Creating Additional Image Information Formats”
→→Return to the “Format information setting“ window.
The format name input in 3. shows in the “Current 4. Click [OK] (J).
Format“ →→The format is created. Return to the “Format
information setting“ window.
5. Select the position and items to be displayed
in the additional image information ( I ).
1) Select the position of the additional image The display contents for the additional image
information on [Top-left], [Top-right], [Bottom-left], information of each image can be set even after
or [Bottom-right]. image layout.
8
2) Select the items to be displayed from the “List of
information items”.
3) Click .
■ Deleting Formats
The selected items are added.
1. Click (D).
The height displays and outputs in meters, and the
→→The “Format information setting“ window opens.
weight displays and outputs in kilograms.
2. Select the format in “Current Format“ (H).

→→The displaying position and contents of additional
For deletion of an item, select the additional image
image information are shown.
information displayed in the box at [Top-left], [Top-
right], [Bottom-left], or [Bottom-right] and then click
3. Click (H).
.
→→The format is deleted.
6. Click [OK] (J).

→→The format is created. Return to the “Format
information setting“ window.
■ Finishing
1. Click [Close] in the “Free layout print”
window.
→→A message displays to verify.
2. Click [OK].
→→The ”Free layout print” window closes.

8.5 Printing Report
The created report can be printed out or saved as a PDF file.
■ Operation Window ■ Printing a Report

● “Report” Window 1. Select the report format from the pull-down
(A) (B) menu (A).
2. Click (B).
If “Improvement Program” is displayed, select [No,

thank you].
Click ▼ on (B) to change the printing format.

Selection Items
Items Contents
Launch the Image Adobe Reader starts up and

Viewer *1 displays the preview window
dialog
Direct print Click (B) to start printing
*1 Default setting
3. Print a report.
■ Saving a Report as PDF File

1. Select the report format from the pull-down
menu (A).
2. Click (B).
→→The “Browse For Folder” opens.
3. Select the folder to save a report and click

[OK].

8

Chapter 9
9.1 Starting up the Editing Function........................................ 9-2
9.2 Adding Exposure Menus..................................................... 9-6
9.3 Changing Exposure Menus................................................. 9-7
9.4 Deleting Exposure Menus/Canceling the Deletion........... 9-8 9

9.5 Inactivating Exposed Images/Activating

the Inactivated Images........................................................ 9-9
9.6 Registering Re-exposure Menus...................................... 9-10
9.7 Exchanging Images........................................................... 9-11
9.8 Setting for Printing, Saving, and Transmitting................ 9-12
9.9 Editing Patient Information............................................... 9-15
9.10 Changing the Order of Menus

in the “Read Image” Window............................................ 9-16

9.1 Starting up the Editing Function
This section describes procedures for starting up the various operation windows to edit studies.
■ Operation Windows ● “Read Image” Window

(F)
● “Main” Window - “Refer” Window
(G)
(A) ● “Image Viewer” Window

(H)
● Right-click menu of the “Study List”

Window (I)
9 ● “Main Menu Modification” Window

(B)
(C)
(J)

(E)
(D)

■ Starting up ● Starting from right-click menu of the
“Study list” Window
● Starting from the “Refer” Window 1. Select the study from the list (B).
1. Select the study to be edited from the study
list in the “Study List” window.
2. Right click the study, and select [Edit/Re-
Study] (C).
2. Click (A). →→The “Main Menu Modification” window opens.

3. Click the desired button (J).
3. Click the desired button (J). Functions of Each Button
Functions of Each Button Buttons Functions
Buttons Functions Add Menu Exposure menus will be added to

the current study
Add Menu Exposure menus will be added to
the current study “9.2 Adding Exposure Menus”
“9.2 Adding Exposure Menus” Change Menu Change executed menus and
process images for selected part
Change Menu Change executed menus and
process images for selected part “9.3 Changing Exposure
Menus”
“9.2 Changing Exposure
Menus” Delete/Inactivate Certain menus will be deleted or
Menu inactivated for re-exposure
Delete/Inactivate Certain menus will be deleted or
Menu inactivated for re-exposure “9.4 Deleting Exposure
Menus/Canceling the
“9.4 Deleting Exposure
Deletion”
9
Menus/Canceling the
Deletion” “9.5 Inactivating Exposed
Images/Activating the
“9.5 Inactivating Exposed

Inactivated Images”
Inactivated Images” “9.6 Registering Re-exposure
Menus”
“9.6 Registering Re-exposure
Menus” Relocate Display Exposure menus / images will be
Order relocated
Relocate Exposure menus / images will be
Display Order relocated “9.10 Changing the Order of
Menus in the “Read Image “
“9.10 Changing the Order of
Window”
Menus in the “Read Image”
Window” Exchange Menus will be associated
Images correctly with images exposed
Exchange Menus will be associated
Images correctly with images exposed “9.7 Exchanging Images”
“9.7 Exchanging Images” Output/Storage Film printout or data storage

settings will be changed
Output/Storage Film printout or data storage
settings will be changed “9.8 Setting for Printing,
Saving, and Transmitting”
“9.8 Setting for Printing,
Saving, and Transmitting” Edit Patient Patient data such as DOB and
Information sex will be corrected
Edit Patient Patient data such as DOB and
Information sex will be corrected “9.9 Editing Patient Information”

● Starting from “Study Operations” tab of ■ Starting from the “Read Image”
the “Study List” Window
Window
1. Select the study from the list (D).
1. Click (F) or the desired button (G).
2. Click [Edit/Re-Study] (E) on the “Study Functions of Each Button
operations” tab.
Buttons Functions
Edit patient information
3. Click the desired button (J). “9.9 Editing Patient Information”
Functions of Each Button Add exposures menus
Buttons Functions “9.2 Adding Exposure Menus”
Add Menu Exposure menus will be added to Change exposure menus

the current study “9.3 Changing Exposure Menus”
“9.2 Adding Exposure Menus” Change the order of menus in the
Change Menu Change executed menus and “Read Image” window
process images for selected part “9.10 Changing the Order of
“9.3 Changing Exposure Menus in the “Read Image”
Menus” Window”
Delete/Inactivate Certain menus will be deleted or Register re-exposure menus

Menu inactivated for re-exposure
“9.4 Deleting Exposure Menus”
Menus/Canceling the
Delect menus/inactivate images
Deletion”
9 “9.5 Inactivating Exposed
“9.4 Deleting Exposure Menus/
Canceling the Deletion”
Menus”
Relocate Display Exposure menus / images will be

Order relocated
“9.10 Changing the Order of
Menus in the “Read Image “
Window”
Exchange Menus will be associated

Images correctly with images exposed
“9.7 Exchanging Images”
Output/Storage Film printout or data storage

settings will be changed
“9.8 Setting for Printing,
Saving, and Transmitting”
Edit Patient Patient data such as DOB and

Information sex will be corrected

■ Starting from the “Image
Viewer” Window
1. Display the study to be edited in the sub-

window.
“5.3 Selecting and Arranging Images”
2. Select images from the sub-window.

3. Click (H) or the desired button ( I ).
When editing patient information, display only one

sub-window. If two sub-windows are arranged, the
editing result of patient information cannot be verified
correctly.
Buttons Functions
Editing Patient Information *1

Change menus
“9.3 Changing Exposure Menus” 9
Mis-exposure/Re-exposure

“9.4 Deleting Exposure Menus/
Canceling the Deletion”
Menus”
Additional exposures
“9.2 Adding Exposure Menus”
Exchange images
“9.7 Exchanging Images”
Set the output destination

“9.8 Setting for Printing, Saving,
and Transmitting”
*1 You can also edit the patient information by

clicking the patient information column.

9.2 Adding Exposure Menus
Registers additional exposure menus for exposure.
■ Operation Window ■ Adding an Exposure Menu

● “Adding Exposure Menu” Window 1. Click a menu group (A).
(A)
2. Click a exposure menu (B).
3. Click [Finish] (C).

→→The “Read Image” window or the “Image Viewer”
(B) window opens.
When a verified study is changed, a message

(C)
displays to verify the change.
If you click [OK], the study would return from the
“Verified” to “Started” study status. After completing
the study, re-verify it.
9

9.3 Changing Exposure Menus
Changes menus on the current “Read Image” window on display. When the menu for a read image is
changed, the image is subjected to image processing according to the new menu. If the image has
been rotated or reversed, its status is updated according to the new menu.
■ Operation Window ■ Changing an Exposure Menu

● “Exposure Menu Change” Window (B)
1. Choose an exposure menu to be changed (A).
2. Select a new menu group (B).
(A)
3. Select a new exposure menu (C).
4. Click [Finish] (D).
(C)
window opens.
(D)
“Verified” to “Completed” study status. After
completing the study, re-verify it.
9

The exposure menu is displayed as image
information. If no image information is shown in the
image pane, show it.
“11.2.3 Setting the Attribute Information”

9.4 Deleting Exposure Menus/Canceling
the Deletion
Deletes unnecessary menus and schedules re-exposures.
Completed or verified images started up from the “Image Viewer” cannot be set to delete/undo delete.
■ Operation Window ■ Deleting an Exposure Menu/

Canceling the Deletion
● “Deleting Menus/Inactivating Images”
Window
1. Select an exposure menu prior to reading
images (A).
(B) 2. Click [Delete] (B).

(A) →→A deletion mark ( ) is attached to the exposure
menu.
To cancel deleting the exposure menu, click [Undo

Delete]. mark to indicate the deletion hides.
(C)
9
→→The “Read Image” window opens.

9.5 Inactivating Exposed Images/
Activating the Inactivated Images
Inactivates a read image. Or, activates the inactivated image.
• Once Images are verified and saved to a disk, they cannot be inactivated/activated.
• Inactivated images are not printed or saved even if “Film Print“(optional) or “Work Disk” is selected.
■ Operation Window ■ Inactivating/Activating

Exposure Menus
Window
1. Select the exposure menu for a read image
(A).
(A) 2. Click [Inactivate] (B).

→→An image inactivation mark ( ) is attached to
(B) the image.
To cancel inactivating the exposure menu, click

[Activate]. mark to indicate the inactivation hides.
(C)
9

window opens.

9.6 Registering Re-exposure Menus
Inactivates a read image and registers a re-exposure menu.
Once Images are verified and saved to a disk, they cannot be re-exposed.
■ Operation Window ■ Registering a Re-exposure

Menu
Window
1. Select the exposure menu for a read image
(A).
(A) 2. Click [Re-exposure] (B).

→→A re-exposure mark ( ) is attached to the
exposure menu.
(B)
This image is inactive and the same exposure menu
as that for this image is added to the “Read Image”
(C) window.
9 3. Click [Finish] (C).

window opens.

“Verified” to “Started” study status. After completing
the study, re-verify it.

9.7 Exchanging Images
Exchanges images to correct the order in which they are read.
When images are exchanged, they are subjected to image processing according to the destination
menu. If the images have been rotated or reversed, their status is updated according to the destination
menu.
■ Operation Window ■ Exchange Incorrectly Read

Images to the Correct Exposure
● “Image Exchange” Window Menus
1. Select the two exposure menus (A) to be

(B) exchanged.
(A)
Selected exposure menus are displayed with

checks. When a selected exposure menu is
reselected, it is unchecked and thus deselected.
(C)
2. Click [Exchange] (B).
→→The images in the two selected exposure menus
will be exchanged.
9
Once images are exchanged, the operation cannot
be undone. To reverse the image status, select the

two exposure menus again and exchange the
images.

window opens.

“Verified” to “Completed” study status. After
completing the study, re-verify it.

9.8 Setting for Printing, Saving, and
Transmitting
Verifies or modifies the following settings:
• Saving images to a storage disk
• Printing images on a film (optional)
• Transmitting images to DICOM server (optional)
■ Operation Window ■ Setting up the Destination and

Timing for Outputting and Saving
● “Setting Image Print/Storage” Window
1. Perform various settings (A).
Selection Items
(A) Items Contents
N/A*1 Output or not
Status*2 Status of the output
Destination*3 Current destination

(B) Timing*3 Study status at which the
image is to be output
Upon When the study status

Completion becomes “Completed”
9 The window comes up with the settings configured in Upon When the study status
the “User Utilities”. Verification becomes “Verified”
The “User Utilities” can be configured for users to

apply the same set of settings for all the studies they
conduct using FCR PRIMA Console.
“13.5 Setting of Printing, Saving and Transmitting *1 Put a check mark in order to output the image.
Images” *3 To change these settings, click [Details].
Depending on the functions, some settings are
already specified and cannot be changed.
“■Changing the Detailed Settings”
*2 If images have been output, the “Unoutputted”

check box under Status is selected. This check
box is not accessible for handling.
2. Click [Finish] (B).
• To print or save images for this study on a priority

basis, select the “Execute prioritized printout”
check box.

window opens.

■ Changing the Detailed Settings ● Editing Film Print (Optional) Settings
Modifies the following settings:
● Editing the Settings for Saving Images • Type of film printer used
• Film print timing
to Disks
• Print count
Changes the pixel density with which images
are saved to a storage disk. “Print Destination Detail” Window
“Save Destination Detail” Window
(A)
(B)
(C)
(A)
(D)
(B)
1. Select an imager to be used in the

“Destination” field (A).
The timing at which images are saved to a storage
disk (output timing) is when their study status 2. Select “Timing” (B).
changes to “Verified”. The timing at which images [Upon Completion]:
are saved to a storage disk cannot be changed. Print images on a film when their study status
changes to “Completed”.
1. Click “Output Density” (A). [Upon Verification]: 9

[Save by Default Pixel Count] Print images on a film when their study status

Save images with a reduced pixel density and hence changes to “Verified”.
in a smaller file size.
3. Select a film output count (C).
[Save by Max Pixel Count]
Save images with the maximum pixel density that
allows them to be saved or printed on the system. 1 to 9 copies can be printed.
Once images have their pixel density set to “Save by 4. Click [Setup](D).
Default Pixel Count” on FCR PRIMA Console, the
→→The system returns to the ““Setting Image Print/
pixel density is kept as is even if “Save by Max Pixel
Storage” window.
Count” is specified after reloading the images into
FCR PRIMA Console and saving them to the disk.
2. Click [Setup] (B).

→→The system returns to the “Setting Image Print/
Storage” window.

● Editing Settings for Transmitting Images
to DICOM Server (Optional)
Modifies the transmission destination (output
destination) in DICOM server to which images
are transmitted to DICOM server and the pixel
density (output density) with which the images
are transmitted.
“Print Destination Detail” Window
(A)
(B)
(C)
The timing at which images are transmitted to

DICOM server (output timing) is when their study
status changes to “Verified”. The timing at which
images are transmitted to DICOM server cannot be
9 changed.
1. Select a destination DICOM server in the

“Destination” field (A).
2. Select an “Output Density” (B).

[Save by Default Pixel Count]:
Transmit images with a reduced pixel density and
hence in a smaller file size.
[Save by Max Pixel Count]:

Transmit images with the maximum pixel density that
allows them to be saved or printed on the system.
Once images have their pixel density set to “Save by

Default Pixel Count” on FCR PRIMA Console, the
pixel density is kept as is even if “Save by Max Pixel
Count” is specified after reloading the images into
FCR PRIMA Console and saving them in the disk.
3. Click [Setup] (C).

→→The system returns to the “Setting Image Print/
Storage” window.

9.9 Editing Patient Information
Edits made to the patient information can be reflected in the corresponding information stored in the
FCR PRIMA Console database.
■ Operation Windows ■ Editing Patient Information

● “Edit Searched Patient Information” 1. Edit the patient information (A).
Window
• Entering patient ID
Enter the patient ID with single-byte alphanumeric
characters. The allowable character length is
(A) determined by a system setting.
The following characters cannot be used.
“ # % & `+ ? / \ * @ <
However, the space can be used but the patient
ID which consists of solely space is not allowed.
(C)
“3.2 Registering the Patient Information to be
(B) Exposed”
2. To modify only the patient information of the

relevant study without changing the patient
information database, uncheck the “Update
patient master” checkbox (B). 9

If the confirmed study is changed, the study status
will return from “Verified” to “Completed”. After
completing the study, verify the study again.

window opens.
4. Check that the patient information has been

modified.

9.10 Changing the Order of Menus in the
“Read Image” Window
The menu display order on the “Read Image” window is changed.
■ Operation Window 1. Select the exposure menu (A) to be relocated.

2. Click the direction buttons (B) to change the
● “Exposure Menu Relocate” Window order of the appearance.
(A)
Buttons Functions
To the TOP Moves the selected

exposure menu to the top
(B)
UP Moves up the selected
exposure menu
DOWN Moves down the selected

exposure menu
(C) To the END Moves down the selected

exposure menu

→→The “Read Image” window opens.
9

Chapter 10
Verifying with
the Indicators
10.1 Viewing Indicators and Activating Functions.................. 10-2

10.1.1 Viewing Indicators........................................................ 10-2
10.1.2 Activating Functions from Indicators......................... 10-4
10.2 Verifying the Status of Image Reader

and Cleaning Procedures.................................................. 10-5
10.3 Verifying Disk Status and Maintenance........................... 10-6
10.4 Verifying NAS/USB-HDD Status (Optional)...................... 10-8

10
10.5 Verifying Film Printer Status (Optional)........................... 10-9

10.6 Verifying Image Output Status .......................................10-10
10.7 Verifying Events (Errors, Warnings or Information)..... 10-11
10.8 Replacing USB memory.................................................. 10-12

10.1 Viewing Indicators and Activating
Functions
Indicators provide visual indications of the status of the Image Reader, disk, NAS/USB-HDD, printer
(optional), data transfer and events (errors, warnings and information).
By installing conditions for options or by the system settings at the time of installing, some icons are not
displayed.
10.1.1 Viewing Indicators
■ Position of “Indicator”
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Icons on Indicators:
(1) Image Reader
(2) Disk/USB memory*1
(3) NAS/USB-HDD (optional)
(4) Film printer (optional)
(5) Output Status
(6) Events (errors, warnings, information)
*1 When the study images are saved directly in the
DVD-R, the disk icon “ “ appears.
10
The icons on indicators can be set to display/hide for each icon.
“11.2.10 Display Setting of “Indicator””

■ Indicator State and Corresponding Notice
Indicators turn on, turn off or blink, to notify necessary information listed in the following tables.
Contents
State
Off (Unavailable) On (Available) Blinking (Error occurs)
No Image Reader is connected to An Image Reader is connected to An error has occurred with the
the FCR PRIMA Console. the FCR PRIMA Console. Image Reader connected to the
(1)
Images cannot be read. Connect Images can be read. FCR PRIMA Console. *1
an Image Reader.
Either a storage disk is not inserted in A write-enabled storage disk is -
the PC’s control drive or a read-only inserted in the PC’s control drive.
(2)
disk is inserted in the PC’s control Images can be saved to the disk.
drive.
Images cannot be saved to the disk.
No USB memory is connected to A USB memory has been The USB memory has reached
(2) the server PC. connected to the server PC. the time to be replaced.
No images can be saved in a USB Images can be saved in the USB
memory. memory.
NAS/USB-HDD is not available. NAS/USB-HDD is available. No free space in NAS/USB-HDD.
(3) Images cannot be saved to NAS/ Images can be saved to NAS/
USB-HDD. USB-HDD.
The default film printer is not The default film printer is available. An error has occurred with the
(4) available. Images can be printed on a film. default film printer. *1
Images cannot be printed on a film.
(5) There is no image being output. An image is being output. -
FCR PRIMA Console is running - An event (error, warning or

(6)
normally. information) has occurred. *1
*1 Click the indicator to view detailed information about the event. Verify the event and take appropriate action.
10

10.1.2 Activating Functions from Indicators
Activates desired functions by clicking indicators.
■ Operation Window ■ Opening “Indicator” Windows

● ”Indicators” 1. Click an desired “Indicator” button to verify
(From (1) to (6)).
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Functions of Each Button
Button Functions
Status of “Read Image” part

“10.2 Verifying the Status of Image
Reader and Cleaning Procedures”
Disk status
“10.3 Verifying Disk Status and
Maintenance”
USB memory status

“10.8 Replacing USB memory”
NAS/USB-HDD status
“10.4 Verifying NAS/USB-HDD Status
(Optional)”
Film printer status

“10.5 Verifying Film Printer Status
(Optional)”
10 Output status
“10.6 Verifying Image Output Status”
Verifying Events (Errors, Warnings or

Information)
“10.7 Verifying Events (Errors,
Warnings or Information)”
• You can do the same by clicking tabs in the top

of each “Indicator” window.
• Events (Errors, Warnings or Information) can be
also performed by right-clicking the server
application icon docked in the task tray and
clicking [Event indicator].

10.2 Verifying the Status of Image Reader
and Cleaning Procedures
Verifies the status of the image reader connected to the FCR PRIMA Console and performs scanner cleaning.
■ Operation Windows ■ Verifying the Status of the

Image Reader
● The “Reader” Window - “Status”
1. Click [Status] (A).
(A)
2. Click [Update] (C).
(B) 3. Verify the status and the detailed information
(B).
(C) (D)
■ Cleaning the Scanner of the
Image Reader
● The “Reader” Window - “Operation”

Perform scanner cleaning to remove dust from
the scanner head which you are reminded to
carry out periodically.
(E) 1. Click [Operation] (E)

2. Click [Operation] (F).
10
(F)

Before performing scanner cleaning, check that the
Image Reader is available.
(D)
Scanner cleaning takes about 15 seconds to

complete. Click [Status] to return to the status view
of the “Reader” window.
■ Verifying the status of the

Image Reader and Exiting
Scanner Cleaning.
1. Click [OK] (D).

→→The “Reader” window closes.

10.3 Verifying Disk Status and Maintenance
Checks the status of the disk set in the PC’s control drive and performs maintenance.
■ Operation Windows ■ Verifying Disk Status

● “Disk” Window - “Status/Operation”
Click [Update] (F) to update information.
(A)
● Status of Each Drive
(B)
(C)
1. Click [Status/Operation] (A).
2. Select a drive in “Device Name” (B).
(G) (J) (H)
3. Verify the detailed information.
(F) (I)
Display Items
● “Disk” Window - “Store-Disk List”

Items Contents
Status Disk name and the amount of free

space (%)
(D) Usage*1 Usage of disks

• storage disk
• work disk
(E) Disk Write Disk write settings

• write-enabled
• read-only
10 *1 Nothing appears for any other type of disk.
“2.7 Before Using Disks”
(F’) ( I’ )

● Status of the Registered Storage Disk ■ Verifying Disk Status of the
Image Reader and Exiting
1. Click [Store-Disk List] (D).
Scanner Cleaning
2. Click [Update] (F’).
1. Click [OK] (( I ), ( I’ )).
3. Verifying the storage disk list (E). →→The “Disk” window closes.
Display Items
Items Contents
Disk Name Storage Disk name
Write Start The date and time at which writing

to a storage disk started
Write End The date and time at which writing

to a storage disk ended
Status Disk write display

• write-enabled
• read-only
■ Disk Maintenance
● Replacing Disks
1. Click [Replace] (G).
→→The “Replacing Disks” window opens, and then
the disk drive tray opens
“12.8 Disk Maintenance” 10
● Ejecting Disk

1. Click [Eject] (J).
→→the disk drive tray opens.
2. Remove the disk from the disk drive tray and

close the tray.
● Perform from “Client Utilities”

1. Click [Utility] (H).
→→The “Disk Operation” window opens.
“12.8 Disk Maintenance”

10.4 Verifying NAS/USB-HDD Status (Optional)
Verifies the status of the NAS/USB-HDD connected to the FCR PRIMA Console.
■ Operation Window ■ Verifying NAS/USB-HDD Status

● “Disk” Window - “Status/Operation” 1. Click [Status/Operation] (A).
2. Select a NAS/USB-HDD in “Device Name” (B).
(A)
(B) 3. Verify the detailed information (C).

Display Items
(C)
Items Contents
Status Disk name and the amount of free

space (%)
(E) (D) Disk Write Display Disk Write
• When the HDD does not have enough space, Click [Update] (E) to update information.
install another NAS/USB-HDD. In such cases,
contact our official dealer.
• When an error of NAS/USB-HDD is displayed in
the indicator for Event, contact our official dealer to
fix it.
■ Exiting the Verification of NAS/
USB-HDD Status
10 1. Click [OK] (D).
→→The “Disk” window closes.

10.5 Verifying Film Printer Status (Optional)
Verifies the status of the film printer connected to the FCR PRIMA Console.
■ Operation Window ■ Verifying Film Printer Status

● “Printer” Window 1. Select a printer in “Device Name” (A).
2. Verify the status and the detailed information
(A) (B).
(B) Click [Update] (C) to update information.
(C) (D)
■ Verifying the Status of the Film
Printer
1. Click [OK] (D).

→→The “Printer” window closes.
10

10.6 Verifying Image Output Status
Verifies the output status of images as they are printed on a film (optional), saved to a disk or
transmitted to DICOM server (optional). Canceled or failed output of images can be retried.
■ Operation Window ■ Verifying Image Output Status

● “Output” Window 1. Select an output destination of interest in
Filter Conditions (A).
→→The status of the selected output destination is
(A)
displayed (E).
(E)
■ Canceling Image Output

(B) (C)
1. Select an image to cancel output (E).
(D)
2. Click [Cancel] (B).
■ Outputting an Image Again that

Has Once Failed to be Output
1. Select an image to be output again (E).

10 2. Click [Force Output] (C).
■ Exiting the Verification of Image

Output Status
1. Click [OK] (D).

→→The “Output” window closes.

10.7 Verifying Events
(Errors, Warnings or Information)
Verifies events (errors, warnings or information) occurring on the FCR PRIMA Console system.
■ Operation Windows ■ Verifying Events

● “Events” Window 1. Select [Source] (A) and [Status] (B).
Selection Items
(A) (B)
Items Contents
Source • All • Study

• Printer Registration
• Disk • Image Browse
• DICOM Storage • Common
(F) • Image Reader • Other
Status All
Unconfirmed Only
Confirmed Only
(C)
→→The events of the selected Source and Status is
(D) displayed.
2. Select an event of interest (F).

The events are shown in the descending order of
Date/Time.
3. Click [Details] (C).
→→The “Error Details “ window opens.
● “Error Details” Window The following functions are also available.

10
Buttons Functions

Deletes an event
Delete all the events
Display the previous page of the event list

(E)
Display the next page of the event list
*1
Mark the selected events as being
verified
*1
Check all the events in the current
page as being verified
*1
Check all the events as being verified
*1 Verified events are hidden when “Unconfirmed

Only” is selected in Status.
■ Exiting Events Verification

1. Click [Close] (E)
→→The “Error Details” window closes.
2. Click [OK] (D).

→→The “Event” window closes.

10.8 Replacing USB memory
USB memories generally deteriorate according to the increasing total volume of data written in them
which results in them failing. An indicator turns on when the time to replace the USB memory comes
close. Follow the procedure below to replace the USB memory.
• The procedure described here is for the case where studies are temporally saved in a USB memory and then to a
DVD disk in batch mode.
• Do not connect and/or disconnect other USB devices during this procedure.
The USB memory needs to be replaced at the time below.

• Three years have passed after the beginning of use of the USB memory.
• The total volume of data written in the USB memory exceeds 3 TB.
■ Operation Window ● “Format” Window

● ”Indicator”
(A)
(E)
● “Events” Window
10 (F)
(B)
(G)
● “Computer Management” Window

● “USB memory -> DVD writing tool” Window
(C)
(H)
(D)

● “Change Drive Letter and Paths” Window ■Writing study Data in DVD Disks
Start up the DVD writing tool to write the study
data in the DVD disk.
1. Terminate the server application.

“2.5.2 Exiting FCR PRIMA Console”
(I)
2. Double-click the “UsbToMediaSaveTool”
short-cut on the desktop.
→→“USB memory -> DVD writing tool window” is
● “Change Drive Letter or Path” Window

displayed.
3. Select a drive (C) into which the data is to be

written.
(J)
4. Click [Starts writing] (D).
→→The DVD drive automatically opens.
Prepare the required number of DVD disks according

to the number of targeted folders displayed on the
■Preparing for Replacement screen.
Prepare the followings before replacement.

• USB memory (32 GB or larger, USB 2.0 or later
5. Set a DVD disk in the drive and then close it.
→→The writing will automatically start. After the writing
compatible)
is completed, the DVD drive automatically opens.
• DVD-R disk (Single-sided single-layer, 4.7
GB)
6. Check that “There is no folder that supports 10
outputs to the DVD” has appeared and
■Checking Status remove the DVD disk.

An indicator blinks when the time to replace
the USB memory comes close. Click the If writing the date to muliple number of DVD disks,
indicator to check the content of the event. set in a new disk.
Repeat this operation until “There is no folder that
1. Click the USB memory indicator (A) to open supports outputs to the DVD” is displayed.
“Event window”.
7. Click “Close” to terminate the DVD writing
2. Check that “Replace the USB memory.” (B) tool.
has appeared with the “Event” tab.

■Replacing USB Memory ■Checking Status
Disconnect old USB memory and connect new Check that the USB memory icon lights up when
one. you start up the application next time.
If the USB memory icon does not light up, open
“Computer” on the desktop (for Windows 7) and
Always disconnect the old one first and then connect
check the drive letter of the USB memory.
the new one.
If the drive letter has changed from that before
replacement, perform the procedure described
1. Operate the task tray at the lower right on the in “■Changing Drive Letter” to set the drive
screen to disconnect the old USB memory. letter equal to that before replacement.
Click “Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media” in
the task tray at the lower right on the screen (for
Windows 7).
■Changing Drive Letter
Select “Eject USB Mass Storage Device” (the message If the drive letter has changed from that before
depends on the USB memory type) from the menu replacement, perform the procedure described
that has appeared.
below to set the drive letter equal to that before
At this time, check the displayed drive letter of the USB
replacement.
memory.
In an example below, the USB drive is set to the E
1. Select the “Start” menu and then “Control
drive.
panel”.
Check that “The USB Mass Storage Device can now
→→The “All control panel items” window is displayed.
be removed from the computer.” has appeared, and
then disconnect the USB memory.
2. Click “Management tool”.
2. Connect a new USB memory to the USB port →→The “Management tool” window is displayed.
from which the old one is disconnected in
Step 1. 3. Double-click “Computer Management”.
→→The “Computer Management” window appears.
10 ■Formatting new USB memory 4. Select “Storage” - “Disk Management” on the
Format the new USB memory for NTFS. left of the screen (H).
1. Select the “Start” menu and then “My 5. Right-click the volume you want to change
computer”. the drive name and select “Change Drive
→→The “My computer” screen is displayed. Letter and Paths”.
→→The “Change Drive Letter and Paths” window is
2. From among the drives displayed, determine displayed.
the USB memory being connected.
6. Click [Change] (I).
3. Right-click the USB memory and select →→The “Change Drive Letter or Path” window is displayed.
“Format”.
→→The “Formal” window is displayed. 7. Select “Assign the following drive letter” and
then the drive letter before replacement from
4. Change “File system” from “FAT32” to the pull-down menu (J).
“NTFS” (E). →→The confirmation window is displayed.
5. Put a check on “Quick Format” of “Format 8. Click “Yes”.

options” (F).
→→The screen returns to the “Computer
management” window.
6. Click [Start] (G).
→→The USB memory is formatted. 9. Check that the drive letter has been
corrected.

Chapter 11
Changing Display Settings
of the “Main” Window and
“Image Viewer”
11.1 Display Settings of the “Main” Window........................... 11-2
11.1.1 Starting Up and Shutting Down
the Display Setting Function....................................... 11-2
11.1.2 Initial Display Settings of the “Main” Window........... 11-4
11.1.3 Display Settings of “ID input” Window....................... 11-5
11.1.4 Display Settings of “Study List” Window................... 11-6
11.1.5 Display Setting of “Study list operation” Window.... 11-7
11.1.6 Display Setting of “Work List” Window (Optional).... 11-8
11.1.7 Display Settings of “Search Conditions
Input Window”.............................................................. 11-9 11
11.1.8 Display Settings of “FCR-Menus” Window.............. 11-11
Changing Display Settings of the "Main" Window and "Image Viewer"

11.1.9 Display Settings of Exposing and Reading.............. 11-12
11.1.10 Display Settings of “Refer” Window......................... 11-13
11.1.11 Setting the Font Size in the “Main” Window............ 11-15
11.2 Changing Settings of “Image Viewer” Window............. 11-16

11.2.1 Starting the Customize Function.............................. 11-16
11.2.2 Initial Settings of Annotation..................................... 11-18
11.2.3 Setting the Attribute Information.............................. 11-20
11.2.4 Setting Reading Protocol........................................... 11-21
11.2.5 Display Settings of Toolbar....................................... 11-23
11.2.6 Display Settings of Report......................................... 11-24
11.2.7 Quick Mouse Setting.................................................. 11-29
11.2.8 Display Settings of Simplified Print.......................... 11-30
11.2.9 Setting Window Processing Presets........................ 11-32
11.2.10 Display Setting of “Indicator” ................................... 11-33
11.2.11 Display Setting of “Image Viewer” Window............. 11-34
11.2.12 Returning to Standard Settings................................. 11-36
11.2.13 Importing/Exporting Settings.................................... 11-37

11.1 Display Settings of the “Main” Window
Configures settings of the “Main” window, such as which items are to be displayed in each window in
the “Main” window, or which window is to be displayed when started up.
11.1.1 Starting Up and Shutting Down the Display Setting Function

■ Operation Windows Items Contents
● “Main” Window Study List Set the number of items which are to
be displayed in the study list. Also,
set whether to automatically update
the study list contents, whether to
display the operation window, and
whether to lock the pane layout.
“11.1.4 Display Settings of “Study
List” Window”
(A) Study list Set the items to be displayed by the
operation “Study Operations” tab of the study list
and the right-click operation.
● “Display setting” Window “11.1.5 Display Settings of “Study
(B) list operation” Window”
Network Set the items to be displayed in the
WL work list and the their order. Also, set
(optional) whether or not to automatically
update the contents of the work list.
“11.1.6 Display Setting of “Work
List” Window”
Search Set the search conditions and the
panel 1 search range of “Image information”
on “Search conditions Input” window.
(C)
“11.1.7 Display Settings of
11 ■ Starting Up FCR-
“Search conditions input” window”
The shortcuts for the exposure menu
Menus can be set.
1. Select - [Customize] - [Display setting]
“11.1.8 Display Settings of “FCR-

(A).
Menus” Window”
→→The “Display setting” window opens.
FCR- Behavior on registering a study and
2. Click a desired tab (B) and change display Operations behavior after reading images with
settings. the “Image Viewer” can be set.
Selection Items
Exposing and Reading”
Items Contents
Modalities The modalities to be displayed in the
General The initial display for the “Main” study list and their order can be set.
window can be set.
“11.1.2 Initial Display Settings of “Refer” Window”
the “Main” Window”
Toolbar Operations which can be performed
ID input Set the items to display in the “Input for studies in the study list can be
ID” window and its order. Also name added or removed.
of items can be set to display/hide.
“11.1.3 Display Settings of “ID “Refer” Window”
input” Window”
Font The font size can be set for the each
screen in the “Main” window.
“11.1.11 Setting the Font Size in
the “Main” Window”

■ Shutting Down
1. Click [OK] (C).
→→Ths system returns to the “Main” window.
11

11.1.2 Initial Display Settings of the “Main” Window
Sets the window to be displayed first when the “Main” window is started.
■ ■ Setting
Operation Window the Initial Display when Started
up
● “Display setting” Window - “General”
Window
1. From the pull-down menu (A), select the
window to be displayed first in the upper side
(A)
of the “Main” window when the FCR PRIMA
(B)
Console is started.
(C)
2. From the pull-down menu (B), select the

window to be displayed in the lower side of
the window when a patient is selected in the
(D) “Input ID” window or in the “Study List”
window.
(E)
• To set back the confirmation message set to be

hidden back to be displayed, click [Message
initialization].
• The waiting time (seconds) until tool tip display
can be set with “Tooltip setting”.
3. Select [Top and bottom] or [Right and left] for

the layout setting of the “Main” Window (C).
11 Set the layout setting according to the display

screen of the device to be used and also change the
window size.
4. From the pull-down menu (D), select whether

to display the button for the automatic image
referring function.
5. Click [OK] (E).
Select another tab to set another display settings.

11.1.3 Display Settings of “ID input” Window
Sets the items and its order to be displayed in the “Input ID” window. Also, the names of items can be
set to display/hide.
■ Operation Window ■ Setting Items and Their Order to

be Displayed in the “ID input”
● “Display setting” Window - “ID input” Window
Window
(A)
1. Check the check box of items to be displayed
as input items (A).
(B)
Uncheck the check box of items not to be displayed
as input items.
(C) 2. Select an item to change the display order in

the list, and click [Up] or [Down] (B).
(D)
By clicking [Up] or [Down], the item is moved up or

down respectively.
3. Repeat steps 1. and 2. to set the display

items.
4. Select display/do not display the item name (C).

5. Click [OK] (D).
11
Select another tab to set another display setting.

11.1.4 Display Settings of “Study List” Window
Sets the maximum number of items to be displayed in the study list. Also sets whether the study list is
to be updated automatically or not, the update interval when autoupdate is enabled, whether or not to
display the operation window, and lock the pane layout.
■ Operation Window ■ Setting the Display Contents in

the “Study List” Window
● “Display setting” Window - “Study List”
Window
1. Set the maximum number of items to be
displayed (A) in the study list.
(A)
(B) 2. Put a check mark to “Enable automatic

(C) updating” (B).
(D)
(E)
To disable the autoupdate, uncheck the check box of
“Enable automatic updating”.
(F)
3. Set the update interval (C). Change the value
by clicking the arrow buttons.
4. Put a check mark to “Display the operation

screen when displaying the study list” (D).
If you do not want to display the operation screen,

uncheck “Display the operation screen when
displaying the study list”.
11 5. Put a check mark to “Lock the Pane Layout”

(D).
• To not lock the pane layout in the search list, uncheck

“Lock the Pane Layout”.
• The settings change will be reflected at the next login.
6. Click [OK] (F).

11.1.5 Display Setting of “Study list operation” Window
Sets the items to be displayed by the “Study Operations” tab of the study list and the right-click operation.
■ Operation Window ■ Setting items to be displayed

on the “Right-click Operation of
● “Display setting” Window - “Study list Study List”
operation” Window
(A) 1. Select the item to be displayed by right-click

on the study list from “Hide Items” and click
(B)
(D).
• Select the item that you do not want to display by

right-click operation from “Display Items” and click
.
• Items are displayed in the order from the top.
(C)
2. Select an item to change the display order

■ Setting items to be displayed with the right-click operation in the study list
is displayed, click [Move up] or [Move down]
on the “Study Operations” tab (B).
of “Study List”
Every time when “Move up” or “Move down” is
1. To not display the button names on the “Study clicked, the item moves up or down.
Operations” tab, uncheck the “Displaying
Operation Button Name” checkbox (A).
2. Select the items which are to be displayed on items.
the “Study Operations” tab in the study list 11
from “Hide Items”, and click (B). 4. Click [OK] (C).

• Select the item that you do not want to display in Select another tab to set another display settings.
the study list from “Display Items” and click
.
• Items are displayed in the order from the top.
3. Select an item to change the display order

with the study list is displayed, click [Up] or
[Down] (C).
Every time when “Up” or “Down” is clicked, the item

moves up or down.

items.
5. Click [OK] (F).

11.1.6 Display Setting of “Work List” Window (Optional)
Sets the items to be displayed in the work list and the maximum number of items to be displayed. Also
sets whether the work list is to be updated automatically or not and the update interval when
autoupdate is enabled.
■ Operation Window ■ Setting the Display Contents in

the “Network WL” Window
● “Display setting” Window - “Network
WL” Window
1. Check the check box of items to be displayed
(A)
(A) in the work list.
• Uncheck the check box of items not to be

(B)
displayed in the work list.
• The items are displayed left aligned in the work list
according to the order of items on the customize
window.
(C)
(D)
(E) 2. Select an item to change the display order in
(F) the work list, and click [Up] or [Down] (B).

down respectively.

items.
4. Set the maximum number of items to be

11 displayed (C) in the work list.
5. Put a check mark to “Enable automatic

updating” (D).
To disable the autoupdate, uncheck the check box of

“Enable automatic updating”.
6. Set the update interval (E). Change the value

by clicking the arrow buttons.
7. Click [OK] (F).

11.1.7 Display Settings of “Search Conditions Input Window”
Set the search conditions and search range to be displayed in the “Image Information” column, of the
“Search conditions input” window.
■ Operation Window ■ Setting the Image Information

Query
● “Display setting” Window - “Search
panel 1” Window
1. Select the query from the list of image
(A) information queries (A).
(B) 2. Click each button (B) to set the query.

Buttons Functions
(C)
[Up] Change the display order of the
[Down] selected query.
(D)
(E) [New] Display the “Image information query
setting” window and create a new
query.
● “Image information query setting” “■Adding/Editing the Image

Window Information Query”
[Edit] Display the “Image information query

setting” window and edit the setting for
the selected query.
(F) “■Adding/Editing the Image

Information Query”
[Delete] Delete the selected query.
(G)
3. Click [Initialize configuration information] (C) 11

● “Search range setting” Window to initialize the “Search conditions input”
window setting information.

“■Initializing the Configuration Information”
(H)
4. Click [Search range setting] (D) to set the

search range for the “Image information”.
“■Setting the Search Range for the Image
Information”
(I)
5. Click [OK] (E).
● “Confirmation” Window
(J)

■ Adding/Editing the Image ■ Setting the Search Range for
Information Query the Image Information
1. Click [New] (B) to add a query. To edit a query, 1. Click [Search range setting] (C).
select the query to be edited and click [Edit] →→The “Search range setting” window opens.
(B).
→→“The “Image information query setting” window 2. Apply a check mark for the items to be
opens. included in the search range (H).
2. Set the image information query (F) . 3. Click [OK] ( I ).

Input/Selected item →→The system returns to the “Display setting”
window.
Item Contents
Query name Enter the query name
Search Select the following items from the
Range list
• Study Description
• Anatomical Region
• Menu
Search Enter the keyword to be searched
keyword in the search range selected by
“Search Range”.
• When [Clear] is clicked, all currently entered

conditions are deleted.
• In case of multiple search ranges, select “AND” or
“OR”.
3. Click [OK] (G).

→→The system returns to the “Display setting”
11 window.
■ Initializing the Setting

Information
1. Click [Initialize configuration information] (D).

→→The “Confirmation” window opens.
2. Click [OK] (J).

→→The setting information is initialized and return is
made to the “Display setting” window.

11.1.8 Display Settings of “FCR-Menus” Window
Sets frequently used exposure menus as shortcuts in the “FCR” window of the“ Main” window.
Exposure menus which is not set as shortcuts can be selected from [Others].
This item will be applied to the entire system.
■ Operation Windows ■ Setting the Display Contents in

the “FCR” Window
● “Display setting” Window - “FCR-Menus”
Window
1. Click [Select] (A).
→→The “Exposure Menu (Detail)” window opens.
2. Select a menu group (C).

→→The exposure menus and/or the study menus in
the selected menu group are displayed in the
lower side of the window.
(A)
3. Select a study menu or an exposure menu (D).
(B) →→The menu is displayed in the list of selected
menus on the right side of the window.
● “Exposure Menu (Detail)” Window 4. Click [OK] (E) at the bottom right of the
window.
(C) →→The selected menu is added.
5. Click [OK] (B).

11

(D) (E)

11.1.9 Display Settings of Exposing and Reading
Sets whether to start an exposure immediately or to register only the study after selecting the exposure
menu.
■ Operation Window ■ Setting Behavior on Selecting

an Exposure Menu and on
● “Display setting” Window - “FCR- Reading Images with the
Operations” Window
“Image Viewer”
(A)
1. Select the “Behavior on registering a study” (A).
2. Click [OK] (B).
(B)
11

11.1.10 Display Settings of “Refer” Window
The following settings can be performed.
• Setting the modalities to be displayed in the study list of the “Refer” window.
• Adding and deleting operation items to be performed for studies in the study list. Each operation item
is displayed in an icon in the lower side of the “Refer” window.
■ Operation Windows ● “Detailed classification conditions”

Window
● “Display setting” Window - “Modalities”
Window
(A)
(K)
(L)
(B)
■ Setting Modalities to be
Displayed in the Study List
(C)
1. Put the check box of items to be displayed
(A) in the study list.
● “Display setting” Window - “Toolbar”

Window Remove the check box of items not to be displayed
in the study list.
(D)
(E) 2. Click [Up] or [Down] (B) while selecting an
(F)
item for which the display order is to be
changed.
11
(G)

down respectively.
(H)

● “Modality classification conditions” items.
Window
4. Click [OK] (C).
(I) Select another tab to set another display settings.
(J)

■ Adding/editing modalities to be ■ Setting the Operation Icons in
displayed in the study list the Study List
1. Click [New] (B) to add a modality. To edit a 1. Select an operation item from the operation
modality, select a modality to be edited and item list on the left side of the window (D).
click [Edit] (B).
2. Click [>>>] (E) on the left side of items to be
added.
To delete a modality, select a modality to be deleted
and click [Delete] (B).
• Deleting an operation item from a block.
→→The “Modality classification conditions” window To be removed operation items, click [Remove] (G).
opens. • To change the display order, click [Up] or [Down]
while selecting an item for which the display order
2. Set the modality classification conditions ( I ). is to be changed.
Input/Selected items
Items Contents 3. Click [OK] (H).
Display Input the classification name of a
name modality to be displayed in the study
list • When operation items have been added or their
order has been changed, these settings are also
Modality Input modalities (up to 3) to be
applied to the “Main” window.
included in the classification name.
• Select another tab to set another display settings.
3. Click [OK] (J).
■ Categorizing predefined modalities

in detail
Predefined modalities can be categorized on
the basis of the exposure information.
11
1. Select a predefined modality (A) and then
click [New] (B).
→→“Detailed categorization condition screen” is

displayed.
2. Set the detailed categorization condition (K).

Input/Selected items
Items Contents
Display Enter a category name to be displayed
name on the study list.
AND/OR Set AND or OR for the condition to

include the study into the category
name (Target range + Words).
Target range Select a category condition (study

information of the target).
Words Set a text included in the study information

set with “Target range”.
3. Click [OK] (L).

11.1.11 Setting the Font Size in the “Main” Window
Font size can be set for each window in the “Main” window.
■ Operation Window ■ Setting the Font Size for the

“Main” Window
● “Display setting” Window - “Font”
Window
1. Select the font size for the “Main” window
from the pull-down menu (A).
(A) 2. Click [OK] (B).
(B)
11

11.2 Changing Settings of “Image Viewer”
Window
The following settings can be performed in the “Customize” menu of “Image Viewer” window.
• Annotation initial settings • Quick mouse setting
• Attribute info • Simplified Print
• Reading protocol • Window processing presets
• Tool bar • Indicator Setting
• Report • Display Settings
These settings can be returned to the initial settings all together or can be imported/exported.
11.2.1 Starting the Customize Function

■ Operation Window ■ Starting Up
● “Image Viewer” Window 1. Click [Customize] and select the setting menu
to be changed (A).
→→The selected display setting window opens.
Selection Items
Items Contents
Annotation initial The “Annotation setting” window

settings opens.
(A)
Set to display the annotation.
“11.2.2 ■Setting the Display/
Tag Display of Annotations”
Attribute info The “Settings for image

incidental information” window
opens.
11 Set the image information.
“11.2.3 ■Setting Image
Attribute Information
Reading protocol The “Display setting for series

view” window opens.
Change the display settings
when referring series images.
The display settings can be set
with each modality.
“11.2.4 ■Setting the Display
of Each Modality”
Toolbar The “Set viewer tool bar” window

opens.
Set the tool bar to be displayed
in the “Image Viewer” window.
of Toolbar”

Items Contents
Report The “Report tag settings” window

opens.
Set the format for the comment
column, display of schema, and
during printing.
of Report”
Quick mouse The “Quick mouse setting”

setting window opens. Set the tools to
be switched by quick mouse
operation.
“11.2.7 Quick Mouse Setting”
Simplified Print The “Simplified Print” window

opens. Set the settings for
template files to be used when
printing and the attribute
information to be displayed when
outputting.
Simplified Print”
Window The “Window processing

processing presets” window opens.
presets Set the parameters for the
window processing presets.
“11.2.9 Setting Window
Processing Presets”
Indicator Setting The “Indicator setting” window

opens.
Set the display conditions of
items to be displayed on the
indicator.
“11.2.10 Display Setting of
“Indicator” ” 11
Display Setting The “Style setting” window
opens.

Set the image display in sub-
window or the initial display of
study summary/image cart. Also,
set the actions during storage of
FCR image processing
parameters.
“11.2.11 ■Setting Actions
during Image Display or
Storage”
You can do the same by right-clicking the images

displayed in the “Image Viewer” and select the
settings from the [Customize] menu.

11.2.2 Initial Settings of Annotation
Sets the initial display of basic graphic annotation and measurement annotation.
■ Operation Window Items Contents

Measurement Select the area of angle to be
● “Annotation setting” Window angle measured
Supplementary Put a check mark when displaying
(A)
angle will be the supplementary angle of the
displayed measured angle
(B)
The items to be set are different from the selected

annotation.
(C)
Annotation Settable contents
(D) Magnifying glass • Width of Magnifying glass
(pixel)
• Height of Magnifying glass
■ Setting the Display/Tag Display Arrow, Ellipse,

(pixel)
• Line thickness
of Annotations Rectangle, Polygon • Line color
True Circle • Line thickness

1. Select annotation (A). • Line color
• Displaying a center point
2. Set the initial value (B). Text • Font
• Style
Input/Selection Items • Size
Items Contents • Text color
• Background color
Width of Input the width of magnifying glass (By putting a check mark
Magnifying in pixel on the “Transparent color”
glass (pixel) check box, the background
11 Height of
Magnifying
Input the height of magnifying
glass in pixel
hides.)
Measure line • Line thickness

glass (pixel)
segment, • Line color
Line thickness Select the line thickness of Simplified • Use measurement guide
annotation cardiothoracic ratio, (Only Simplified
Line color Select the line color of annotation Cardiothoracic ratio, cardiothoracic ratio and
Vertical interline Cardiothoracic ratio can be
Displaying a Put a check mark when displaying angle, Three line set)
center point a center point of an annotation segments angle B,
(settable only for the true circle Perpendicular
annotation) segment
Font Select the font measurement B
Style Select the text style Interline angle, • Line thickness

(standard, bold, italic, bold italic) Dual angle, • Line color
Cobb angle, • Measurement angle
Size Input text size
Orthogonal line • Supplementary angle will
Text color Select text color compare be displayed
Background
color
Background Select text background color
color
Transparent By putting a check mark on the
color “Transparent color” check box, the
background hides

3. Set the text style for the measurement
annotation (C).
Items Contents
Font Select font type
Style Select the style of measurement

label (standard, bold, italic, bold
italic)
Size Input text size
Text color Select text color
Background Select text background color

color
Transparent Put a check mark to make the

color: background color transparent
4. Click [OK] (D).

→→The system returns to the “Image Viewer” window.
11

11.2.3 Setting the Attribute Information
Sets which attribute information on the image is to be displayed with each modality.
■ Operation Windows 2. Click the display location of the attribute

information (B).
● “Settings for image incidental →→The “Set display item” window opens.
information” Window
3. Select the attribute information from the list (E).
(A)
Select the [Category], [Group], [Element], [Tag

(B)
Name] and click to narrow down the
attribute information.
4. Choose from “Image incidental information

will be displayed” or “Image incidental
(C) information will not be displayed” in (D).
5. Set the display method (F) (G).

● “Set display item” Window Input/Selection Items
(D)
Items Contents
Prefix Input the prefix to be displayed

(E)
Suffix Input the suffix to be displayed
Display Input the display elements of

elements attribute information
(H) Display Input the display magnification of

magnification attribute information
(F) (G)
Valid number of Input the valid number of digits of
11 digits attribute value
■ Setting Image Attribute Comment Input the comment

Information
6. Click [OK] (H).
1. Select the modality (A). →→The system returns to the “Settings for image
incidental information” window.
Click the [Add/Delete] to add/delete the modality. 7. Click [OK] (C).


11.2.4 Setting Reading Protocol
Sets the initial arrangement of sub-window, the image arrangement in sub-window with each modality.
■ Operation Window 2. Select the following tabs (B) and set the sub-
window and image display for each modality.
● “Display setting for series view” Window ● “Basic setting” Window

(A)
(B)
(C)
■ Setting the Default Display

Selection Items
Items Contents
Layout of Each Modality
Series division Set the layout to display by
dividing a sub-window in each
1. Select the modality (A). series
• Maximum number of lines
(1 to 4 rows)
• Maximum number of columns
Click [Add / Delete] to add or delete the modality. (1 to 4 columns)
• Sort sequence (Horizontal
direction, Vertical direction)
Tile division Set number of images and layout

to display in one sub-window
(1 to 6 rows) 11
(1 to 6 columns)

Comparative Set whether to add how many sub-

→→The “Basic setting” tab and the “Image setting” tab Split windows when clicking [Compare]
appears. in the study summary
(1 to 6 rows)
(1 to 6 columns)
Use series Put a check mark to use series

integration integration
Use external Put a check mark to use external

link link
Report will be Put a check mark to display

automatically automatically
displayed
Report will be Put a check mark to display automatically.

automatically Specify whether to automatically create
created the report from - days ago

● “Image setting” Window
Selection Items
Items Contents
Cine setting Set the action during the

cine run.
Do not display Put a check mark to hide.

attribute information
during cine run
Enable image Put a check mark to enable.

read-ahead function Set the number of images to
be read-ahead (up to 100
images).
Image display setting Set a default image display

within a sub-window.
• Fit to window
• Priority to 1:1-Size Pixel
• 100%-Size Image
Navigation setting
Standard Set the unit of navigation in

navigation the standard operation.
Navigation while Set the unit of navigation in

11 pressing down the the operation while the Shift
Shift key: key is pressed.
Read-ahead is the function to read the image in advance

so that the cine run can be performed smoothly.
3. Click [OK] (C).


11.2.5 Display Settings of Toolbar
Customizes the buttons to be assigned to the toolbar in “Image Viewer” window.
■ Operation Window ■ Setting the Display of Toolbar

● “Set viewer tool bar” Window 1. Select the tab name from “Tab” (A).
(A)
(B)
Click [Edit] to add/delete tabs, or change tab name.
(C)
2. Select the group name from “Group” (B).
(D) Click [Edit] to add/delete groups, or change group

name.
(E)
3. Drag and drop the tool buttons to be used to

the “Tool button” column to add it.
Select the tool button from the “Tool button” column

and click [Delete] to delete it.
4. Select the display style of tool button (D).

Selection Items
Items Contents
Group name will Put a check mark to display the

be displayed group name in toolbar.
Display style of
11
: Icon + Text (Vertical)
tool button

: Only icon
: Icon + Text (Horizontal)
: Only text
Font Size Set the font size.
5. Click [OK] (E).


11.2.6 Display Settings of Report
Sets the initial display of schema, title and text size of the comment column in “Report:” window.
■ Operation Window ● “Tag setting for Report” Window

● “Report tag settings” Window - “Entire”
tab
(G)
(A)
(A)
(J)
(H) (I)
(B)
● “Format list” Window

(K)
● “Report tag settings” Window - “Report” (L)
tab
(C) (M)
(N)
(C) (O)
11
● “Report tag settings” Window - “Output
preset” tab
(D)
(D)
(E)
(F)

■ Setting the Display of Report 5. To add or edit the template tag (items to be
displayed in the format), click [Add] or [Edit]
(E).
The display settings of report is performed with the “■Adding/Editing Template Tag”
unit of system.
To delete the template tag, select the template from

1. To reverify the study at the time of saving a the list and click [Delete] (E).
report, put a check mark to “It will be
automatically re-verified when report is
saved.” check box (A).
6. Click [OK] (F).
2. Set the initial display of schema (B).
Selection Items
Items Contents
Display default Display the default schema when

schema creating new reports
Display Display the schema registered as

Favorites favorite schema when creating
new reports
No initial display Not display the schema when

creating new reports
3. Click “Report” tab, and set comment column

(C).
Items Contents
Displaying a Specify whether or not to

comment tab display the “Comment” tab.
Font Size Select from “Large”,

“Medium”, “Small”
11
The number of Specify the numbers of rows

comment lines of comment
Title of comment Input the title of Comment 1

1 to 3 to 3
Error free message in Input the text to be displayed

Comment box 1 to 3 in Comment 1 to 3
4. Click “Output preset” tab, and click [Edit

Template] (D) to add or delete the format file
list.
“■Editing Formats”

■ Creating a Format 3. Input the information which is inserted into
the report to the cell of the created layout.*1
To create a report template, the Excel2007 (the

environment which can create .xlsx file) is necessary.
1. Open the “Template.xlsx” file in “\FujiFilm\

Template” of My Documents.
Input Items
Items Contents
!Schema,0,a,b Schema image

a: Length of the cell
(Numbers of cells to
be combined)
b: Width of the cell
be combined)
!Image,c,d,e Thumbnail image

c: Index number of
thumbnail from 0*2
d: Length of the cell
be combined)
2. Perform the following settings to create a e: Width of the cell
report layout. (Numbers of cells to
• Frame line of the report be combined)
• Header !CommentTitle,f Title of the “Comment”
• Footer f: Index number of
• Title “Comment” 0 to 2*3
11 • Image pasting area !Comment,g Contents of the

• Comment area “Comment”
g: Index number of
“Comment” 0 to 2*3
To paste/input information to multiple lines of the !SeriesCount,h Image No. of the
image pasting area or the comment area, it is thumbnail image
necessary to combine the cells of the concerning (Image order in the
area. series)
h: Index number of
thumbnail from 0*2
!PatientID Patient ID
!PatientNameSBCS Patient name (single-

byte)
!PatientSex Patient sex
!StudyDate Study date
!BirthDate Birth date of the patient
!Age Patient age
!StudyTime Study time
!Modality Modality

Items Contents ■ Editing Formats
!PatientSize Height
1. Click “Output preset” tab, and click [Edit
!PatientWeight Weight Template] (D).
!PatientAddress Patient address →→The “Format list” window opens.
!PatientMother Mother’s name of the 2. Click [Add] (M).

BirthNameSBCS patient (single-byte)
!CountryOfResidence Country of Residence

• To delete the format, select the format in the list
!PatientTelephoneNumber Telephone numbers of
(K) and click [Delete] (N).
the patient
• The order of the format can be changed by clicking
!EthnicGroup Ethnic group [Move up]/[Move down] (L).
!SmokingStatus Smoking status
→→The “Open” window opens.
!LastMenstrualDate Late menstrual date
3. Select the format file and click [Open].
!PatientComments Patient comments
!PregnancyStatus Pregnancy status

4. Click [Close] (O).
→→The system returns to the “Report tag settings”
!FacilityNameSBCS Facility name (single-byte)
window.
!ReportAuthorSBCS Author of the report
(single-byte)
If the specified index number does not exist, the

thumbnail image cannot be inserted into the report.
(When there are only 2 thumbnail images registered
in “Thumbnail”, the images cannot be inserted into
the Report even specifying the index number as “2”.)
*1 The input information is displayed on the report

according to the settings of each cell (font size,
font, displaying position, etc).
*2 Specify which image in the “Thumbnail” is 11
inserted.

Since the index number starts from 0, input 0 to
specify the 1st thumbnail image.
*3 Index number 0: “Comment 1”
Index number 1: “Comment 2”
Index number 2: “Comment 3”
4. Save the report template file.
• The “Template.xlsx” is a read-only file. It is

indicated to save as another name when trying to
save the file. Input any name and save the file into
any destination.
• Do not cancel the read-only setting of the
“Template.xlsx” file.

■ Adding/Editing Output Template
Tags
The settings of template tag is performed with the

unit of system.
1. Click “Output preset” tab, and click [Add] or

[Edit] (E).
→→The “Tag setting for Report” window opens.
2. Select the attribute information from the list (E).
Tags can be narrowed down by selecting “Category”,

“Group”, “Element”, and “Tag Name” and clicking
.
3. Set the display method (H) ( I ).

Items Contents
Prefix Input a Prefix for displaying
Surfix Input a Surfix for displaying
Display elements Input the display elements of tag
Display Input the display magnification

magnification of tag
Valid number of Input a valid number of digits of

digits the value of tag
11 Comment Input a comment
4. Click [OK] (J).

→→The system returns to the “Report tag settings”
window.

11.2.7 Quick Mouse Setting
Sets the functions to be switched by the quick mouse operation (right-click while holding down the left
button on the mouse) and their order.
The contents set by the following procedures are also reflected in quick mouse operation with the touch panel
monitor.
■ Operation Window ■ Setting Functions Used via

Quick Mouse Operation
● “Quick mouse setting” Window
1. Select a function to be used via the quick
mouse operation from the list (A) on the right
side of the window.
(A)
2. Click [Add] (B).
→→The selected function is added to the list on the left
(B) side of the window.
(C)
• To delete a function, select the function you wish
to delete and click [Delete].
• The tool will be switched in the order of the list
(from top to bottom) on the left side of the window
every time the quick mouse operation is
performed. To change the switching order, move
the tool you wish to change the order by dragging
and dropping.
3. Click [OK] (C). 11


11.2.8 Display Settings of Simplified Print
Sets the template files and display of attribute information.
Display settings of the simplified print will be applied to the entire system.
■ Operation Windows ● “Select template” Window - “User”

Window
● “Simplified Print” Window (H)
(I)
(A)
(B)
(C)
■ Switching Template File to be
Used
1. Click [Change] (A) of a template you wish to

(D)
change.
→→The “Select template” window opens.
(E)
2. Select the template you wish to use from the
list of “Template file name” (F) and click
11 [Select] (G).
● “Select template” Window - “System”
Window
Template files can be added or deleted.

“■ Adding/Deleting Template Files”
→→The system returns to the “Simplified” window.

(F)
(G)

■ Adding/Deleting Template Files ■ Setting the Attribute Information
Adds new template files, or deletes Sets the attribute information to be displayed
unnecessary templates. on images printed in simplified print.
1. Click [Change] (A) of a template you wish to

change. This attribute information setting is common for
simplified print and report print. The setting of the
→→The “Select” window opens.
attribute information will also be applied to the report
print.
2. Select the “User” tab (H).
3. Click [Add] ( I ). 1. Click [Attribute information setting] (B).
To delete template files, select the file from the list To hide the attribute information on images, uncheck
and then click [Delete]. “Output an attribute information onto an image”.
→→The “Open” window opens. →→The window for attribute information setting opens.
4. Select the template file and click [Open]. 2. Select a modality (C).
→→The system returns to the “Simplified Print”
window, and the template file will be added to the 3. Set the attribute setting (D).
list. Attribute information setting method:
“11.2.3 Setting the Attribute Information”
For the format creating method, refer to the creating 4. Click [OK] (E).
method of a report format.
→→The system returns to the “Simplified Print”
Format creating method: “11.2.6 ■Creating a window.
Format”
11

11.2.9 Setting Window Processing Presets
Set the parameters for the window processing presets for each modality.
■ Operation Windows ■ Setting the Window Processing

Presets
● “Window processing presets” Window
1. Select a modality (A).
→→The list of registered presets is displayed.
(A)
2. Click [Add] (B) to add a preset. To change a

(B) preset, select a preset to be changed, and
click [Change] (B).
(C) • To delete a preset, select a preset to be

deleted from the list, and click [Delete] (B).
● “Register preset” Window • The selected preset can be moved up/down

by clicking [Up] / [Down] (B).
→→The “Register preset” window opens.
3. Set the presets (D).

(D)
Selection Items
Items Contents
Preset name Input a preset name
(E)
Shortcut keys Select a shortcut key
Window Center/ Enter a value
Window Width
11 4. Click [OK] (E).

→→The system returns to the “Window processing
presets” window.
5. Click [OK] (C).

11.2.10 Display Setting of “Indicator”
Set the display conditions of items to be displayed on the indicator.
■ Operation Window
● “Indicator setting” Window
(A)
(B)
■ Setting the Display Conditions

1. Select a display condition for each icon (A).
Selection Items
Items Contents
Server date and Select “Display at all times”, “Hide

time at all times”
Status of Select from “Display at all times”,

printing and “Notification displayed”, “Hide at
outputing all times”
CR image Select from “Display at all times”,

reader “Notification displayed”, “Hide at
all times”
11
Events (error/ Select from “Display at all times”,

warning/ “Notification displayed”, “Hide at
information) all times”
USB flash drive Select from “Display at all times”,

backup “Notification displayed”, “Hide at
all times”
NAS/USB-HDD Select from “Display at all times”,

“Notification displayed”, “Hide at
all times”
Film printer Select from “Display at all times”,

“Notification displayed”, “Hide at
all times”
2. Click [OK] (B).

11.2.11 Display Setting of “Image Viewer” Window
Sets the font size or display size of the sub-window, study summary, image cart, and sets the actions
during study storage.
■ Operation Windows ■ Setting Actions during Image

Display or Storage
● “Style setting” Window - “Display
settings” Window
● Setting Color or Size of the “Image
Viewer” Window
1. Select the tab shown below, and change style

(A) settings(A).
“Image display” tab

Items Contents
Standard*1 font size of Select font size from 5 to
attribute information 96pt
(B)
Minimum*1 font size of
● “Style setting” Window - “Save settings” attribute information
Width of thumbnail Input the width and height

Window
image (Pixel) of thumbnail image in pixel
Height of thumbnail
image (Pixel)
(C)
Parameters for the Select from “GA/GS”,
image gradation Fuji “S Value/L Value”.
DX
Color of attribute 1. Click .
information 2. Select the color.
(D) Color of reference line
11 Color of ruler
Color of patient
positioning
Color of image
selection frame
Color of the warning
message
*1 The text size of the attribute information switches

to standard/minimum/hidden according to the
display layout size of images.
“Study summary” tab

Items Contents
Font size Select from “Large”,
“Medium”, “Small”
Opening method of a • Replace

study • Add
• Compare

Items Contents ● Setting Actions During Study Storage
Width of thumbnail Input the width and height
image (Pixel) of thumbnail image in pixel 1. Set the actions during storage (C).
Height of thumbnail Selection Items
image (Pixel)
Items Contents
Open the tree structure To display a tree structure,
in the default display place a checkmark Confirmation Put a check mark to display the
dialog whether confirmation dialog.
or not changes
“Image cart” tab

are saved will
be displayed.
Items Contents FCR image Select whether or not to save the
Font size Select from “Large”, processing FCR image processing parameter
“Medium”, “Small” parameter during study storage.
Width of thumbnail Input the width and height of

image (Pixel) thumbnail image in pixel 2. Click [OK] (D).
Height of thumbnail →→The system returns to the “Image Viewer” window.
image (Pixel)
“Trimming” tab
Items Contents
Color of 1. Click .
the trimming frame 2. Select the color.
Color of
the trimming frame
(When selected)
The fill color
for outside of
the trimming frame
Transmittance for Enter percentage
outside of
the trimming frame
11
The margin for outside of
the trimming frame
when the image is
displayed with

“Fit to window”
2. Click [OK] (B).

11.2.12 Returning to Standard Settings
Returns the changed settings of “Image Viewer” window to the condition when installing.
■ Operation Window ■ Returning to Standard Settings

● Setting Windows (Example: “Annotation 1. Click [Other] (A).
setting” Window)
2. Click [Return to the standard settings].
→→The settings return to the standard settings.
3. Click [OK] (B).
(A) (B)
11

11.2.13 Importing/Exporting Settings
Imports/Exports the settings of “Image Viewer” window.
■ Operation Window ■ Import Settings

● Setting Windows (Example: “Annotation 1. Click [Other] (A).
setting” Window)
2. Select [Import of setting information].
→→The “Open” dialog appears.
3. Select the xml file of the config information,

and click [Open].
→→The settings are updated according to the
imported file.
(A) ■ Export Settings

1. Click [Other] (A).
2. Select [Export of setting information].
→→The “Save As” dialog appears.
3. Select the folder of export destination, input a

file name and click [Save].
→→The settings are exported.
11

897N101440K
FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide
11-38
11
Chapter 12
Configuring “Client Utilities”
12.1 Setting Items of “Client Utilities”...................................... 12-2
12.2 Starting up and Exiting “Client Utilities”.................................12-2
12.3 Maintaining Patient Information.......................................12-4
12.4 Verifying the IP Use Frequency........................................ 12-7
12.5 Setting User Information (For Administrator)................. 12-8

12.5.1 User Information Maintenance.................................... 12-8
12.5.2 Changing User Group Operational Authorities....... 12-12
12.5.3 Setting Images for Display
in the “User Selection” Window................................... 12-14
12.6 Editing Information about the Logged-in User.............. 12-16
12.7 Verifying History Information..........................................12-17

12
12.8 Disk Maintenance ............................................................ 12-20 Configuring "Client Utilities"

12.1 Setting Items of “Client Utilities”
The following operations can be performed in “Client Utilities”:
• Registering, editing and deleting patient information
• Verifying the IP use frequency
• Setting user information
• Verifying history information
• Maintenance of disks
12.2 Starting up and Exiting “Client Utilities”

Starts the “Client Utilities” from the “Main” window. This section describes how to use each function and
how to exit the “Client Utilities”.
■ Operation Windows ● “Main Menu”

Starts the functions of “Client Utilities” from the
● “Main” Window desired button.

Starts up the “Client Utilities“.
(B)
(C)
12
Configuring "Client Utilities"
(A)

■ Starting up the “Client Utilities” ■ Exiting the “Client Utilities”
1. Click (A) in the “Main” window. 1. Click [Close] (C) in the “Main Menu” window.
→→The “Main Menu” window closes and exit the
2. Click [Client Utilities]. “Client Utilities”.
→→The “Main Menu” window opens.
3. Click the desired buttons (B) according to the

functions to be used.
Buttons Functions
Patient Info Register, edit or delete patient

Maintenance information.
“12.3 Maintaining Patient
Information”
IP Use Frequency Verify the IP use frequency for

image reading. Verify IP use
frequency as a guideline for IP
replacement.
“12.4 Verifying the IP Use
Frequency”
User Settings Set various information and the

(for Administrator) authority about users of FCR
PRIMA Console.
“12.5 Setting User
Information (For
Administrator)”
User Settings Edit the information (display

(for General name, image... etc) about the
Users) currently logged-in user.
“12.6 Editing Information
about the Logged-in User”
History Info Verify the histories of login to

FCR PRIMA Console, access 12
to studies... etc.
“12.7 Verifying History
Information”
Disk Maintenance Maintain the disks set in the PC

drive and restore the database.
“12.8 Disk Maintenance”
Guidance is displayed in the “Client Utilities” window

to lead the user through operating procedures.

12.3 Maintaining Patient Information
Registers new patient information in FCR PRIMA Console database. Also, edits or deletes registered
patient information.
■ Operation Windows ● “Main Menu Modification” Window

● “Main” Window - “Input ID” Window
(E)
(A)
● “Edit Patient Information” Window

(B)
(F)
(D)
(H)
(G)
● “Patient Information List” Window

Searches the patient to be maintained and the
12 (C)
result will be shown in the list.
(I)
(J) (K)
(L)
(M) (N)

■ Registering New Patient ■ Modifying the Patient
Information Information from the Study List
Inputs patient ID, names... etc, and the patient The patient information and the patient
information will be registered in database. information database information pertaining to
Registration Procedure: “3.2 Registering the studies can be modified from the right-click
Patient Information to be Exposed” menu on the study list.
■ Modifying the Patient Even if patient information is modified, it does not

Information from the ID Input affect the patient information in other studies which
have been performed up until now.
Field
In revising the patient information which is
input in the patient information input field, the
1. Select the study from the study list (C).
patient information database information can
be revised. 2. Click [Edit/Re-Study] (D) on the “Study
operations” tab.
Even if patient information database information is
modified, the patient information of studies which 3. Click [Edit Patient Information] (E).
were performed in the past cannot be modified.
→→The “Modifying patient information” window opens.
To modify the patient information of studies which
were performed in the past, refer to “■ Modifying
Patient Information From the Study List” described
4. Edit the patient information (F).
below, or refer to the following and modify.
5. Check that the “Update patient master”
checkbox is included (G). Click [Finish] (H).
1. Modify the patient information which is

displayed in the patient information input If the confirmed study is changed, the study status
field (A). will return from “Verified” to “Confirmed”. After
completing the study, verify the study again.
2. Click (B).
→→Ths system returns to the “Main” window.
6. Check that the patient information has been

modified. 12

■ Searching Patient Information 3. Click [Search] (K).
→→Data matching the specified set of search
conditions is displayed in the list (L).
1. Enter the patient information (I) to be edited.
The data is displayed in ascending order of ID.
Items Contents
To change the display order, click the header of the
ID The patient information that completely field to be used as a reference. Each time you click
matches the ID as entered is located the header, the display order toggles between
Name The patient information whose prefix ascending and descending.
matches the Name as entered is located
Sex The patient information that matches the
■ Deleting Patient Information

Clicked Sex is located
DOB The patient information that completely

matches the DOB as entered is located
Height The patient information that completely

matches the Height as entered is located Deleting patient information would have no effect on
the patient information in the studies already
Weight The patient information that completely conducted.
matches the Weight as entered is located
Patient The patient information that completely

comment matches the Patient comment as entered
1. Search the patient to be deleted.
is located Search Procedure: “■ Searching Patient
Information”
If you set multiple search conditions, patient

2. Click the patient information to be edited
information that matches the entire set of search from the list (L) and click [Delete] (N).
conditions specified is listed. →→A message displays to verify.
3. Click [OK].
2. Click [Last Update] (J). →→The Clicked patient information is deleted from the
FCR PRIMA Console database.
• The date of last update is the date on which

patient information was the most recent because
12
of new registration, update and the like.
• To specify a retrospective range of dates, click the
■ Finishing Maintenance of
upper radio button and then click a date range
Patient Information
from the pulldown menu.

1. To exit the patient information setup, click
[Close] (M) in the “Patient Information List“.
• To specify a date, click the lower radio button and

click it from the pulldown menu.

12.4 Verifying the IP Use Frequency
■ Operation Window ■ Verifying the IP Use Frequency
● “IP Use Frequency” 1. Verify the display items (A) in the list.
Display Items
(A)
Items Contents
Size IP Size
Barcode A number that identifies an IP

Number uniquely
IP Use Frequency of IP usage

Frequency
(B)
The data is displayed in ascending order of [IP

Use Frequency]. To change the display order,
click the header of the field to be used as a
reference. Each time you click the header, the
display order toggles between ascending and
descending.
■ Finishing Verification of IP Use

Frequency
1. Click [Close] (B) after the verification

completes.
→→The “Main Menu” window opens.
12

12.5 Setting User Information
(For Administrator)
Registers, edits or deletes information about the users of FCR PRIMA Console.
Also, assigns operational authorities to user groups and set images to be displayed in the “User
Selection” window.
These functions are accessible only to users having an administrator authority.
12.5.1 User Information Maintenance

Registers, edits or deletes information about the users of FCR PRIMA Console.
• Only the Administrator’s information is registered to the FCR PRIMA Console by default.
• Register users to suit your environmental needs.
User name – for image display
Comment
Image
12

■ Operation Windows ■ Registering New User
Information
● “User Settings (for Administrator)” Registers, edits or deletes information about
(A) the users of FCR PRIMA Console.
Once a new user of FCR PRIMA Console is
registered, clicks the user from the “User
Selection” window and log in as such user.
(B)
1. Click [User Info Maintenance] (A).
● “Registered User List”
→→The “Registered User List“ opens.
2. Click [New] (E).

(C) →→The “User Registration” window opens.
(D)
3. Register a new user ( I ) of FCR PRIMA
(E)
Console.
(F)
Items Contents
(G) (H) Account An account name is a piece of
Name*1 information that identifies each
● “User Registration” individual user.

Enter an account name within 20
characters including numerals (0-9),
alphabetic characters (A to Z and a
(I) to z), and the following symbols:
!, `, (, ), -, ., @, ^, _, {, }, ~
User Name
For Image The user name appears in the

Display*1 *2 window.
(K)
Enter a user name within 20
(J) characters
For Data This information is needed to save

● “Edit User Information” Storage*1 *3*4 images to a disk in the DICOM
format.
(L)
Enter a user name within 64
characters
12
Authority An authority is an operational
privilege on FCR PRIMA Console
assigned to each individual user
group
(N) Change authority assigned to

user group: “12.5.2 Changing
(M)
User Group Operational
● “Image Select”
Authorities”
Comment Enter a comment within 50

characters
(O)
Image The image thus set is displayed in
the “User Registration” window.
Set with the following procedure:
1) Click [Image Select] (N)
2) Select an image (Q)
3) Click [Setup] (S)
(Q) New Enter a password within 20

Password*5 characters
(P)
Items Contents ■ Editing User Information
Confirm*5 Verify the password entered above
Automatically An auto-login user is a user who

login user.*6 logs in to FCR PRIMA Console • Changes to patient information would have no
automatically when it starts up effect on the patient information in the studies
Automatically An auto-verify user is a user who is already conducted.
verify user registered with FCR PRIMA Console • Information about Administrator registered by
and the user having the study default can be edited but cannot be deleted.
automatically verified after
exposure.
Auto-verify users can be configured
using the “User Utilities”
→→The “Registered User List” window opens.
Auto-Verify: ”13.6 Auto-
Determine Settings”
2. Select the user information to be edited from
*1 The same account name or user name as the one the list (H) and click [Edit] (E).
that already exists cannot be registered. →→The “Edit Patient Information” window opens.
*2 The following characters cannot be used: The window comes up with the information
\, /, |, :, <, >, ?, +, =, *
registered in the database.
User names consisting solely of spaces are not
allowed.
*3 The space can be used, but a user name which
3. Edit the User Information (L).
consists of solely space is not allowed. Input and Selection Items
*4 Leave a space between the first name and family
Items Contents
name.
*5 The password is indicated as **** in the window. Change Put a check to change the
password password
*6 A user set as an Auto-Login user logs in to FCR
PRIMA Console automatically without being New Enter a new password within 20
required to make a user selection or enter a password*1 characters
password.
Confirm*1 Verify the password entered above
*1 The password is indicated as **** in the window.

Account names are the information recorded in the
log. Do not register account names that pertain to Settings other than password: “■Registering New
personal information. User Information”
4. Click [Save] (N).

12 The entry of Comment and Password is optional.
5. Click [OK].
When the entry of Password is omitted, this user can
log in without being required to enter the password. →→The edited version of user information is saved
and the “Edit User Information” window closes.
4. Click [Register] (K).

→→The new user is registered and the “User
Registration” window closes.

■ Changing Display Order of Users ■ Exiting User Information
Maintenance
→→The “Registered User List” window opens. 1. To exit the “Registered User List” window,
click [Close] (G).
2. Select the user whose display order is to be →→The “User Settings (for Administrator)” window
moved from the list (H). opens.
3. Click [UP] or [DOWN] (C) to move the user up 2. Click [Close] (B).
or down.
4. Click [Save Order] (D).

5. Click [OK].
→→This display order is saved.
■ Deleting User Information

A user who is deleted cannot log in to FCR
PRIMA Console.
The deletion of user information would have no

effect on the user information in the studies already
conducted.

→→The “Registered User List” window opens.
2. Select the user information to be edited from

the list (J) and click [Delete] (F).
12
Auto-verify users cannot be deleted.
3. Click [OK].
→→This user information is deleted.

12.5.2 Changing User Group Operational Authorities
■ Descriptions of Functions ■ Operation Windows

If multiple users use FCR PRIMA Console,
settings or information could be inadvertently ● “User Settings (for Administrators)”
altered by non-administrator users. To prevent
this risk, limitations may be imposed on users’
operations.
Assigns operational authorities to users (A)
according to their user groups or
responsibilities.
(B)
The five user groups (Group 1 to 4, and
Administrator) are shown below.
Sample Use of Operation Authorities ● “User Group Info Maintenance”
User Groups Contents
Group 1 Assign the physician’s (C)
operational authority
Group 2 Assign the nurse’s operational
authority
(D)
Group 3 Assign the technologist’s
operational authority
Group 4 Assign the clerk’s operational
authority
(E)
Administrator Assign all operational authorities
to system administrators. The (F)
operational authorities cannot be
modified
By default, Groups 1 to 4 are not granted the

operational authorities. Modify the operational
authorities to suit your environmental needs.
• User information maintenance
• User group information maintenance
• “User Utilities”
• Restore operation
12 • Disk copy operation
If an user attempts to perform an operation for
which the user has no privilege, a message is
displayed and the operation is rejected.

User Group Operational Authorities: “12.5.1
User Information Maintenance”

■ Changing User Group ■ Exiting the Change of User
Operational Authorities Group Operational Authorities
1. Click [User Info Maintenance] (A). 1. Click [Close] (B) in the “User Settings (for
→→The “Registered User List” window opens. Administrator)” window.
→→The “Change of User Group Operational
2. Select the user group to be assigned from the Authorities” window exits.
“User Group” pull down list (C).
→→The operational authorities of the selected user
group is displayed.
3. Assign/Cancel the authorities shown in the

list (D).
• Put a check mark : Assign the authority
• Remove a check mark : Cancel the authority
4. Repeat the Step 2. and 3. to complete the

assignment of operational authorities to the
selected user group.
5. Click [Save] (E).

→→The operational authorities assigned to the
selected user group are saved and the “User
Group Info Maintenance” window closes.
12

12.5.3 Setting Images for Display in the “User Selection” Window
Adds or deletes images displayed in the “User Selection“ window.
• The image displayed in the “User Selection” window is shown below.
Image
The added image is set by each user that which image is to be displayed in user information
maintenance.
“12.5.1 User Information Maintenance”
■ Operation Windows ■ Adding Images for Display in

the “User Selection” Window
● “User Settings (for Administrators)”
1. Click [Addition/Deletion of User Images] (A).
→→The “Image Setup” window opens.
2. Click [Add] (F).

(A) →→The “Image Add” window opens.
(B)
3. Click [View] (G).
● “Image Setup”
→→The “Select images to be added” window opens.
4. Select the image to be added and click [Open].

(C)
A JPEG file up to 25 KB (kilobytes) in size can be

added as an image.
12 →→The location and name of the selected image file

are displayed in the “Look in and File Name” in the
“Select images to be added” window.
5. Click [Add] ( I ).
(D) (E) (F)
→→The “Image Add” window closes and the “Image
● “Image Add”
Setup” window opens.
The newly added image is not displayed at this

(G)
moment.
(H) (I)

6. Click [Close] (D). ■ Exiting the Setup of Display
→→The “User Settings (for Administrator)” window
Image
opens.
7. Click [Addition/Deletion of User Images] (A). 1. Click [Close] (B) in the “User Settings (for
Administrator)” window.
→→The “Change of User Group Operational
8. Verify the image is added and click [Close] (D). Authorities” window exits.
→→The “User Settings (for Administrator)” window

opens.
■ Deleting an Displayed Image

from the “User Selection”
Window
1. Click [Addition/Deletion of User Images] (A).

2. Select images to be deleted from the list (C).
The image that is assigned to a user cannot be

deleted.
3. Click [Delete] (E).

4. Click [OK].
→→The selected images are deleted.
5. Click [Close] (D).

→→The “User Settings (for Administrator)” window 12
opens.

12.6 Editing Information about the
Logged-in User
The user who is currently logged-in to FCR PRIMA Console can edit his/her own password and other
information by him/ herself.
• The information to be registered and edited is shown as below in the “User Selection“ window.
Comment
Image
■ Operation Windows ■ Editing Information on the

Logged-in User
● “User Setting (for General Users)”
Among the user information, the following
information can be edited:
(A)
• Comment
• Image
• Password
1. Edit the information about the logged-in user (A).

(B) (C)
Items Contents
● “Image Select” Comment Enter a comment within 50

characters.
Image The selected image is displayed
(D)
in the “Modify currently logged in
user information” window.
12 Follow these steps:

1) Click [Image Select]
2) Select an image in (D)
3) Click [Save] (F)
Change Put a check mark to change the

password. password.
(F)
Old password*1 Enter the old password.
(E)
New Enter a new password within 20
password*1 characters.
Confirm*1 Verify the password entered above.
*1 The password is indicated as **** in the window.
The entry of Comment and Password is optional.

When the entry of Password is omitted, this user can
log in without being required to enter the password.
2. Click [Save] (C).

→→The user information is saved, and the “User
Setting (for General Users)” window closes.

12.7 Verifying History Information
The following four kinds of history information can be verified:
• History of login and logoff to and from FCR PRIMA Console
• History of access to studies for purposes such as browsing and modification
• History of image storage/print
• History of backup and restoration carried out by using the “Backup Utilities”
■ Operation Windows ● “Image Transfer History”

● “History Info” (L)
(M)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(N)
(E)
● “Login History” ● “Backup History”

(O)
(F)
(P)
(G)
(Q)
(H)
● “Study Access History” To specify the date of history information ((F), ( I ),

(L), (O)), the following methods can be used:
12
• To specify a retrospective range of dates, click the
(I) Configuring "Client Utilities"
upper radio button and then select a date range
(J) from the pull-down menu.
(K) • To specify a date, click the lower radio button and

select it from the pull-down menu.

■ Verifying the Login/Logoff ■ Verifying the Study Access
History History
1. Click [Login History] (A). 1. Click [Study Access History] (B).

→→The “Login History” window opens. →→The “Study Access History” window opens.
2. Select a login/logoff date in “Date of 2. Enter or select a condition of the history to be

Operation” (F). verified ( I ).
3. Click [Search] (G).
Items Contents
conditions is displayed. ID*1 The accessed patient ID*2
The data is displayed in descending order in “Date Date of Access*1 The accessed date
of Operation”.
To change the display order, select the header of the *1 If both “ID” and “Date of Access” are specified,
field to be used as a reference. Each time you select studies that match both are listed.
the header, the display order toggles between *2 The studies that completely match the ID as
ascending and descending . entered are located.
4. Click [Close] (H) to exit the login history 3. Click [Search] (J).
verification. →→Data matching the specified set of search
conditions is displayed.
The data is displayed in descending order in “Date
of Operation”.
To change the display order, select the header of the

field to be used as a reference.
Each time you select the header, the display order
toggles between ascending and descending.
4. Click [Close] (K) to exit the study access

12 history verification.

■ Verifying the Image Storage/ ■ Verifying the Backup/
Print History Restoration History
1. Click [Image Transfer History] (C). 1. Click [Backup History] (D).

→→The “Image Transfer History” window opens. →→The “Backup History” window opens.
2. Enter or select a condition of the history to be 2. Select a backup or restoration date in “Date
verified (L). of Operation” (O).
3. Click [Search] (P).
Items Contents
ID*1 The patient ID of a saved or conditions is displayed. The data is displayed in
printed study descending order in “Date of Operation”.
Date of Image The date of a saved or printed
Transfer*1 study
field to be used as a reference.
Each time you select the header, the display order
*1 If both “ID” and “Date of Image Transfer” are toggles between ascending and descending.
specified, studies that match both are listed.
4. Click [Close] (Q) to exit the backup/

3. Click [Search] (M). restoration history verification.
conditions is displayed. The data is displayed in
descending order in “Date of Operation”.
■ Exiting Verification of History
field to be used as a reference. Each time you select
1. Click [Close] (E) in the “History Info“ window.
the header, the display order toggles between →→Exit verification of history.
ascending and descending.
4. Click [Close] (N) to exit the image storage/

12
print history verification.

12.8 Disk Maintenance
The following operations can be performed on the disk inserted in the PC’s control drive:
• Replacing disks
• Configuring a storage disk as a write-enabled or read-only disk
• Restoring a storage disk or work disk (when a disk restoration prompt message displays)
• Restoring the database with information from a storage disk or work disk
■ Operation Windows ● “Disk Restoration”

● “Disk Operation”
(A)
(B)
(C) (L)
(D)
(E)
(F)
(G) (M)
(H)
(N)
● “Replacing Disks”
|
● “Database Restoration”
(O)
(P)
12
● “Disk Setting”
(Q)
(I)
(S)
(K) (R)
(J)
(T)

■ Updating Display of Disk ■ Replacing Disks
Information
Refreshes the display of the device status, 1. Select a drive whose disk is to be replaced in
usage and the setting for writing data. “Device” (A).
1. Select a drive in “Device” (A). 2. Click [Replacing Disks] (D).

→→The “Replacing Disks” dialog appears.
2. Click [Update] (B).
→→The disk information of a selected drive is 3. Place a disk in the disk drive tray and close
updated. the tray.
→→Operate according to the instructions in the
3. Verify disk information. “Replacing Disks” dialog.
“■Setting Up Disks”- 5.
Display Items
Items Contents
Status The name of a disk and the

amount of free space (%)
Usage Indicates whether the disk is

intended as a storage disk or work
disk*1
Disk Write Indicates whether a storage disk

inserted is “write enabled” or
“read-only”
*1 Nothing appears for any other type of disk.

Disk Types “2.7 Before using disks”
12

■ Setting Disks as “Write ■ Restoring Disks after Mismatch
Enabled” or “Write Disabled” Occurred
Restores a storage or work disk after
mismatches occurring in the image
Only the “storage disks“ can be set. management file on the disk following power
failure while writing to the disk or other adverse
conditions.
1. Select a drive to be set in “Device“ (A). Once the disk has been restored (rebuilt), it
can be used again as before.
2. Click “Disk Setting” (E).
→→The “Disk Setting“ dialog appears. 1. If a restoration promt message displays when
selecting “Device” (A), click “Disk
3. Select from “Write enabled“ and “Write Restoration” (F).
disabled” ( I ).
4. Click [OK] (K). 2. Click [OK].

→→The storage disk is reconfigured as a write-
→→The “Disk Restoration” dialog appears and the
enabled or read-only disk.
restoration starts automatically.
→→The “Select usage of a disk” dialog appears in a
while.
The “Specify how to handle the disk” dialog may

not appear depending on the disk status.
If it does not appear, skip Steps 3. and 4.
3. Select the usage of the disk to be restored

(rebuilt) (M).
4. Click [Next] (N).

→→If choose it to be a storage disk, the “Select an
image storage disk from the list” dialog appears.
Go to Step 5.
12 →→If choose it to be a work disk, the restoration is
done.
5. Select a storage disk to be restored (rebuilt)

from a pulldown menu (O).
6. Click [OK] (P).

→→The “Disk Restoration“ dialog appears again.
After a while, the restoration finishes and the “Disk
Restoration“ dialog closes.
The restoration is done.

■ Restoring Information in Disks ■ Exiting Disk Maintenance
to Database
If the equipment should fail or require 1. Click [Close] (H) in the “Disk Operation”
replacement, the FCR PRIMA Console dialog.
database can be restored by importing study →→The disk maintenance exits.
information from the storage disk or work disk
to the FCR PRIMA Console system.
1. Select a drive at which database is to be

replaced in “Device“ (A).
2. Click [Database Restoration] (G).

→→The “Database Restoration“ dialog appears.
3. Select the action to take when there are the

same studies on the FCR PRIMA Console
system as the ones in the disk (Q).
Selection Items
Items Contents
Studies are Delete existing studies on the FCR

updated PRIMA Console system, and register
studies imported from the disk
Skip study Skip the import of studies from the

registration disk, to preserve the existing studies
process on FCR PRIMA Console system
4. Click [Start] (S).

→→The restoration of database starts and the study
information from the disk is imported to the FCR
PRIMA Console database.
Study information that has already been imported

to the FCR PRIMA Console database cannot be
12
reverted when clicking [Cancel] (T) during
restoration. Configuring "Client Utilities"
→→When the import of study information completes in

a while, the “Database Restoration” dialog closes.
To verify images from a study that has been

imported to the FCR PRIMA Console system,
insert the disk used in the restoration process into
the disk drive. Once the database restoration
process completes, the disk use is configured as
a read-only disk and should be managed in
read-only status.
If the database is restored using a work disk, that
disk is configured as a storage disk.

12

Chapter 13
Setting “User Utilities”
13.1 Setting “User Utilities”...................................................... 13-2
13.2 Starting up and Exiting the “User Utilities”..................... 13-3
13.3 Setting the Exposure Menu and Study Menu.................. 13-5

13.3.1 Setting the Exposure Menu......................................... 13-6
13.3.2 Setting Study Menu.................................................... 13-13
13.3.3 Setting the Display Menu Group............................... 13-17
13.4 Setting the Character String Annotated on a Film........ 13-20
13.5 Setting of Printing, Saving and Transmitting Images.......13-22
13.6 Auto-Determine Settings................................................. 13-26
13.7 Image Deletion Settings.................................................. 13-27
13.8 Backup Notification Settings..........................................13-28
13.9 Automatically Startup Settings.......................................13-29 13

13.10 Prefix Display Settings....................................................... 13-30
Setting "User Utilities"
13.11 Setting Image Incidental Information Display Contents... 13-31
13.12 Loading Patient Information...........................................13-32
13.13 Media Consistency Check............................................... 13-36
13.14 History Information Consistency Check................................13-39
13.15 Automatically Logoff....................................................... 13-40
13.16 Adding/Deleting User Marker..........................................13-41
13.17 Preset Setting...................................................................13-42

13.1 Setting “User Utilities”
The “User Utilities” are to prepare the environment required for operating the FCR PRIMA Console,
such as adding or editing exposure menus and study menus.
The following operations can be performed in the “User Utilities”.
• Menu Settings
• Character String Info Annotated on Film
• Output Destination Settings
• Auto-Determine Settings
• Image Deletion Settings
• Backup Notification Settings
• Client Application Startup Settings
• Prefix Display Settings
• Image-incidental info Display Settings
• Patient Database Import
• Media Consistency Check
• History-Info Consistency Check
• Auto-Logoff Settings
• Marker Setting
• Preset Setting
13

13.2 Starting up and Exiting the “User
Utilities”
The FCR PRIMA Console shuts down if attempts to start up the “User Utilities”. Before starting the
“User Utilities”, verifies that all the windows started up from the FCR PRIMA Console are closed.
■ Operation Windows ■ Starting up the “User Utilities”

● “Select Server Application Behavior” Dialog 1. Double-click the server application icon in the
task tray.
opens.
2. Select [User Utility] and click [OK] (A).

(A) →→A message displays, and the “User authentication”
window opens.
● “User authentication” 3. Select the log in “User Name” (B). Enter

“Password” (B), and click [OK] (C).
→→After the user is verified, the “Main menu” opens.
(B)
4. Click the desired button (D).
(C) Selection Items
Items Contents
Menu Setting Set the “Exposure Menu” and
● “Main Menu” “Study Menu”.
“13.3 Setting up the Exposure
Menu and Study Menu”
(D)
Character String Set the character string
Info Annotated on annotated on a film.
Film
“13.4 Setting the Character
String Annotated on a Film”
Output Set each output destination.
Destination • Saving images to disk
Settings • Printing images on a film
(optional)
13
• Transmitting images to
(E)
DICOM server (optional)

“13.5 Setting of Printing,
Saving and Transmitting
Images”
Auto-Determine Set up automatic verification of
settings the completed study.
“13.6 Auto-Determine Settings”
Image Deletion Change the time to automatically
Settings delete images read from a disk.
“13.7 Image Deletion
Settings”

Items Contents
Backup Set up to display a message *1 If the contents are changed in the “Setting to
Notification prompting you to make the Display Image-incidental info” window, the
Settings backup. changes will not be reflected to the image of
“13.8 Backup Notification “Image Viewer” window.
Settings” Display of image incidental information can be set
in the “Image Viewer” window.
Client Set up the client application to
Application start automatically, after starting
Startup Settings the server application.
“13.9 Automatically Startup ■ Exiting the “User Utilities”
Settings”
Prefix Display
Setting
Set up to add a prefix to the
patient names displayed on the
1. Click [Close] (E) in the “Main Menu”.
FCR PRIMA Console. →→The “Main Menu” window closes and exit the “User
“13.10 Prefix Display Utilities”.
Settings” After that, the FCR PRIMA Console starts
automatically.
Image-incidental Set up the display of additional
info Display image information.
Settings*1
“13.11 Setting Additional
Image Information Display
Content”
Patient Import the patient information to
Database Import the FCR PRIMA Console
database.
“13.12 Loading Patient
Information”
Media Check whether or not the
Consistency information saved in the storage
check disk is improved.
“13.13 Media Consistency
Check”
History-Info Check that the history of
Consistency processes such as FCR PRIMA
Check Console login/logoff, access to
studies, image storing or printing,
and backup or restoring, has not
been altered.
“13.14 History Information
Consistency Check”
13 Auto-Logoff Set up to enable/disable
Settings automatic logoff. If you select
automatic logoff, set the time to
automatically logoff.
“13.15 Automatically Logoff”
Marker Setting Register and delete user
markers.
“13.16 Adding/Deleting User
Marker”
Preset Setting Assign preset settings to the
keypad keys.
“13.17 Preset Settings”

13.3 Setting the Exposure Menu and
Study Menu
Creates, edits or deletes exposure and study menus for CR studies.
● What is a Study Menu?

A study menu is a consolidation of exposure menus used in a series of studies.
If you register frequently used menus as study menu, such as “Chest biplane”, it is not necessary to
select two kinds of exposure menus such as “Chest, FRN P→A” and “Chest, LAT”.
Examples: <Work Flow>
If a study menu was selected If an exposure menu was selected
Select “Chest biplane” Select “Chest, FRN P→A”
The two menus “Chest, FRN P→A” and

Process “Chest, FRN P→A”
“Chest, LAT” appear.
Process “Chest, FRN P→A” Select “Chest, LAT”
Moves automatically to “Chest, LAT” Process “Chest, LAT”
Process “Chest, LAT” End
End
Indicates that the screen
changes automatically.
13

13.3.1 Setting the Exposure Menu
Adds newly created exposure menus to the “Exposure/Study Menu” or editing the existing menus.
Also, this section discribes how to delete exposure menu.
■ Operation Windows ■ Creating New “Exposure Menu”

A new exposure menu can be created by
● “Menu Setting” copying and editing the information of an
existing exposure menu.
(A)
Select an exposure menu with an exposure format
(region, positioning) similar to the exposure menu
you want to create. For example, if you want to
create an exposure menu for a chest X-ray, select a
similar chest X-ray exposure menu. If you select an
exposure menu not similar to a chest X-ray in this
(B)
case, you can select an exposure menu for the head
(C) (D) and created a new menu out of it, the read images
resulting from this menu may not be suitable for
● “Exposure Menu Setting”

radiographic interpretation.
(E) 1. Click an exposure menu in the “Exposure/

Study Menu” (A).
→→Registerred exposure menus are displayed in the
(F) order of the study menu code.
2. Select the exposure menu to be copied.

→→The color of the selected exposure menu reverses.
(G)
You can do the same by clicking an exposure
menu in the “Exposure/Study Menu” and in the
“Display Setting”.
3. Click [New] (B).

→→The “Exposure Menu Setting” window opens.
13
4. Enter the “Extended Menu Code”, “Exposure
Menu Name“, and “MPM Code“ in the upper
part of “Exposure Menu“ window (E).

Input Items
Items Contents
Extended A code not yet in use is displayed.
Menu Code *1 To change the code, enter up to 16
characters.
Exposure Enter an exposure menu name up
Menu Name *2 to 64 characters.

• MPM code
Items Contents
The MPM code is a four-digit code to manage the
MPM Code. The code of the original exposure exposure menus. This code determines EDR
menu is set. Select a code which is
(function for automatic density and contrast
not used yet from the pull down
menu. correction) and the image processing parameters.
If the selected code has already 1st digit: Any character to determine EDR.
been assigned to another exposure 2nd digit: Set any number or character from 0 to 9
menu, this exposure menu will be or A to F. EDR does not change
displayed in the “Related Menu”
regardless of changes made in the
field. In this case, select another
unused code so that the “Related number or character of this digit.
Menu” field becomes empty. 3rd digit: Represents the exposure region.
0: Cephalic region 4: Abdominal region
1: Cervical region 5: Pelvic region
2: Thoracic region 6: Upper limb region
*1 The characters * @ ` cannot be used.
3: Mammary region 7: Lower limb region
However, the space can be used but a code which
consists of solely space is not allowed. 4th digit: Represents the exposure method.
*2 The characters * @ cannot be used. 0: General radiography
However, the space can be used but a menu name 1: Contrast radiography
which consists of solely space is not allowed. 2: Laminagraphy, Others
The following is an example of how to assign an
MPM code to a new menu.
When creating a new menu named “Pelvis
• Extended Menu Code Oblique” with slightly reduced density from “Pelvis
The extended menu code is a code to manage the General” (MPM Code: 0500):
exposure menu. If several exposure menus are
Copied Pelvis General (MPM Code: 0500)
copied from the same exposure menu, they will Exposure
have the same MPM code as the exposure menu Menu
that was copied. Exposure menus having the
Extended Pelvis Oblique (MPM Code: 05X0)
same MPM code also have the same EDR (a Exposure ↑
function to correct the density and contrast Menu For X, enter any number
automatically) and image processing parameters. from 1 to 9 or any
Therefore, even if the extended menu code is character from A to F.
different, EDR and image processing parameters
are the same.
The following are examples of extended menu
codes and MPM codes when you attempt to create
a new menu for cervical spine front, cervical spine
side, cervical spine RAO, and cervical spine LAO,
using a copy from cervical spine (MPM Code:
0107). (Because the EDR and display parameters
are stable, it is not necessary to change them
here.) 13
Image
Menu MPM Extended
EDR Processing Remarks
Name Code Menu Code
Parameters
Menu Cervical Different exposure

0107 0107-0000
copied spine parameters such as
reversal of image or
film marks can be set
Cervical
0107 0107-0001 in each menu.
spine front Same Same
If you change the
Cervical
0107 0107-0002 display parameters of
Extended spine side Cervical spine, all
Menu Cervical
0107 0107-0003 menus will be changed
spine RAO
accordingly.
Cervical
0107 0107-0004
spine LAO

5. Set each item in the “CR/DR common setting” Items Contents
(F).
Image The image position is displayed.
Position Do not change this parameter.
Film Mark *2 Select the Film Mark (letters on the
film) from the pull down menu.
“13.4 Setting the Character String
Annotated on a Film”
Function Select a function (Special Processing)
from the pull down menu.
RT Routine Processing
Selection Items
TS Temporal Subtraction Processing
Items Contents ES Energy Subtraction Processing
Flip Image Select from [Frontal Image], [Vert],
WS Whole Spine (Entire Spine Exposure)
[Horiz], [Horiz+Vert]
Processing
• For PA exposure, select [Horiz].
• Normally, the [Frontal Image] or PS IVP Processing
[Horiz] is selected. TM Tomography Processing
Rotate Select [None] or [Left 90-deg. Image No. of film Select the number of images to be
Image Rotation] prints *1 printed on a film. Select a number
• Normally, this parameter is fixed to between 1 to 9.
[None].
Display Set the display color for the exposure
EDR Mode Select EDR Mode (Image Reading Color menu name.
Sensitivity Setting). Setting
“●Display Color Setting”
Auto Set Image Reading Sensitivity to Auto
mode.
Semi Set Image Reading Sensitivity to
Semiauto mode. *1 The value can be entered directly using the
Fix Set Image Reading Sensitivity to Fix keyboard.
mode. *2 You can do the same by entering up to 10
When selecting this mode, enter S characters directly using the keyboard.
Value (4 to 20047). Use the arrow
button to change the value under S
Value.
Manual Select this checkbox for manual EDR
6. Set each item in the “Setting for CR” (F).
processing. This setting is valid only if
the Image Reader has the manual
EDR processing function.
S Value Set the S-value.
EIt Set the value for the Exposure Index
becoming the target.
13 Film Select the film reference orientation
Reference for film printing.
Orientation • Landscape Selection Items
• Protrait
Items Contents
This parameter is applicable only to
Detailed-Img Change the image processing
the 1-image format (203 x 254mm)
Processing conditions of the exposure menu
and 2-image format (383.5 x 383mm).
Parameter
If you want to print with a 90-degree “●Detailed-Img Processing
Setting
rotated image on the film, select Parameter Setting”
Portrait.
SS/CS Set the CS (contrast shift) and SS
Film Edge Select a color for the film edge (image density).
(frame). Click the “Up” or “Down” arrow
• Transparent button to change the value.
• Black Values cannot be entered directly
Film Size The film size is displayed. from the keyboard.
Do not change this parameter.

Items Contents ● Display Color Setting
CS The image contrast can be
changed by parameter assigned 1. Select a color for the exposure menu name
as coefficient of gradation curve. displayed in the “Exposure Menu Name”.
Set within *0.5 to *2.0.
SS The image density can be
changed by assigning a
coefficient to the reading
sensitivity parameter.
Set within /2.0 to *2.0.
Pixel Density Select a pixel density for the
image.
Standard Print or save the image with low
Density pixel density.
This reduces the size of the
stored image file. →→The colors already selected as candidates for the
High Density Print or save the image without exposure menu name are displayed in this
changing the pixel density. “Display Color Setting” window.
Number of Select number of division

division exposure. 2. In the “Display Color Setting” window, click
exposure [More Colors...].
Image reading This parameter is intended for the →→The “Color” window opens.
mode. functions to be introduced in the
future, and is currently not yet
available. (Changes to the 3. Select any desired color and click [OK].
parameter will not take effect.)
FR Reading 5 lines/mm
SR Reading 10 lines/mm
GR Reading 10 lines/mm
GPR Select ON (enable) or OFF
Processing (disable) for GPR (Grid Removal
Processing ).
FCR Cassette From the pull down menu, select
Type the IP logical read size for the
cassette type Image Reader.
In the “Color” window, create a unique color by

7. Complete the settings and click [OK] (G). adjusting a color selected from the “Basic colors”.
Add this newly created color to the “Custom colors”
→→The new exposure menu will be displayed in the
pallet by clicking [Add to Custom Colors] to make it
operation window once you have registered it in selectable as a display color for the exposure menu
the “Display Setting”.
“13.3.3 Setting the Display Menu Group”
name.
13
→→The selected color is displayed. The “Color”
window and “Display Color Setting” window close.

● Detailed-Img Processing Parameter For CR (GP/MFP setting)
Setting
The following parameters determine the image
processing conditions.
• GP (Gradation Processing) parameter
• RP (Spatial Frequency Processing)
parameter
• DRC (Dynamic Range Control Processing)
parameter
• TAS (Tomographic Artifacts Suppression
Processing) parameter
• FNC (Frequency Noise Control Processing)
parameter (optional)
• MFP (Multi-objective Frequency Processing)
*1 DRC has priority over TAS in image processing.
parameter (optional) This means that setting DRC to “ON” will
Certain image processing sequences have no automatically set TAS to “OFF”.
effect when carried out concurrently. Each
image processing sequence takes the course
shown below.
2. Change the parameter values.
“● Image Processing Parameters”
DRC GP/MFP
FNC
To restore standard parameters set as default (by
FUJIFILM Corporation), click [Return to Default].
TAS GP/RP
Please note that this button is disabled when the
○ : Exclusive control standard exposure menu set as default (by
FUJIFILM Corporation) are not displayed in the
[Related Menu] field.
1. Select “GP/RP/DRC setting” tab or “GP/MFP
setting” tab.
3. Complete the settings and click [OK].
→→The “Image Processing Parameter Setting”
“GP/MFP setting” tab is displayed only when MFP window closes.
(Multi-objective Frequency Processing) parameter
(optional) is installed.
For CR (GP/RP/DRC setting)
13 2.
3.

● Image Processing Parameters Enhancement of DR
compression filter
GP (Gradation Processing) Parameter
processing.
Slope of the gradation curve. Characteristics Change the enhancement
Characteristics DRE level of processing in
It adjusts the image contrast.
accordance with the
GA -4.0 to -0.1 specified value.
Value range 0.1 to 4.0 (except for 0.0, 1
decimal place) Value range 0.0 to 2.0 (1 decimal place)
Shape of the gradation curve.

Yield the same result as TAS (Tomographic Artifacts Suppression
Characteristics Processing) Parameter
GT changing the γ-curve of X-ray
films. One-dimensional
Value range A to Z (26 types) unsharpness mask.
Characteristics
ORN Sets the most effective size
Center density of gradation for the tomographic angle.
curve slope.
Characteristics Value range 0 to 9 (10 sizes)
GC Changes GA according to the
density specified here.
Processing direction of
Value range 0.30 to 2.64 (2 decimal places) one-dimensional
unsharpness mask.
Parallel shift of the gradation Characteristics
Set in accordance with the
curve.
Characteristics reading direction and orbital
GS Change the display density of ORD direction of tomography.
the entire image.
0: The orbit is at right angles to
Value range -1.44 to 1.44 (2 decimal places)
the green line of the cassette.
Value range
1: The orbit is parallel to the
RP (Spatial Frequency Processing) Parameter green line of the cassette.
Enhanced frequency band for Enhancement level of one-
frequency processing. dimensional unsharpness
Characteristics The frequency band specified mask processing.
RN here is subjected to Characteristics Change the enhancement
enhanced processing. ORE level of processing in
accordance with the
Value range 0 to 9 (10 types) specified value.
Shape of the enhanced curve 0.0 to 9.9 (1 decimal place)
corresponding to the density Value range
10 to 16 (no decimal places)
of the image.
Characteristics By changing this parameter,
RT the enhancement level can MFP (Multi-objective Frequency Processing)
be adjusted within a certain Parameter (optional)
density region. Enhanced frequency band
Value range F, P to Z (12 types) for frequency processing.
Characteristics This f requency band is
Enhancement of frequency MRB subjected to enhanced
processing.
processing.
of processing in accordance Value range A to Z (26 types) 13
RE with the specified value.
Shape of the enhanced
0.0 to 9.9 (1 digit after curve corresponding to the

Value range decimal point) density of the image.
10 to 16 (no decimal places) Characteristics By changing this parameter,
MRT the enhancement level can
be adjusted within a certain
DRC (Dynamic Range Control Processing) Parameter
density region.
Mask size of DR compression. Value range F, P to Z (12 types)
Characteristics Set the processing region to
DRN match DRT. Enhancement of frequency
processing.
Value range 0 to 9 (10 sizes) Change the enhancement
Characteristics
A DR compression filter type. level of processing in
Characteristics Set the density region for MRE accordance with the
DRT processing. specified value.
Value range A to T (20 types) 0.0 to 9.9 (1 decimal place)
Value range
10 to 16 (no decimal places)

MFP (Multi-objective Frequency Processing)
Parameter (optional)
■ Editing Exposure Menu
This is a DR compression
frequency type.
1. Select “Exposure Menu” in the “Exposure/
Characteristics Study Menu” field (A) .
MDB Set the processing region to
match MDT. →→Currently registered exposure menus are
Value range A to Z (26 types) displayed.
A DR compression filter type.
MDT
Characteristics Set the density region for 2. Select the exposure menu to be edited.
processing.
→→The color of the selected exposure menu reverses.
Value range A to T (20 types)
Enhancement of DR 3. Click [Edit] (B).
compression filter
processing. →→The “Exposure Menu Setting” window opens.
Characteristics Change the enhancement
MDE level of processing in
accordance with the
4. Perform settings.
specified value. Perform editing by the same procedure as
creating a new exposure menu.
Value range 0.0 to 2.0 (1 decimal place)
“■ Creating New Exposure Menus”
*1 The parameters for GP (GA, GT, GC, GS) are 5. Complete the settings and click [OK] (G).
the MFP gradation processing parameters. For
■ Deleting Exposure Menu

characteristic, refer to the description for GP.
FNC (Frequency Noise Control Processing)

Parameter (optional)
Parameter used to determine • Please note that you cannot restore the standard
the scale of the noise control
exposure menu set as default (by FUJIFILM
processing according to the
Characteristics Corporation) once you delete it.
X-ray exposure dose. A is for
FFC general exposure and is for • User-created exposure menus cannot be restored
linac graphy. either and need to be re-created.)
Value range A to Z (26 types)

1. Select “Exposure Menu” in the “Exposure/
Parameter used to determine
Study Menu” (A).
processing according to the →→Currently registered exposure menus are
Characteristics frequency component. The displayed.
FNB closer to A, the more
suppression by low
frequencies. 2. Select the exposure menu to be deleted.
13 Value range A to Z (26 types) →→The color of the selected exposure menu reverses.
Parameter used to determine
3. Click [Delete] (B).

Characteristics
FNT processing according to the
→→The selected exposure menu is deleted.
image density.
Value range A to Z (26 types)
Parameter used to determine Exposure menus registered in the “Display
the scale of the noise control Setting” (C) can be deleted.
Characteristics
FNE processing. Effectiveness of
the processing is changed. “13.3.3 Setting the Display Menu Group”
Value range 0.0 to 1.0 (1 decimal place)

13.3.2 Setting Study Menu
Creates a new study menu. Edits or deletes an existing study menu.
■ Operation Windows ■ Creating New Study Menu

● “Display Setting” 1. Select “Study Menu” in the “Exposure/Study
Menu” (A).
→→The selected exposure menus will be displayed in
(A) the Selected Menu list. Exposures will be made in
the order the menus were selected.
2. Click [New] (B).

→→The “Study Menu Setting” window opens.
(B) 3. Set items in the left side of the “Study Menu

Setting” (E).
(C) (D)
● “Study Menu Setting” Items

Study Menu
Contents
Enter the Study Menu Code
(E) Code *1 within 16 characters.
Study Menu Enter the Study Menu Name
Name *2 within 64 characters.
(F) Film Print Format Select Film Print Format
(optional). (optional).
Default Images are printed on film in the
format specified in each
exposure menu.
2 ON 1 The two images are printed on a
film in the 2 On 1 format.
Click [Film Print Position Setting]
(G)
and set the position of each
image printed on a film.
4 ON 1 The four images are printed on a
film in the 4 On 1 format.
Click [Film Print Position Setting]
and set the position of each
image printed on a film.
Film Print Set the positions of images
Position Setting
(optional)
printed on a film.
It is necessary if [2 On 1] or [4
13
On 1] is selected in the [Film
Print Format].
“●Film Print Position Setting”
Display Color Set a display color for the study
Setting menu name.
“●Display Color Setting”
*1 The characters * @ ` cannot be used.

However, the space can be used but a code which
consists of solely space is not allowed. A code
which has been assigned to other study menus
cannot be used either.
*2 The characters * @ cannot be used.
However, the space can be used but a menu name
which consists of solely space is not allowed.

4. Select the exposure menu to be registered in ● “Film Print Position Setting”
the “Exposure Menu List” and click .
If the [2 On 1] or [4 On 1] under [Film Print
→→The selected exposure menus will be displayed in Format] is selected, sets the position of each
the “Selected Menu list”. The order will be the image printed on a film.
exposures order.
To change the order of selected exposure menus,

select the respective exposure menu and click (H)
(UP) / (Down).
5. Complete the settings and click [OK] (G).

(I)
Print position of images on a film
Repeat this operation to select multiple exposure
menus (Up to 32 menus).
Buttons Functions
(Previous) Display the previous or next film

images.
(Next)
Clear the selected image from the

(Clear)
layout of images.
Cancel All Clear all current images.

After having cleared all images,
arrange the images one by one as
follows.
Exposed Order Arrange the images in the order of
exposure. Exposure order refers to
the order in which exposure menus
are displayed in the “Registered
Exposure Menu list”.
1. Select an exposure menu in the “Registered

Exposure Menu list” (H) and move it to a
desired position by dragging with the mouse.
13
Dragging it across [ (Previous) ] or [ (Next) ]
will display the film images of the previous or next
film.

→→The image is arranged, and “Registered” is
displayed next to the rearranged image in the
● Display Color Setting
“Registered Exposure Menu list” (H). 1. Select a display color for the study menu
Repeat the above procedure to arrange the name.
rest of the images. After having rearranged the
images, confirm that all exposure menus are
displayed as “Registered” in the “Registered
Exposure Menu list”.
2. Change the image position on the film if

necessary.
Select the image whose position is to be
changed and move it to the desired position by
dragging with the mouse.
→→The colors already selected as candidates for the
study menu name are displayed in this “Display
Color Setting” window.
• Restore the study menu name to its original color

or change to another color by repeating the above
procedure.
• The color selected in the “Display Color Setting”
window is applied to the display of study menu
name in the Study Menu Name field when clicking
[OK] in the “Study Menu Setting” window.
→→The selected image is exchanged with the image
currently displayed at the desired position.
2. Click [More Color...] to set a color not available
in the “Display Color Setting” window.
3. Remove the image if necessary.
Select the image to be cleared and move it to →→The “Color” window opens.
the by dragging with the mouse.
3. Select the desired color either in the “Basic
colors” or “Custom colors” pallet in the
“Color” window and then click [OK].
13
→→The selected image is removed from the layout.
In the “Color” window, you can create a unique color

The removed images needed to be selected again.
by adjusting a color selected from “Basic colors”. You
can add this newly created color to the “Custom
colors” pallet by clicking [Add to Custom Colors] to
make it selectable as a display color for the study
menu name.
→→The “Color” window and “Display Color Setting”

window close. An study menu name in the “Study
Menu Name” on the “Study Menu Setting” window
will be displayed by the selected color.

■ Editing Study Menus ■ Deleting Study Menus
1. Select a “Study Menu” in the “Exposure/
Study Menu” (A). • Please note that you cannot restore the standard
study menu set as default (by FUJIFILM
→→Currently registered study menus are displayed.
Corporation) once you delete it.
• User-created study menus cannot be restored
2. Select a study menu to be edited. either and need to be re-created.
→→The color of the selected study menu reverses.
3. Click [Edit] (B). 1. Select “Study Menu” in the “Exposure/Study

→→The “Study Menu Setting” window opens. Menu” (A).
→→ Currently registered study menus are displayed.
4. Edit settings.
Edit the settings of an existing study menu 2. Select the study menu to be deleted.
using the same procedure as creating a new →→The color of the selected study menu reverses.
study.
“Creating a new study menu“ 3. Click [Delete] (B).
→→The selected study menu is deleted.
5. Complete the settings and click [OK] (G).
Study menus registered in the “Display Setting” (C)

can be deleted.
“13.3.3 Setting the Display Menu Group”
13

13.3.3 Setting the Display Menu Group
Creates new display group names in a menu displayed in the normal operation window. Changes or
deletes existing names.
Also, changes the display position of menus registered in a display group or has them excluded from
display.
■ Operation Windows ■ Creating New Display Menu

Group
● “Menu Setting” (Creating)
(A)
Up to 16 display groups can be set.
When 16 display groups have already been set, no
further new display groups can be created. In this
case, you can delete old and unnecessary display
(B) groups to create new ones.
“●Deleting Display Groups”
● “Menu Setting”(Editing)
(C) 1. Click the tab to which no display group name
has been assigned (A).
→→A blank display group where no menu has been
registered is displayed.
(D) (E) 2. Click [Edit Display Group] (B).
● “Display Group Setting” 3. Assign a name to the display group (F).
• Enter the Display Group Name within 64

(F)
characters.
(G) • The following characters cannot be used:
*, @
4. Click [OK] (G).
Once an exposure menu or study menu has been 13

registered in the newly created display group, it will
be displayed in the normal operation window.
“■ Editing Display Menu Group”
→→The entered name is displayed on the “Display

Group” window.

■ Editing Display Group Menu ● Setting to Exclude Display Group from
Display
● Changing the Display Group Name 1. Click the tab of the display group to be excluded
from display (C) and click [Change Display] (E).
1. Click the tab of the display group name to be
changed (C). →→The color of the clicked tab reverses.
(The background turns black.)
→→The color of the clicked tab reverses.
2. Click [Edit Display Group] (D). ● Adding Display Group to Exposure/

Study Group
3. Change the display group name (F). Click 1. Click the tab of the Display Group in which
[OK] (G).
you want to register the menu.
• Enter the Display Group Name within 64
characters. 2. Display a page with a button that has not yet
• The following characters cannot be used: been used ( : Change Page button).
*, @
3. Select the menu name to be registered from
→→The entered name is displayed on the “Display the list in the Exposure/Study Menu column,
Group” window. and move it to the unused button by dragging
● Deleting Display Groups with the mouse. (The cursor turns into a
hand-shaped pointer.)
1. Click the tab of the display group to be

deleted (C).
2. Click [Edit Display Group] (D).

3. Click [Delete] (G).
4. A message to verify deletion displays.
Click [OK].
4. Release the mouse button at the desired position.
→→The selected display group is deleted.
● Changing the Display Group Position Dragging over the Change Page button allows you to
change the position across pages.
(Sequence)
13 Drag over the Change Page button.
1. Click the tab of the display group position to
be changed (C).
2. Move the tab to the desired position by The page display changes.
dragging with the mouse. Drag to unused button.
(The cursor turns into a hand-shaped
pointer.)
3. Release the mouse button at the target

position.
→→The selected Display Group moves to the dragged
position . The menu is registered to the button.

● Deleting Exposure/Study Menu from ● Changing the Exposure/Study Menu
Display Group Position from Display Group
1. Click the tab (C) of the Display Group in 1. Select the menu whose position you want to
which the menu to be deleted is registered. change.
2. Select the menu whose position you want to
2. Display the page where the menu you want to change and drag it to the desired button. (The
delete is registered ( : Change Page cursor turns into a hand-shaped pointer.)
button).
3. Select the menu to be deleted and drag it to

the . (The cursor turns into a handshaped
pointer.)
3. Release the mouse button at the new

position.
• When moved to a button on which a menu is

already displayed, the positions of the latter menu
and the moved menu are exchanged.
A B B A
Move A to B Positions of A and B
position. are exchanged.
→→The selected menu is deleted.
• Dragging over the [Change Page] allows you to
change the position across pages.
Drag over the Change Page button
The page display changes
Drag to unused button
13
The menu is moved
→→The position of the selected Display Menu

changes.

13.4 Setting the Character String
Annotated on a Film
Film character string refers to the character strings annotated on a film.
The film character string is set in each Exposure Menu for CR studies.
“13.3.1 Setting the Exposure Menu”
This section describes how to newly register, change or delete alternative film marks displayed in the
“Exposure Menu Setting” window.
■ Operation Window ■ Registering/Editing Character

String Annotated on a Film
● “Film Mark Setting” Window
1. Click a button for which character string is to be
(A)
registered or edited (B).
(B) • New Registration
Click a button for which no character string
has been registered.
• Edit
(C) Click the button of the character string to be
edited.
(D) (E) (F)
To display a page other than the current page, click

the [Change Page] (A).
2. Enter up to 10 characters into the “Film

Character String input“ (C).
*, @ cannot be used.
3. Click [Register] (D).

→→The character string entered into the character
string input field is applied to the clicked button.
13 →→Then, registering, editing, deleting, and changing
button position can be performed.
“■Deleting Character String to be Annotated on

Film”
“■Changing Position of a Character String
Button”

■ Deleting Character String to be 3. Release the mouse button at the new
position.
Annotated on Film
→→The selected character string button moves to the
dragged position.
1. Click the button of the character string to be →→Then, registering, editing, deleting, and changing
deleted (B). button position can be performed.
“■Deleting the character string to be annotated
on film”
To display a page other than the current page, click
the [Change Page] button . “■Changing the position of a character string
button”
2. click [Delete] (E).

→→The character string of the clicked button is deleted. • When moved to position on which a character
string button is already displayed, the positions of
→→Then, registering, editing, deleting, and changing
the latter character string button and the moved
button position can be performed.
character string button are exchanged.
“■ Deleting the character string to be annotated
A B B A
on film”
Move A to B Positions of A and
“■ Changing the position of a character string position. B are exchanged.
button”
• Dragging over the [Change Page] button allows
■ Changing Position of a you to change the position across pages.

Drag over the Change Page button
Character String Button
1. Click the desired button.

Drag to unused button
→→The cursor turns into a hand-shaped pointer.
The page display changes
2. Move mouse to the desired button.
The film mark is moved
13
■ Applying Settings to Film Mark

1. Click [OK] (F) after the settings complete.

→→The “Film Character String Setting“ window closes.
The character string entered into the character
string input field is applied to the clicked button.

13.5 Setting of Printing, Saving and
Transmitting Images
Sets the output destination and timing about the image printing, storage, transmission.
• Storing images to a storage disk
• Printing images on film (optional)
• Printing thumbnail images
• Transmitting images to a DICOM server (optional)
■ Operation Window ■ Setting the Output Destination

The destinations to be set are different from
● “Setting destination for image output” the unprocessed FCR images and the others.
Window
Destination
Option
(A)
Film Print
thumbnail images
Printing
DICOM Server
Storage Disk
(B)
Image Types
FCR image
○ ○ ○ ○
(Unprocessed)
Others ○ × ○ ×
(C) ○: Applicable ×: Not applicable
1. Select the image type to be set (A).

Selection Items
Items Contents
FCR image Select to set FCR image
(Unprocessed) (unprocessed)
Select to set images other than
Others
FCR image (unprocessed)
13

2. Click the desired destination (B) and set the ● Output Settings when Saving to Storage
output settings. Disks
Selection Items
Items Contents Both the unprocessed FCR image and the others
Disk Output to storage disk can be set.
“●Output Settings when Saving
to Storage Disks”
Printer Film Print (optional)
“●Output Settings of Film Print
(Optional)”
Thumbnail Print thumbnail images
Images
“●Output Settings of Thumbnail
Images”
1. Set the settings save to disk.
DICOM Transmit to DICOM Server (optional)
Transmission Selection Items
“●Output Settings when
Transmitting to DICOM Server Items Contents
(Optional)” Automatic image Put a check mark to
output *1 automatic save to disk
3. Click [OK] (C) after settings complete. Destination for

data transfer *2
Pre-specified destination
Timing of output *2 Save to disk when verified
Error is displayed when the Automatic image output

is not selected in any of “Disk”, “Printer”, or “DICOM
Transmission” windows. In this case, click [OK] and *1 If the check mark of “Automatic image output“ is
select the “Automatic image output” window in at removed, it can be done manually.
least one of these tabs, and then click [OK] (D) again Save from the “Main” window and “Study
and save the contents to output settings. Operations tab of Study List window”.
→→The “Output Destination Settings” window closes. “Chapter 7 Image Storage from Each Window”
The settings of print, storage and transmission are
saved.
*2 The destination and the print timing cannot be

changed.
13

● Output Settings of Film Print (Optional) ● Output Settings of Thumbnail Images
Only the unprocessed FCR images can be set. Both the unprocessed FCR image and the others
can be set.
Image file
1. Set the settings of film print. XXX.jpg, Patient information file
XXX.bmp XXX.txt
Selection Items (The file format is set when
Items Contents installing the software.)
Automatic image Put a check to automatically
output *1 film print
Destination for Select destination printer
data transfer
Timing of output.
Upon Automatically film print when 1. Set the settings for printing thumbnail images.
verification of study is verified
Selection Items
a study
Upon Automatically film print when Items Contents
completion exposure is completed Output Annotation * 1
Put a check mark to output
of an with annotation
exposure:
Output after Re- Put a check to automatically
verified film print after re-verified
*1 No matter the check mark is put or not, the marker
Output Annotation*2 Put a check to automatically
will be saved.
film print with annotation added
“Chapter 7 Image Storage from Each Window”
*1 If the check mark of “Automatic image output“ is

removed, it can be done manually.
Print from the “Main” window, “Image Viewer”, and
“Study Operations tab of Study List window”.
13 “Chapter 8 Image Print from Each Window”
*2 Save with the marker no matter the check is put or
not.

● Output Settings when Transmitting to
DICOM Server (Optional)
Only the unprocessed FCR images can be set.
1. Set the transmission to DICOM Server.

Selection Items
Items Contents
Automatic image Put a check mark to
output *1 automatically transmit to
DICOM server
Destination for Select destination
data transfer
Default Pixel Transmit the images with low
Count pixel density. This reduces
the size of the transmitted
image file.
Max Pixel Transmit the images with the
Count highest pixel count
Timing of output *2 Transmit the images to
DICOM server when the
study is verified
*1 If the check mark of “Automatic image output“ is

removed, it can be done manually.
Save from the “Main” window and “Study
Operations tab of Study List window”.
“Chapter 7 Image Storage from Each Window”
13
*2 The output timing cannot be changed.

13.6 Auto-Determine Settings
Sets the auto-determine time period and the studies are determined automatically after exposure.
The study status changes automatically from “Completed” to “Verified”.
• To automatically verify the study, select the auto verify user using the “Client Utilities”.
If you do not select it, the study will not be verified automatically.
User setting of auto-determine: “12.5.1 User Information Maintenance”
• While the study is shown on the “Image Viewer”, the study is not verified automatically even if automatic
verification of study is specified.
The study is not verified automatically while the information about the study whose status is “Finish Exposure” is
being modified. When display on the “Image Viewer” is closed or the study information is being modified, the study
will be verified automatically after lapse of the predetermined time.
■ Operation Window Items Contents

Study is verified Study is verified after a period of
● “Automatic verification of a study” after the set time time after exposure.
followed by
exposure (B)
Time required Set from 1 to 720 minutes.
(A) for automatic The study will be automatically
(B) verification of a verified within a period
study (C) equivalent to the entered time
up to double that time at
maximum. *3
(C)
*1 If you deselected the Automatically verifying a

study check box, you can verify the study manually
(D) from the “Image Viewer” window or “Study List”
window.
“4.4.4 Completing and Verifying Studies”
■ Set the Auto-Determine Time

“5.10 Saving/Verifying/Suspending Images ”
*2 Studies unable to be verified upon exposure
completion will be verified after the specified time
Period has elapsed.
13
*3 If 30 is specified for the “Time required for
1. Set the auto-determine time period. automatic verification of a study”, the study will be
automatically verified in 30 minutes to 1 hour after
Selection Items checking
Items Contents
Automatically Put a check mark to 2. Click [OK] (D).
verifying a study*1 automatically verify after
→→The automatic verify setting is saved and the
(A) exposure is completed.
“Automatic Verify Setting” window closes.
Completion of Verification and completion are
an exposure done at the same time.
and its
verification take
place
simultaneously
(B)* 2

T
13.7 Image Deletion Settings
The images which for viewing purpose will be deleted after a period of time.
Changes the period of time of temporary storage of FCR PRIMA Console.
■ Operation Window ■ Changing the Time Period for

Data Storage
● “Settings to Delete Images”
1. Select Time period for data storage (A).
The storage period can be set to 0.5 to 30 days.

(A)
2. Click [OK] (B).

→→The changed storage period is saved, and the
“Image Deletion Setting” window closes.
(B)
13

13.8 Backup Notification Settings
If not backs up data for a period of time, a backup notification message opens when FCR PRIMA
Console starts up.
■ Operation Window ■ Setting Backup Notification

● “Settings for issuing a backup notification” 1. Set the backup notification message.
Selection Items
Items Contents
(A) lssuing a backup To disable the backup prompt,
(B) notification (A) deselect the Issuing a backup
notification check box
Time interval The interval can be set to 1 to
between 90 days
notifications.(B)
(C)
*1 Remove check that the backup message does not

displays.
Perform backup periodically.
2. Click [OK] (C).

→→The backup notification setting is saved, and the
“Settings for issuing a backup notification” window
closes.
13

13.9 Automatically Startup Settings
Sets the client applications so that it automatically starts after startup of the server applications.
■ Operation Window ■ Client Application Startup

Settings
● “Setting startup of the client’s
application”
1. Put a check mark to “Automatic Startup”
check box to activate the client application to
automatic startup after the server application
(A) starts up.
The client application does not start automatically if

remove the check.
(B)
To start up, double-click the icon in desktop.
2. Click [OK] (B).

→→Automatic startup of the Client Application is
saved, and the “Setting startup of the client’s
application” window closes.
13

13.10 Prefix Display Settings
Adds a prefix to the patient’s name to be displayed on the FCR PRIMA Console.
■ Operation Window ■ Setting Patient Prefix

● “Setting a title of respect prefixed to a 1. Set patient prefix.
patient name”
Items Contents
Displaying a title Put a check mark to display
(A) of respect of a prefix to patient name
patient (A)
(B) A title of respect Enter up to 4 characters
of a patient to be
displayed (B)
(C) 2. Click [OK] (C).

→→The prefix setting is saved, and the “Setting a title
of respect prefixed to patient a name” window
closes.
13

13.11 Setting Image Incidental Information
Display Contents
Even though the contents in the “Setting to Display Image-incidental info” window has changed, it does not have
any influence on “Image Viewer” window.
The display of image attribute information can be set in the “Image Viewer” window.
“11.2.3 ■Setting the Attribute Information”
13

13.12 Loading Patient Information
Creates patient information files to be read with Notepad or Microsoft Excel and loads it into FCR
PRIMA Console.
■ Patient Information Input Sex
Format Usable Male : M or m

characters Female : F or f
Uses the following format to create a file for If unknown, etc. : O or o
importing patient information.
* If a different character or no character at all was
Patient ID
entered for Sex, O (Other) will be registered.
Number of Up to 64
characters Date of birth
* Depending on the setting made
when installing the software, the Input format i yyyy.MON.dd (1972.JUL.15)
missing number of characters in the (Ex.) ii yyyy.mm.dd (1972.07.15)
Patient ID will be filled with zeros.
iii MON.dd.yyyy (JUL.15.1972)
For example, if 10 characters were
specified for the Patient ID and 1 is iv mm.dd.yyyy (07.15.1972)
entered, the number is registered as v dd.MON.yyyy (15.JUL.1972)
0000000001. vi dd.mm.yyyy (15.07.1972)
Usable All characters except: * If the entered is invalid, date of birth will be
characters “, #, %, &, ‘, +, ?, \, /, *, @, <,
registered as a blank.
The space can be used, but a patient
ID which consists of solely space is
not allowed.
* Make sure to enter the Patient ID.

* If the Patient ID format does not conform to the
above, the patient information in that row will not
be registered.
Patient information name

Number of Up to 64 characters
characters
Usable All characters except:

characters *, @
* If the patient information name format does not

conform to the above, the patient information in
13 that row will not be registered.
Patient name
Number of Up to 64
characters
Usable All characters

characters
* If the patient name format does not follow the

above rule, the patient information in that row will
not be registered.

■ Creating a File of Patient 3. Save the file.
1) Select [File] (F) – [Save As...] (A) from the
Information to Import
menu bar.
Creates an import file with an editor such as
Notepad or Microsoft Excel to import patient
information.
● Creating with an Editor such as Notepad

Microsoft Notepad is used in this example.

1. Start the editor.
2) Specify the storage folder of the file in the
2. Enter patient information. Save in.
Enter patient information in the format shown 3) For [Save as] type, select [All].
below. 4) Enter the extension .csv after the file
ID No . <Tab> Patient Information Name <Tab> Patient Name<Tab>Sex<Tab>Date of Birth <Enter> name. (Example: Patient.csv)
ID No . <Tab> Patient Information Name <Tab> Patient Name<Tab>Sex<Tab>Date of Birth<Enter> 5) Click [Save].
ID No . <Tab> Patient Information Name <Tab> Patient Name<Tab>Sex<Tab>Date of Birth <Enter>
••••
• Make sure to enter the Patient ID. If the Patient ID

is not entered, the patient information in that row
will not be registered.
• If the wrong input format is used, the patient
information in that row will not be registered.
“■Patient Information Input Format”
• Press the Tab key on the keyboard each time →→The file is saved.
between Patient ID, Patient Information Name,
Patient Name, Sex and Date of Birth. A space
entered with the Space key on the keyboard will
cause an error when importing.
• <Tab> and <Enter> refer respectively to the Tab

and Enter key on the keyboard.
• After Date of Birth, press the Enter key to insert a
line feed. Enter the patient information for 1
individual in 1 line. 13
• To leave some items blank, press the Tab key on
the keyboard repeatedly.
Example: Leaving Patient Name blank

1234567890<Tab>Brown
James<Tab><Tab>M<Tab>20020705

● Creating with Microsoft Excel 3. Save the file.
1) Select [File] (F) – [Save As...] (A) from the
1. Start Microsoft Excel. menu bar.
2. Enter patient information.

Input Items
1 2 3 4 5
1 Patient Patient Patient Sex Date of
ID information name birth
name
2 Patient Patient Patient Sex Date of
ID information name birth
name
3 Patient Patient Patient Sex Date of 2) Specify the storage folder of the file in the
ID information name birth Save in.
name 3) For [Save as] type, select [Text] (Tab
4 ......... delimited) (*.txt).
4) Enter the extension .txt after the file
name. (Example: Patient.txt)
5) Click [Save].
• Make sure to enter the Patient ID. If the Patient ID

is not entered, the patient information in that row
will not be registered.
• If the wrong input format is used, the patient
information in that row will not be registered. There are cases that the following messages are
“■Patient Information Input Format” displayed in accordance with the PCs you use.
Check the contents and perform the following
operations.
• Enter the patient information for one individual in • If the following message displays,
13 one line. The selected file type does not support
• To leave some items blank, leave the workbooks that contain multiple sheets.
corresponding cell blank.
1) Click [OK].
Example: Leaving “Patient Name” blank
1234567890 Taro M 1972.07.15 • If the following message displays,
…txt may contain features that are not
compatible with Text (Tab delimited). Do you
want to keep the workbook in this format?
1) Click [Yes] (Y).
→The created file saves.

4. Change the extension of the stored file name
to .csv. (Example: Change Patient.txt to
■ Importing Patient Information
Patient.csv.) Uses an import file to import patient
information to the FCR PRIMA Console
database.
• There are cases that the following message is
displayed in accordance with the PCs you use.
Check the contents and perform the following • To import patient information, you must first create
operations. an import file.
If the following message displays, ”Creating a File of Patient information to Import”
If you change a file name extension, the file may • If the FCR PRIMA Console database already
become unusable. Are you sure you want to contains patient information under the same
change it? Patient ID, that information will be overwritten.
1) Click [Yes].
→The file name extension is changed. 1. Click [Patient Database Import] (A) in the
• If the file name is displayed without extension, the “Main Menu” window.
file name cannot be changed. In this case,
proceed as follows to change the file name.
1) Select [Organize] (T) – [Folder and Search
Options] (O) on the menu bar.
(A)
→The “Folder Options” window opens. 2. Select a patient information import file and
2) Click “View” tab. then click [Open].
3) Remove the “Hide extensions for known file
types” check box in the Advanced settings list.
4) Click [Apply] (A).
13
→→A message displays. When import of patient

information is completed, the message disappears.

13.13 Media Consistency Check
When the storage disk is full, carries out a consistency check and then copies the disk.
For example, whether the information on the storage disk has been altered.
“■ Copying a Disk”.
■ Operation Windows ■ Media Consistency Check

● “Consistency Check (Select Drive)”
Insert the disk for consistency check into the disk
drive beforehand.
1. Select the drive in which a storage disk

(A) inserted (A).
2. Click [OK] (B).

→→The consistency check starts as soon as the
storage disk is detected.
(B) The “Consistency check (Checking)” window
opens for checking the drive name, disk name and
● “Consistency Check (Checking)” the progress of the consistency check.

→→When the consistency check is completed, the
“Consistency check (Check result)” window opens.
3. Click [Data stored on a file] (C) and the result

is saved.
→→The “Save as” window opens.
Select a save destination and click [Save]. The
result file of consistency check
(MediaValidationResult.csv) is saved.
You can check the following items for each
image in the consistency check result file.
● “Consistency check (Check result)” Display Items
Window Items Contents
13 Result The result of the consistency check

is displayed. *1
• OK: The image information has
not been altered.
• NG: The image information has

been altered.
• - : Check has failed.
PatientID ID No. of the image.
PatientName Patient name of image.
StudyDate Date when the study was

conduced.
(C) (D)
Instance Registration sequence of exposure
Number menu.
MenuName Name of exposure menu.

Items Contents ■ Result and Remedy
Correction_ User who conducted the study or The messages given on the next page will
Person corrected the study information.
open depending on the result of the check.
Upd_Datetime Time and date when the study Read the message and take the necessary
information was last updated. action.
Correction_ Device on which the study was
Message Disk is normal.
Server conducted or the study information
was corrected. Action Disk consistency verified.
No action required.
Record_ Indicate whether the images on the
In-use_Flag disk are active/inactive.
• Active : Valid image on the disk. Message The drive specified for integrity check is
• Inactive : Invalid image on the not connected or does not exist.
disk.
Action Make the following checks, and then
Version_ Version number of image display repeat the operation.
Number information and patient information. • Make sure the drive is ON.
• Make sure the drive is connected to
FileName Name of image file.*2
the FCR PRIMA Console main unit.
DetailInfo Explanation of consistency check If the same message displays after
result. repeating the operation, take the
• Normal : following actions.
Normal 1) Perform “Restore Disk” referring to
• The DICOM file is missing. : “12.8 ■Restoring Disks after
Data was deleted.
Mismatch Occurred”.
• The history file is missing. :
2) Repeat disk consistency check.
Consistency check information
file was deleted.
• Inconsistency between DICOM Message Disk for integrity check is not loaded.
file and history file. :
Data consistency not verified. Action Make the following checks, and then
• Not able to read the data. : repeat the operation.
Data reading failed. • Make sure the storage disk is
inserted into the drive.
Message Integrity of management information

*1 The message “Consistency of management not verified.
information not verified” means that only
Action Integrity of management information on
management information is not consistent, but the
image storage disk not verified. (Image
image information is consistent. information is normal.)
Therefore, the result is indicated by OK.
Proceed as follows.
*2 Relative path from disk drive root path. 1) Start the “Client Utilities” and
perform “Restore Disk”.
“12.8 ■Restoring Disks after
Mismatch Occurred”
13
2) Repeat disk consistency check.

Message Integrity of image information not
verified
Action Integrity of image information on image

storage disk not verified. (Management
information is normal.)
1) Save the result of consistency
check.
Consistency Check: “■Disk
Consistency Check”
2) Store images whose Result is NG in
the integrity check result file again to
a new disk.
For storing images, see “7.3
Saving to Storage Disks”
Message Integrity of management and image

information not verified.
Action Integrity of management and image

information on image storage disk not
verified.
Proceed as follows.
1) Restore Disk
2) Repeat disk integrity check.
Message Integrity check was aborted in response

to [Cancel].
Action This message is displayed when

[Cancel] is clicked in the “Consistency
check-Check result” window.
To close the “Consistency check result”
window, click [Finish].
Message Integrity check ended abnormally.

Check the drive used for integrity check
or check the disk.
Action Make the following checks, and then

repeat the operation.
13 • Make sure the drive is ON.
• Make sure the drive is connected to
the FCR PRIMA Console main unit.
• Make sure the storage disk is

inserted into the drive.
If the same message displays after
repeating the operation, take the
following action.
1) Restore Disk
2) Repeat disk integrity check.

13.14 History Information Consistency Check
Checks that the history of processes such as FCR PRIMA Console login/logoff, access to studies,
image storing or printing, and backup or restoring, has not been altered.
■ Operation Window ■ History Information

Consistency Check
● “History-Info Consistency Check” Window
1. After verifying the history (A), click [OK] (B).
→→The “History-Info Consistency Check” window
closes.
(A)
(B)
13

13.15 Automatically Logoff
Sets the FCR PRIMA Console whether to automatically log off after a period of time.
■ Operation Window ■ Setting Automatic Logoff

● “Automatic logoff setting” 1. Set Time-to-automatic logoff (A).
Selection Items
Items Contents
(A) Automatically log Check FCR PRIMA Console if
off automatically logged off after a
period of time.
Time-to-automatic Set a time between 1 to 30
logoff minutes.
(B)
2. Click [OK] (B).
→→The automatic logoff setting is saved, and the
“Automatic Logoff Setting” window closes.
13

13.16 Adding/Deleting User Marker
Adds or deletes user marker used in image annotation.
■ Operation Windows ■ Removing User’s Markers

● “Add or Remove Marker” Window 1. Select the marker (D) to remove.
(A)
Use to switching pages.
(B)
2. Click [Remove Marker] (B).

3. Click [OK] (E).

(C) 4. Click [OK] (C).
(D) →→The “Add or Remove Marker” dialog closes.
● “Confirmation” Dialog
(E)
■ Registering User’s Markers

1. Click [Add Marker] (A).
2. Select the marker to register and click [Open].
13
→→The registered marker displays on the “Add or

Remove Marker” dialog.
3. Click [OK] (C).

→→The “Add or Remove Marker” dialog closes.

13.17 Preset Setting
Preset settings can be assigned to the keypad keys (1 to 9).
■ Operation Window ■ Assigning Preset

● “Preset Setting” 1. Select the position of the key (A) to which
(A) (B) preset settings are to be assigned and the
Preset Name (B).
2. Click [OK] (C).

→→The preset settings are set and the “Preset
Setting” window closes.
(C)
13

Chapter 14
Troubleshooting
14.1 PC does Not Start.............................................................. 14-2
14.2 PC is Inoperative................................................................ 14-3
14.3 PC does Not Shut down.................................................... 14-5
14.4 Event Indicator is Blinking................................................ 14-6
14.5 Error Message is Displayed.............................................. 14-7
14.6 Image is Streaked.............................................................. 14-8

when Trying to Operate the Screen................................... 14-9
14.8 Window Disappears......................................................... 14-10
14.9 Disk cannot be Removed................................................ 14-11
14.10 Toolbar is Not Displayed on “Image Viewer”................ 14-12
14.11 Study was Scheduled or Registered

but Study List is Unchanged...........................................14-13
14.12 Unintended Studies Appear on Study List.................... 14-14 14

14.13 Unable to Print or Save Images from “Image Viewer”.... 14-15
Troubleshooting
14.14 The “Webpage unavailable while offline”

Dialog Appeared............................................................... 14-16

by Screen Operation During PDI Creation....................................... 14-17

14.1 PC does Not Start
If the PC does not start, check the following:
Is the power cord disconnected? Check that the power cord is firmly connected to the electrical outlet.
Otherwise, your PC may not start. In such cases, turn off the main
power switch, firmly insert the power cord in the outlet, and turn on
the power one more time.
When the main power is supplied, the POWER lamp illuminates in

green.
Is the monitor switch turned If the monitor switch is not turned ON, nothing will be displayed on
ON? the screen even if the PC power switch is turned ON. Turn ON the
monitor switch.
When the monitor power is supplied, the monitor lamp illuminates

in blue.
14
Troubleshooting

14.2 PC is Inoperative
If the PC is inoperative, check the following:
Is the PC frozen? If nothing happens when you press a key or move the mouse, your
PC is frozen. Take the following actions:
● For Windows 7
1) Press the “Ctrl”, “Shift”, and “ESC” keys at the same time to
display the “Windows Task Manager”. Click the “Process” tab in
the screen to display a list of currently running applications.
Right-click “PatientPortal.exe” in the list, and click “End Process
Tree” to display the “Terminate this process tree?” Click
“Terminate process tree”. In the same manner, right-click “Hobbit.
exe” from the application list in the “Process” tab, and click
“Terminate process tree” to display the “Terminate this process
tree?” window. Click “Terminate”.
If the mouse is disabled, hold the “Alt” key and press the “Tab”
key to select “Windows task manager”, use the “Tab” key to
select “Process”, use an arrow key to select “PatientPortal.exe”
or “Hobbit.exe”, hold the “Shift” key and press the “F10” key to
display the “Terminate process tree” window, and then press the
“Terminate” key.
2) Click the “Start” button and then the “Shutdown” button. At this
time, if “N programs have not closed” appears, select the
“Shutdown” button, and then click “Yes”.
If the mouse is disabled, hold the “Ctrl” key and press the “Esc”
key, use an arrow key to select “Shutdown”, and then press the
“Enter” key.
3) If there is no response after performing Steps 1) and 2), hold
down the PC power button for few seconds to turn OFF the
power.
4) If the power cannot be turned OFF by the action above,
disconnect the power cable to turn OFF the power.
● For Windows 10
1) Press the “Ctrl”, “Shift”, and “ESC” keys at the same time to
display the “Task Manager”. Click the “Details” tab in the screen
to display a list of currently running applications. Right-click
“PatientPortal.exe” in the list, and click “End Process Tree” to
display the “Terminate the process tree of PatientPortal.exe?”
window. Click “Terminate process tree”.
If the mouse is disabled, hold the “Alt” key and press the “Tab”
key, and then hold the “Alt” key and press the “Tab” key to select
“Details”, use the “Tab” key to move to the list, use an arrow key
to select “PatientPortal.exe”, hold the “Shift” key and press the
“F10” key to select “Terminate process tree”, and then press the
“Enter” key.
2) Click the “Start” button, “Power” in the menu, and then click the
“Shutdown” button. At this time, if “Close n programs and
14
shutdown the PC” appears, select the “Shutdown” button.
Troubleshooting
If the mouse is disabled, hold the “Ctrl” key and press the “Esc”
key, use the “Tab” key to select “Power”, and then press the
“Enter” key. From the menu that has appeared, use an arrow key
to select “Shutdown” and then press the “Enter” key.
3) If there is no response after performing Steps 1) and 2), hold
down the PC power button for few seconds to turn OFF the
power.

If this message displays, there is no recovery method. This
message is not caused by any operational error by the user. It is
displayed because the program could not continue normal
operation.
Force shutdown according to the message displayed in the window.
All current data are lost when you force shutdown your PC.
14
Troubleshooting

14.3 PC does Not Shut down
If the PC does not shut down, check the following:
Is there a cassette in the Image FCR PRIMA Console cannot quit if there is a cassette remaining in
Reader connected to the FCR the Image Reader.
PRIMA Console? Remove the cassette from the Image Reader and quit FCR PRIMA
Console.
Is the PC frozen and If the PC cannot be shutdown, keep pressing the power button for at
inoperative when you try to least 4 seconds. The power will turn off.
shutdown?
If the PC could not shutdown by normal shutdown procedure,

SCANDISK will start automatically next time you turn on the PC.
This will take some time, but normal screen will eventually appear if
there is no problem.
14
Troubleshooting

14.4 Event Indicator is Blinking
If the event indicator is blinking, check the following:
Is the event indicator blinking? If the event indicator is blinking, there is an error.
Check the cause of error as follows and take the appropriate action:
1) Click the indicator of Event.
Indicator of Event
The “Event” window appears.
2) Click the event to be checked and click [Details].
The “Error Detail” window opens.
3) Check the “Detailed Information” and take appropriate action.
14 “10.7 Verifying Events (Errors, Warnings or Information)”

Troubleshooting

14.5 Error Message is Displayed
When an error message displays in the FCR PRIMA Console window, check the contents and take the
appropriate action. Should you encounter any trouble you cannot handle, contact our official dealer.
An example of an error message displayed on the “Warning” dialog and a description of each display
area are given below:
Error message displayed in the “Warning” dialog. (Example 1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
Error message displayed in the “Warning” dialog. (Example 2)
(1)
(2)
(3)
Display Items
Items Contents
(1) Title Display Field The title of an error is displayed.
(2) Message Display Field Displays an error code and a message prompting the user to perform an
operation.
Selection menu is displayed. Select the button of the operation to be performed in

(3) Selection-menu Display
response to the message.
14
Troubleshooting

14.6 Image is Streaked
This section describes the action to take when a streak appears on an image scanned with the Image
Reader.
If the scanner or IP is dirty, a streak may appear as shown below.
Streak
Note that the streak on this example is

enhanced for the sake of clarity.
■ Remedial Action
If a streak appears on the image, clean the scanner and IP.
• Scanner cleaning
Clean the scanner with the “Utilities”.
Scanner Cleaning: ”10.2 Verifying the Status of Image Reader and Cleaning Procedures”
• Remove dirt from the surface of the IP and then wipe with a dry cloth.
If the dirt cannot be removed by dry wiping, wipe the surface using a small amount of dehydrated
ethanol.
The IP should be dried completely before using.
CAUTION
• Be very careful not to damage IPs.
• Never use plastic erasers and other solvents.
14 • Do not scratch IP surfaces with finger nails.

• Do not use excessive dehydrated ethanol or clean the IP too frequently, otherwise the IP’s
edges may become yellow.
Troubleshooting
IP cleaning: “Image Reader Operation Manual”.

when Trying to Operate the Screen
If the “Auto Logoff Setting” of the “User Utilities” is set to “Automatically log off”, FCR PRIMA Console
will log off automatically when it is not used for a predefined period.
A message displays if you try to operate the FCR PRIMA Console after it is logged off automatically.
In such cases, perform the following:
Automatic Logoff: “13.15 Automatically Logoff”
The following message displays Click [OK] to display the “Login” window and log in again.
when you try to operate the FCR
PRIMA Console after it is logged Log in Procedure: “2.5.1 Starting up FCR PRIMA Console”
off automatically.
Not logged on
○Log in and then re-execute.
*Contact our official dealer if the same
symptom recurs even after operation has
been retried.
14
Troubleshooting

14.8 Window Disappears
While operating FCR PRIMA Console, you may accidentally click [X] at the right side of the title bar or a
window may be hidden behind the active window.
In such cases, perform the following:
Did you click [X] on the title bar If you accidentally closed the client application, double-click the
and close the window? client application (FCR Web) icon to start it once more.
“2.5.1 ■Starting up the Client Application”
Is the window hidden behind Window hidden behind another window is displayed minimized on
another window? the taskbar. (Example: ).
Click (Example: )on the taskbar to redisplay the
window.
14
Troubleshooting

14.9 Disk cannot be Removed
Perform the following when the disk cannot be removed:
Did you try to remove the disk On the PC’s control drive, be sure to eject the disk from FCR PRIMA
by pressing the EJECT button Console because the eject button is locked while FCR PRIMA
on disk drive? Console is in operation.
If you use an application other than the FCR PRIMA Console to
eject the disk, the PC may freeze or the disk may become unusable.
Remove Disks: “2.8 ■Ejecting Disk”
Handling Disks: “2.7 Before Using Disks”
14
Troubleshooting

14.10 Toolbar is Not Displayed on “Image
Viewer”
Perform the following if the toolbar disappeared because you changed the “Display Settings” on the
toolbar when operating the “Image Viewer”.
Did you delete the list of “Tab”, Display the “Display Settings” window as shown below and set the
“Group”, and “Tool button” toolbar to display.
displayed in the “Settings for 1) Select “Customize” - “Tool bar” in the “Image Viewer” window,
viewer tool bar”? and the “Set viewer tool bar” window opens.
2) Set the tabs, groups, and tool buttons displayed in the toolbar.
3) Click[OK].
Select “Other” - “Return to the standard settings” to return the

toolbar to the initial condition.
14
Troubleshooting

14.11 Study was Scheduled or Registered
but Study List is Unchanged
Perform the following if the study status on the study list remains unchanged after scheduling or
registration of study, modification of the study menu, or verification of image processing on “Image
Viewer”.
The display status of the study Click in the study list, and update the study list to the latest
list may not change immediately status.
after scheduling or registration
of study, modification of study
menu, or image processing on
the “Image Viewer”.
14
Troubleshooting

14.12 Unintended Studies Appear on Study
List
Perform the following if studies appeared on the study list as a search result is unintended.
Is the search query for study list Check the search query display column for study list.
selected properly?
Seacrch study: “4.3.1 Searching for Studies”
14
Troubleshooting

14.13 Unable to Print or Save Images from
“Image Viewer”
Perform the following if you cannot print, save, or transmit images displayed on the “Image Viewer”.
Are there images to be printed Please register images into “Image cart” before performing printing
or saved registered in the or saving.
“Image Cart” of the “Image
“7.2.2 Starting from the “Image Viewer””
Viewer” window?
“8.2.2 Starting from the “Image Viewer””
14
Troubleshooting

14.14 The “Webpage unavailable while
offline” Dialog Appeared
Perform the following when “Webpage unavailable while offline” dialog appeared.
“Webpage unavailable while offline” dialog may appear.
■ Actions
• When “Webpage unavailable while offline” dialog appeared
Check that the LAN cable is firmly connect to the PC and then click [Connect].
• When [Stay Offline] is clicked on “Webpage unavailable while offline” dialog appeared
Close all FCR PRIMA Console windows and select [Start] - [Programs] - [Internet Explorer] to restart
Internet Explorer. Select and uncheck [File] - [Work Offline] from Internet Explorer and then restart
FCR PRIMA Console.
Activate FCR PRIMA Console: “2.5.1 Starting up FCR PRIMA Console”
14
Troubleshooting

by Screen Operation During PDI Creation
When the screen operation process is being performed during PDI creation, the system may become
“Not Responding” status. This section describes the countermeasures against the case in which the
system becomes “Not Responding” status.
The reason of being “Not Responding” status is that the PC becomes overload by the PDI creation processing.
Therefore, the OS becomes unable to respond for the operation processing on the screen.
This case may occur when outputting the study with multiple images, so do not perform the screen operation while
creating the PDI files of studies with multiple images.
■ Remedial Action
● For Windows 7
If the following window opens, select “Wait for the program to respond” and close the message window.
If the program has ended accidentally with “Check for a solution and close the program” or “Close the program”,
restart the client application and create the PDI file again.
14
Troubleshooting

14
Troubleshooting

Chapter 15
Daily Inspection and
Maintenance
15.1 Daily Inspections and Maintenances............................... 15-2
15.2 Backing up Information of Patient, Setting, Log,

and Report..........................................................................15-3
15.3 Maintenance Record Sheet............................................... 15-9
15.4 Maintenance and Inspection...........................................15-10
Daily Inspection and Maintenance
15

15.1 Daily Inspections and Maintenances
To maintain the system components in good condition, performs the daily inspections and
maintenances.
As for the daily inspections, make sure that the system starts up normally and communicates properly
with devices connected to the system. Be sure to clean the monitor daily.
Also, back up the patient information and other data at least once a week.
Use the Maintenance Record when performing daily inspections and maintenances.
Fill in the following items in the Maintenance Record:
• Check : Fill in the inspection date and result.
• Cleaning : Fill in the date the monitor was cleaned.
• Backup : Fill in the date the patient information and other data was backed up.
Use the USB flash drive for backup.

When performing backup, be sure to check that no storage disk is inserted in the drive.
15

15.2 Backing up Information of Patient,
Setting, Log, and Report
Backs up the data on the PC at least once a week for restoration in case of a server failure.
If the server fails, uses the backup data for restoration.
■ Operation Windows ● “Select folder” Window (when Backing

up and Collecting Maintenance Logs)
● “Select Server Application Behavior” Dialog
(L)
(A)
(N)
(B)
(M)
● “User authentication” Window ● “Select folder” Window (when Restoring)

(C)
(O)
(D)
(E)
(Q)
● “Main Menu” Window (P)
(F)
● “Browse For Folder” Window
(G)

(H)
(R)
(I)
● “Select Information for Backup” Window

(S)
(J)
15
(K)

● “Restore” Window ■ Starting up the “Backup Utilities”
When you attempt to start the “Backup Utilities”, the
FCR PRIMA Console closes. Check that all of the
windows which started from FCR PRIMA Console
(T) are closed before starting the “Backup Utilities”.
Also check that no one else is using FCR PRIMA
Console.
1. Double-click the server application icon

→→The “Select Server Application Behavior” window
(U)
opens.
● “Collecting Logs for Maintenance 2. Click [Backup Utility] (A) and click [OK] (B).
Purpose” Window
The “Backup Utilities” can be started up from back up

notification message. When you click [OK] on the
backup notification message, the “User authentication”
window opens. The backup notification message can
be set in the “User Utilities”.
“13.8 Backup Notification Settings”
→→A message is displayed and then the “User

authentication“ window opens.
(V)
3. Select the login user name in (C).
(W)
4. Enter the password in (D) and click [OK] (E).
You can continue using FCR PRIMA Console.

“2.5 Starting up and Exiting”
→→When the user is authorized, the “Main Menu”

window opens.
15

■ Backing up
To delete the log information after backup completes,
The following information can be backed up.
put a check mark to “Delete log information after
• Patient information
backup completes”. Log information excluding the IP
• Settings use count is deleted after backup completes.
• Log information
• Report information
Insert USB flash drive for backing up into the 3. Click [Start] (K).
PC. →→The “Select folder” window opens.
Display Items
Items Contents
When backing up to a disk:
• Use an unformatted disk or disk containing only Select folder*1 Backup destination folder
backup data created according to the procedure
Necessary disk space/ The amount of space
described here.
free space necessary for backup and
FUJIFILM Corporation shall not be responsible for the free space in the
data damage caused by using a disk containing backup destination
data other than backup data. specified at Select folder
Control the disk after backup as backup media. Do field
not store data other than backup data created by
any method other than that described in this
subsection.
• When backing up to a disk, remove the disk by *1 To change the backup destination, click [Browse]
operation from the indicator. (L). When the “Browse For Folder” window opens,
select a folder (R) and then click [OK] (S).
“2.8 Setting up Disks” To backup USB memory, connect the USB memory
to PC and select the USB memory as backup
destination.
1. Click [Backup] (G) in the “Main Menu”
window.
→→The “Select Information for Backup” window 4. Check the “USB flash drive” (M) and then
opens. click [OK] (N).
→→A message “Insert the backup disk into the target
2. Put check marks to backup information (J). drive” is displayed.

Selection Items
5. Click [OK].
Items Contents
Patient Patient information registered in FCR

information PRIMA Console main unit (PatientData. If the save destination disk does not have sufficient
cab) free space, a message is displayed. Click [OK] and
stop backup. Insert a disk with sufficient free space
Setting Exposure menu settings and image
information processing parameters (MenuData.cab) and click [OK] on the “Select Folder” window once
more.
System settings and “User Utilities”
settings (SystemData.cab)
→→When backup completes, a message is displayed.
FCR PRIMA Console user settings
(UserData.cab)
Explanation for the report

15
(ExplanationData.cab)
Setting for the report

(ReportDataSet.cab)
Log FCR PRIMA Console log information

information (LogData.cab)
Report Report information along with the image

information (ReportData.cab)

6. Click [OK]. ■ Restoring
→→Returns to “Main Menu” window.
In this case, the patient information and system setting

When backup completes, the BackupInfo.ini file
information can be restored to the point of backup, but
containing the backup status is saved.
changes made after backup are not restored.
BackupInfo.ini file contains the FCR PRIMA Console
version, backup date and time, application name,
backed up file name, and backed up file version. 1. Insert the backup USB flash drive to be used
for restoration in the drive.
7. Remove the USB flash drive containing the 2. Click [Restore] (G) in the “Main Menu”
backup data.
window.
→→The “Select Folder” window opens.
Leaving the disk in the drive may result in an error.
Remember to record the backup date and other 3. Click [Browse] (O).
necessary information on the label of the USB flash →→The “Browse For Folder” window opens.
drive.
4. Select the folder subject to restoration which
is going to be used (R), and click [OK] (S).
→→The “Browse For Folder” window opens.
5. Check the selected folder (P) and then click

[OK] (Q).
→→The “Restore” window opens.
6. Select the restore information (T).

Selection Items
Items Contents
Patient Information Restores the patient

information registered in FCR
PRIMA Console main unit
Report Restores the report

Menu Setting Restores the exposure menu

information settings and image
processing parameters
System configuration Restores the system settings

Information and “User Utilities” settings
User Information Restores FCR PRIMA

Console user settings
Explanatory Restores print output

Information description
15 Report setting Restores the report setting
• If the selected folder does not contain the backup

file, “No backup available” is displayed. This item
cannot be restored.
• Backup Information at the bottom of the window
can be used to check the backup date and FCR
PRIMA Console version at the time of backup.

7. Click [Start] (U). ■ Collecting Maintenance Log
In case a machine failure occurs, our official
If no backup file exists, a message is displayed. dealer may ask you to collect the log for
Click [OK] and repeat folder selection. maintenance.
→→When the restoration completes, a message is

displayed. • Perform this operation only when requested by our
official dealer.
8. Click [OK]. • When you collect the log for maintenance, a partial
→→Returns to the “Main Menu” window. log file (Study.txt) containing only the log data
related to personal information is created on the
desktop, allowing you to check whether personal
9. Remove the USB flash drive used for restoration. information has been deleted by verifying its
content. After completion of the check, be sure to
delete the Study.txt file.
Leaving the disk in the drive may result in an error.
• If the log is to be collected by our official dealer,
you do not need to perform log collection. In this
case, log will be collected after obtaining your
agreement.
1. Click [Collecting logs for maintenance

purpose] in the “Main Menu” window.
→→The “Collecting Logs for Maintenance Purpose”
window opens.
2. Select the collection method.
Select the [Delete personal information off of the

logs] to delete patient name, patient date of birth,
and user name when saving log.
3. Click [Start].

→→The “Select Folder” window opens.
Display Items
Items Contents
Select folder*1*2 Log save destination folder
Necessary disk space/ The amount of space

free space*3 necessary for saving log
and the free space in the log
save destination specified at
“Select folder” field
15
*1 To change the backup destination, click [Browse]
(L). When the “Browse For Folder window” opens,
select a folder (R) and then click [OK] (S).
*2 The desktop is initially displayed.

*3 If there is insufficient free space, change the save
destination.

4. Check the “selected folder” (M) and then click
[OK] (N).
■ Shutting down the “Backup
Utilities”
→→When log collection completes, a message is
displayed.
1. Click [Finish] ( I ).
5. Click [OK]. →→The “Main Menu” window closes and the “Backup
→→Returns to “Main Menu” window. Utilities” shuts down.
6. Open the Study.txt file on the desktop and

You can continue using FCR PRIMA Console.
check the presence of personal information.
“2.5 Starting up and Exiting”
Open the file with Notepad or Microsoft Excel. If the

[Delete personal information off of the logs] is
selected in step 2., no personal information is
contained in this file.
7. Delete the Study.txt file from the desktop.

15

15.3 Maintenance Record Sheet
We recommend you to periodically check the followings so that device can always operate normally.
Make a copy of this record sheet each time for periodical check.
● Check
Check Description Frequency User Check Result
/
/
Does the system start up normally? Daily
/
/
/
Is the normal communication /
possible between the connected Daily
equipment? /
/
● Cleaning
Equipment to be Cleaned Frequency Date of Cleaning
/
/
Monitor Daily
/
/
● Backup
Backup Item Frequency Backup Date
/
/
Patient information Weekly
/

/
/
/
Setting information Weekly
/
/
/
/
Log information Weekly
/
/
/ 15
/
Report information Weekly
/
/

15.4 Maintenance and Inspection
■ Maintenance and Inspection Items Assigned to Specified Dealer

For periodical inspection of the equipment and necessary arrangements, consults with our official
dealer or local representative.
Items for Maintenance

1. The institution where the equipment is installed is responsible for its use and maintenance.
2. Users or authorized dealers must inspect and maintenance the equipment and parts periodically
because the machine failure and bad effects on images may occur.
Items of maintenance by users
Items of daily and periodic inspection Frequency Effects if no maintenance
1) Normal start up/shut down of the Daily Normal images may not be retrieved
equipment and normal communication
with the connected equipment
2) Clean monitors Daily Difficulty of reading process may occur
3) Back up the data of patient information Weekly System may delete an important data
etc.
Items of maintenance by dealers
Items of daily and periodic inspection Frequency Effects if no maintenance
1) Inspection of an operation log by error By year Operation failure may occur
2) Image confirmation By year The readouts of images may adversely

affect image reading
3) Confirmation of image saving function By year Images may not be saved properly
4) Practice of problem diagnostic tool By year Operation failure may occur

5) Inspection of each unit By year Operation failure may occur
Frequency of periodic maintenance and changing period of periodic exchange parts may different
depends on the amount of use and hours of daily operation.
The maintenance of the equipment by the authorized dealer differs depends on contents of the
maintenance agreement.
For details on the maintenance of the equipment by the authorized dealer, contact us or our authorized
dealer.
See an attached document of this main unit.
15

Appendix A
Main Specifications
A.1 Specifications...................................................................... A-2
A.2 External View and Weight.................................................. A-5
Main Specifications
FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K A-1

A.1 Specifications
The specification of the system may subject to change without prior notice.
■ PC
PC Power Supply Conditions
(HP ProDesk 600 G4 SFF) Power supply : AC 90 to 264 V
Power consumption: Max. 46W
Frequency : 50 / 60 Hz
Environmental Conditions
(1) Operating
Temperature : 10°C to 35°C
Humidity : 10%RH to 90%RH (No dew condensation)
(2) Not operating
Temperature : -30°C to 60°C
Keyboard USB keyboard
Mouse USB mouse

Main Specifications
A-2 FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K

■ Standard Monitor
24” (1920 x 1200) Electrical
Color LCD monitor Power supply : AC 100 to 120 V / 200 to 240 V
(FlexScan EV2456) Power consumption: Standard 12W
(1) Operating
(2) Not operating
17" (1280 x 1024) Electrical

(HP P174) Power consumption: Standard 12W
(1) Operating
(2) Not operating
19" (1280 x 1024) Electrical

Color High-contrast LCD Power supply : AC 100 to 120 V / 200 to 240 V
monitor Power consumption: Max. 21W
(FlexScan S1934-H) Frequency : 50 / 60 Hz
(1) Operating
(2) Not operating
Main Specifications

■ DIN Standard-Compliant Monitor
21" (1200 x 1600) Electrical
(RadiForce RX250) Power consumption: Max. 79W
(1) Operating
(2) Not operating
21" (1200 x 1600) Electrical

Monochrome LCD monitor Power supply : AC 100 to 120 V / 200 to 240 V
(RadiForce GS220-CL) Power consumption: Max. 100W
(1) Operating
(2) Not operating
21" (1536 x 2048) Electrical

Monochrome LCD monitor Power supply : AC 100 to 120 V / 200 to 240 V
(RadiForce GX340-CL) Power consumption: Max. 100W
(1) Operating
(2) Not operating
■ Touch Panel Monitor

Electrical
Power supply : AC 100 to 120 V / 200 to 240 V
Power consumption: Max. 42W
Main Specifications
(1) Operating
(2) Not operating

A.2 External View and Weight
The external view and weight of the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) are shown below.
Width (mm) Depth (mm) Height (mm) Weight (kg)
PC (HP ProDesk 600 G4 SFF) 95 296 270 Approx. 4.5
Standard Monitor
24” (1920 x 1200)

Color LCD monitor 531 190 351 to 510 Approx. 5.7
(FlexScan EV2456)
17" (1280 x 1024)

Color LCD monitor 375 190 386 Approx. 3.6
(HP P174)
19" (1280 x 1024)

Color High-contrast LCD
405 205 406.5 to 506.5 Approx. 5.6
monitor
(FlexScan S1934-H)
DIN Standard-Compliant Monitor
21” (1200 x 1600)

Color LCD monitor 376 208.5 522.5 to 604.5 Approx. 10.4
(RadiForce RX250)
21” (1200 x 1600)

Monochrome LCD monitor 376 208.5 522.5 to 604.5 Approx. 9.9
(RadiForce GS220-CL)
21” (1536 x 2048)

Monochrome LCD monitor 376 245.5 520 to 599 Approx. 10.2
(RadiForce GX340-CL)
Touch Panel Monitor
23” (1920 x 1080)

Touch panel monitor Approx. 557 401 to 216 353 to 144 Approx. 6.6
(RadiForce MS236WT)
■ PC
● HP ProDesk 600 G4 SFF
Main Specifications
(Unit : mm)
270 296
95
A
* The illustration of the FCR PRIMA Console (CR-IR 391CL) may differ from the actual external view.\

■ Standard Monitor
● 24” (1920 x 1200) Color LCD monitor (FlexScan EV2456)
531 (Unit : mm)
351 to 510
190
● 17” (1280 x 1024) Color LCD monitor (HP P174)

375 (Unit : mm)
386
190
Main Specifications

● 19” (1280 x 1024) Color High-contrast LCD monitor (FlexScan S1934-H)
405 (Unit : mm)
406.5 to 506.5 205
■ DIN Standard-Compliant Monitor

● 21” (1200 x 1600) Color LCD monitor (RadiForce RX250)
376 (Unit : mm)
522.5 to 604.5
208.5
Main Specifications

● 21” (1200 x 1600) Monochrome LCD monitor (RadiForce GS220-CL)
376 (Unit : mm)
522.5 to 604.5
208.5
● 21.3” (1536 x 2048) Monochrome LCD monitor (RadiForce GX340-CL)

376 (Unit : mm)
520 to 599
209
Main Specifications

■ Touch Panel Monitor
● 23” (1920 x 1080) Touch panel monitor (RadiForce MS236WT)
557 (Unit : mm)
353 to 144
401 to 216
Main Specifications

Main Specifications

Appendix B
PDI Disk Image Display
B.1 PDI Disk Image Display Method........................................ B-2
The PDI disc image display method is shown on the next two pages. If
your customer needs these instructions, copy the proper pages and
hand them to your customer.
FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K B-1

B
■ Launching the Viewer ■ Launching the Viewer (continued)
B-2
Insert the PDI disk into the drive, and launch the viewer. 4. Click “View Image”.
1. Insert the PDI disk into the drive.

→ INDEX.HTM or the viewer is automatically launched
* When INDEX.HTM is not automatically launched,
move to step 2. Click
PDI Disk Image * When INDEX.HTM is launched, move to step 4.
* When the viewer is launched, move to step 5.
Display Method 2. Display the contents of the PDI disk from My Computer.
3. Double-click “INDEX.HTM”.
FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide

Recommended operation environments After the “View Image” is clicked, the “Security
OS : Microsoft Windows XP / Vista / 7 Double-click Warning” window may open.
CPU : Intel Pentium 4 or higher, or a compatible CPU
Click buttons according to the window, and launch
897N101440K
Memory : Windows XP 512MB or over (not less than 1GB is
the viewer window.
recommended)
Windows Vista / 7 1GB or over (not less than 2GB → The “SYNAPSE PD-S viewer License” window opens.
is recommended)
→ The “Portable Data for Image” window opens.
1 2 3
■ Launching the Viewer (continued) ■ Switch to an image desired to view ■ Finishing the Viewer
5. Check the contents of the License, and click [I agree]. Select an image desired to view from the tree structure
shown on the left side, and switch to the image desired Click on the upper right of the window,
to view.
then the viewer window closes.
Click
Click
Select from a tree

structure.
B.1 PDI Disk Image Display Method
→ The viewer
appears.
For the details of operation buttons, click

on the upper right of the window, and refer to the
“PD-S Viewer User Manual”.
4 5 6
Appendix Z
Precautions for Exposure
Z.1 Precautions to Take Before Exposure...............................Z-2
Z.2 Precautions to Take in Each Mode.....................................Z-3

Z.2.1 Precautions for Exposure in the AUTO MODE.............Z-3
Z.2.2 Precautions for Exposure in the SEMI-AUTO MODE....Z-6
Z.2.3 Precautions for Exposure in the FIX MODE.................Z-6
Z.3 Other Precautions................................................................Z-7
FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K Z-1

Z.1 Precautions to Take Before Exposure
This section describes precautions to observe before performing exposure.
It is recommended to use Bucky’s device to remove scatter rays and obtain a high-quality image.
When carrying out exposure using a stationary grid, it is recommended to use a 60 lines/cm grid with
fewer artifacts.
Use a grid whose line direction is parallel to the cassette’s vertical direction (between top and bottom).
Green mark
Top
Bottom
Cassette
Z-2 FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K

Z.2 Precautions to Take in Each Mode
This section describes some precautions that must be followed when making radiographic exposures
in each of the following modes: Auto mode, Semi-auto mode, Semi-X mode, and Fix Mode.
Z.2.1 Precautions for Exposure in the AUTO MODE

In the Auto mode, radiographic images that • Do not set the radiation field extremely
interfere with image reading are obtained in small. Be sure to expose X-rays on one
some cases due to variations in multileaf thirds or more of the length of each side
collimator settings on the X-ray exposure unit of the IP.
and/or the effects of scatter rays. If you • Be sure that each side of the radiation
encounter such cases, please contact your field does not overlap with the contrast
local authorized distributor for consultation and medium. Error will occur if they overlap
advice, and make radiographic exposures in a each other.
different mode such as the Semi-auto mode or
This subsection explains precautions to be
the Fix mode.
exercised regarding “Radiation Field and IP
Here are precautions to take in order to obtain Split Pattern Recognition” processing
stable image quality in the Auto mode: (hereafter referred to as PRIEF) which is
1. Radiation Field and IP Split Pattern performed when you make radiographic
Recognition..............................................(1) exposures in the Auto mode.
2. Depiction of the Cervical Region..............(2) The “S” in PRIEF4S and PRIEF1S is a symbol
3. Depiction of HIP JOINT AXL - 2...............(3) to signify that IP-split recognition is possible.
4. Cautions for “PANTOMO” X-ray There are the following four split-IP exposure
Exposures Using a 10”×12” Cassette......(4) patterns:
5. EDR Image Data Analysis........................(5)
(1) Radiation Field and IP Split Pattern

Recognition
• Be sure that the center (25×25 mm)
Full-IP exposure Half-split IP (vertical) Half-split IP (horizontal) Quarter-split IP
of the IP is in the radiation field. If the
IP is split for multiple exposures, each * When making multiple exposures on a split IP, a
center of the split portions must be split portion(s) may be left unexposed.
covered by the radiation field. Guidance as to which to use: PRIEF4S or
PRIEF1S Table Z-1 shows the relationships
among anatomical regions to be radiographed,
radiographic exposure methods, PRIEF4S and
PRIEF1S. Explanations on PRIEF4S and
PRIEF1S are also provided along with
precautions to take with them.
IP center: 25 mm × 25 mm area
(black rectangles in examples above)
located in the center of the IP
Center of the split portion: 25 mm × 25 mm

area (black rectangles in examples above)
located in the center of each split portion.

[Table. Z-1] At-a-glance guide to availability of (2) Depiction of the Cervical Region
PRIEF4S/PRIEF1S for each anatomical region/ • The radiation field must not include the
exposure method
whole head. Be sure to secure transparent
Contrast portions on both sides of the neck.
Plain Tomography
Medium
4S
Head 4S 4S (1 for
pantomography)
Neck 4S 4S 1S
4S
Chest 4S 1
(1 for esophagus)
4S
Use the “Skull, General” menu to include the
Abdomen 4S (1S for stomach 1
and intestines) whole head in the radiation field.
• For exposure of the pharynx or larynx,
Pelvis 4S 4S 1
be sure that the neck comes to the
Upper
4S 4S 1 center of the radiation field so that the
extremity
frontal and lateral orientations can be
Lower
extremity
4S 4S 1 recognized appropriately.
Notes on PRIEF
[PRIEF 4S] Image area
Used, with some exceptions, for both plain and
contrast medium exposure menus, from head Radiation field
to lower extremities.
• The diaphragm shape will be any convex
polygons including rectangle, circle, ellipse,
track, etc. • In pharynx and/or larynx exposure, do
not use lead characters in the oblique
line section.
[PRIEF 1]
Used to tomography menus for chest,
abdomen, pelvis, upper and lower extremities.
• When the IP is not split and the diaphragm is
closed, adjust the shape so that it is parallel
to the IP side.
• When conducting multiple exposures with a (3) Depiction of HIP JOINT AXL - 2
split IP using the PRIEF 1 menu, • Make sure to position the region of
1) Do not close the diaphragm. interest to the slanted-line area
2) Expose all the split portions of the IP. shown below. Do not collimate further
inside.
[PRIEF 1S]
• Positioning should be done so that
Used to neck tomography and stomach
the condyle and the femur run along
contrast medium menus.
the longer edge. (Do not have them
• When the IP is not split and the diaphragm is
positioned against the shorter edge.)
closed, adjust the shape so that it is parallel
Z to the IP side.
Condyle side 7/12
Femur side
1/12
1/4 1/4

(4) Cautions for “PANTOMO” X-ray Precautions when using the AUTO MODE.
Exposures Using a 10”×12” Cassette Mode type Precautions
• To obtain properly displayed images, As this mode is available on the
set the 10”×12” cassette in the assumption that it extracts
dedicated cassette holder of the information concerning the skin,
exposure unit so that the green mark I secure the positioning so that there
is an area other than the target
on top of the cassette is positioned on where the direct X-rays are
the right side when viewed from the incident.
X-ray tube, as illustrated below. II No special precautions.
Right side III
Be sure to use the Ba contrast
medium.
1. Be sure to secure the positioning
Green mark so that the X-rays are incident
directly in the area outside the
target.
IV
2. As the reading latitude is fixed, it
is necessary to control the tube
voltage as usual according to the
thickness of the target.
10"x12" cassette
As the reading latitude is fixed, it is
• For image output, the “PANTOMO” necessary to control the tube
V
voltage as usual according to the
X-ray exposure menu (M2004) takes
thickness of the target.
only an area of 15×30cm from the
VI No special precautions.
10”×12” exposure area.
If you wish an image be output using VII No special precautions.
the entire 10”×12” area, use the

“PANTOMO-2:T” (7004) exposure
menu.
(5) EDR Image Data Analysis

• Image unevenness appearing when the grid
used for exposure is not correctly positioned in
terms of the bulb, clothes shadow or unevenly
radiated X-ray to the X-ray exposure area can
be referred to as the problems occurring during
the EDR image data analysis, which cause
unstable density on the image. Avoid such
unevenness in the X-ray exposure area as far
as possible.
• If the target includes such materials as
gypsum, denture, etc., stable density may not Precautions for Exposure
be obtained because such materials make it
difficult to analyze EDR image data. In such a
case, use the S-Shift/C-Shift or FIX MODE.
• For multiple exposures with a split IP, make
exposure doses on each portion of the IP as
equal as possible (maximum 1.6 times). In
other words, for multiple exposures, submit
each portion of the IP to the appropriate
exposure dose according to the intended
anatomical region as usual.
Z

Z.2.2 Precautions for Z.2.3 Precautions for
Exposure in the SEMI- Exposure in the FIX
AUTO MODE MODE
The precautions are common to Semi I, II, III or III(**). As reading conditions are fixed, exposure
• Center area of the IP 10 × 10 cm (Semi I) conditions must be controlled in the same way
7 × 7 cm (Semi II) as for conventional X-ray exposure. The reading
5 × 5 cm (Semi III) conditions (sensitivity and latitude) have been
Position the portion you need to display of ten preset according to the relevant menu in the FIX
in each of the 5×5 cm (Semi III (**)) center MODE. Thus, select the exposure conditions
are as of the half-split IPs (both upper and that correspond to that menu.
lower halves and right and left halves) and
the quarter-split IP.
• Never position anything other than the subject in
the above mentioned areas. If anything other
than the subject is positioned in such areas, the
image density will become thinner. In addition, do
not position any metals or artificial bones in such
areas. The image density will become higher if
such an object is positioned in such areas.
• It is necessary to control the tube voltage as

usual according to the subject thickness.
The following precautions should be
observed for Semi IV.
y
b c
a
x
d e
Area Center Coordinate (x:y) cm Size (cm)

a (0, 0) 10×10
b (-5, 7) 6×6
c (5, 7) 6×6
d (-5, -7) 6×6
Z e (5, -7) 6×6
• Do not position transparent portions (area other

than the subject) in the above mentioned five areas.
• It is necessary to control the tube voltage as
usual according to the subject thickness.
The SEMI-AUTO MODE has been preset
around the magnification menu.

Z.3 Other Precautions
Shown below are other precautions to observe when performing exposure.
• When you are changing image processing

parameters, check adequately that such a
change does not affect image reading
adversely. To change standard image
processing parameter settings, verify results
of the changed settings on multiple images
through consultation with the image reading
physician, and then perform exposure.
• When performing exposure of an anatomical
region which is hard to distinguish difference
between the right side and the left side, take
proper measures by, for example, placing
lead characters so that the front and the back
of an image is identified clearly.


Index
Index
FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K 1

Index
A Display lined up
Series Images.............................................. 5-6
Add.................................................................. 5-5 Sub-window.................................................. 5-6
Annotation.............................................. 5-25, 6-4
E
B
Edit
Blackening processing.................................. 5-51 Annotation.................................................. 5-36
Bookmark reference...................................... 5-10 Exposure Menus.......................................... 9-7

Fixed Phrase................................................ 6-9
C Measurement Summary............................. 5-43
Patient Information..................................... 9-15
Consistency check Report........................................................... 6-4
Disk.......................................................... 13-36 Schema............................................... 6-9, 6-10
History Information................................... 13-39 User Group Operational Authorities......... 12-13
Contrast......................................................... 5-14 User Information............................ 12-10, 12-16
Control drive.................................................. 2-18 Events......................................................... 10-11

Exit
D Client Application........................................ 2-13
Client Utilities.............................................. 12-3
Delete
Display Setting Function (Main Window).... 11-2
Annotation.................................................. 5-38
Exposing/Reading...................................... 3-12
Exposure Menus.......................................... 9-8
FCR PRIMA Console.................................. 2-12
Patient Information..................................... 12-6
Free Drawing Function............................... 5-40
Density.......................................................... 5-14
Log off........................................................ 2-13
DICOM Header Information........................... 5-11 NAS/USB-HDD Utility................................... 7-8
DICOM server............................................... 7-10 Server Application...................................... 2-13
Shut down.................................................. 2-14
Disk maintenance........................................ 12-20
Exposure menu............................................. 13-5
Display/Hide
100%-Size Image....................................... 5-15
F
Annotation.................................................... 5-8
Attribute Information..................................... 5-8 Film print.......................................................... 8-7
AutoFit to Window...................................... 5-15
Flow
Cine Display Mode....................................... 5-8
Exposing/Reading........................................ 3-2
FCR-Menus Window................................ 11-11
Image Storage.............................................. 7-2
ID Input Window......................................... 11-5
Print.............................................................. 8-2
Magnifying glass......................................... 5-16
Searching/Referring..................................... 4-2
Index
Patient Information....................................... 5-8

Utilizing System............................................ 2-6
Pixel Scale.................................................. 5-15
Verifying/Processing Images........................ 5-2
Reference Line............................................. 5-8
Free drawing.......................................... 5-39, 6-4
Refer Window........................................... 11-13
Ruler............................................................. 5-8 Free layout...................................................... 8-9
Study List Window...................................... 11-6
Thumbnail Images........................................ 5-7 G
General-purpose file format........................... 7-13
2 FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K

H P
History information...................................... 12-17 Parameter

DRC (Dynamic Range Control
I Processing) Parameters........................ 5-19
FCR Image Processing Parameters........... 5-18
Image attribute information................. 8-12, 11-20
GP (Gradation Processing) Parameters..... 5-19
Image cart....................................................... 5-3 MFP (Multi-objective Frequency
Image output status..................................... 10-10 Processing) Parameters........................ 5-20
Preset Setting............................................. 5-21
Image process............................................... 5-12
RP (Spatial Frequency Processing)
Image Reader....................................... 3-10, 10-5 Parameters............................................ 5-19
Image storage disk........................................ 2-17 Sensitivity, Latitude..................................... 5-20
TAS (Tomographic Artifacts Suppression
Image Viewer................................................... 5-3
Processing) Parameters........................ 5-19
Import
Patient information................................. 3-3, 9-15
DICOM Images........................................... 3-13
Back up...................................................... 15-3
Inactivate/Activate images............................... 9-9
PDI disk................................................ 2-17, 7-16
Indicators....................................................... 10-2
Preset setting................................................ 5-21
Input format
Patient Information................................... 13-32 Q
L Quick Mouse........................................ 5-23, 5-38
Load R
Patient Information................................... 13-32
Read.............................................................. 3-10
Lock............................................................... 2-15
Re-expose..................................................... 9-10
Log off............................................................ 2-13
Reference line................................................. 5-8
M Register
Assigning Preset Keypad Keys................ 13-42
Magnifying glass............................................ 5-16
Exposure Menus.......................................... 9-6
Magnify/Reduce Fixed Phrase................................................ 6-9
Images........................................................ 5-15 Key Images.................................................. 5-9
Sub-window.................................................. 5-6 Patient Information.............................. 3-3, 12-5
Measurement Summary................................ 5-41 Re-exposure Menus................................... 9-10
Report........................................................... 6-4
Move.............................................................. 5-17
Schema............................................... 6-9, 6-10
N User Information......................................... 12-9
User Marker.............................................. 13-41
Index
NAS/USB-HDD.............................................. 10-8 Utilizing DICOM MWM Server

NAS/USB-HDD Utility...................................... 7-7 (Order Information).................................. 3-5
Utilizing DICOM MWM Server
Normal drive.................................................. 2-18
(Patient Information)................................ 3-5
O Register bookmark.......................................... 5-9

Replace
Other disk...................................................... 2-17
Display Position............................................ 5-7
Overlay............................................................ 5-8 Imported Images........................................ 9-11

Report..................................................... 5-3, 8-13 Software keyboard.......................................... 3-4
Back up...................................................... 15-3 Start up
Print.............................................................. 8-2 Backup Utilities........................................... 15-4
Behavior of Server Application................... 2-11
S
Client Application........................................ 2-11
Save Client Utilities.............................................. 12-3
Annotation.................................................. 5-60 Copy Tool................................................... 2-22
Image Processing Result........................... 5-60 Display Setting Function (Image Viewer).... 11-16
Images.......................................................... 7-1 Display Setting Function (Main Window).... 11-2
Measurement Summary............................. 5-45 Editing Function of Study Information.......... 9-2
FCR PRIMA Console.................................... 2-9
Schedule an exposure..................................... 3-9
Free Drawing Function............................... 5-39
Schema.................................................... 6-2, 6-8 Indicators.................................................... 10-4
Select/Arrange................................................. 5-4 NAS/USB-HDD Utility................................... 7-8
Print Dialogs................................................. 8-4
Set
Save Dialogs................................................ 7-3
Automatic Logoff Setting.......................... 13-40
Server Application...................................... 2-11
Automatic Startup Setting......................... 13-29
User Utilities............................................... 13-3
Automatic Verification Setting................... 13-26
Backup Notification Setting...................... 13-28 Storage disk.................................................... 7-6
Behavior on Exposing/Reading................ 11-12 Study menu................................................... 13-5
Displaying Order of Exposure Menus......... 9-16
Study summary............................................... 5-3
Display Menu Group Setting.................... 13-17
Display of FCR-Menus Window............... 11-11 Sub-window..................................................... 5-3
Display of ID Input Window........................ 11-5 Switch.............................................................. 5-5
Display of Image Attribute Information..... 11-20
Display of Refer Window.......................... 11-13 T
Display of Series View.............................. 11-21
Thumbnail images........................................... 5-7
Display of Study List Window..................... 11-6
Display of Toolbar..................................... 11-23 Toolbar.................................................. 5-3, 11-23
Exposure Menu Setting.............................. 13-6 Trimming Processing..................................... 5-55
Film Character String Setting................... 13-20
Font Size (Image Viewer)......................... 11-34 V
Font Size (Main Window)......................... 11-15
Version Information......................................... 2-8
Image Deletion Setting............................. 13-27
Initial Display of Annotation...................... 11-18
W
Initial Display of Main Window.................... 11-4
Output Destination Setting....................... 13-22 Work disk.............................................. 2-17, 7-11
Patient Prefix Setting................................ 13-30
Printing/Saving/Transmitting....................... 9-12
Quick Mouse............................................ 11-29
Index
Report....................................................... 11-24
Simplified Print......................................... 11-30
Study Menu Setting.................................. 13-13
User Images............................................. 12-14
Window processing presets..................... 11-32
Shut down..................................................... 2-14
Simplified Print.............................................. 5-22
4 FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K

Index

ReferenceGuide E

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ReferenceGuide E

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Safety Information

Taking and Reading

Searching and Referring

Using Report Function

Editing Study Information

Verifying with the Indicators

Changing Display Settings

Configuring “Client Utilities”

Setting “User Utilities”

This system is classified as a medical device under EC Directive 93/42/EEC.

ii FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K

■ Basic Page Organization

3. Select the image (B) to be saved.

Image Storage from Each Window

Save to PDI Disks*1

If the selected studies except for “Verified” are

*1 When the buttons (C) are not displayed, operation

FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K 7-3

FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K iii

Indicates information that should be noted.

Indicates information that may be helpful.

Indicates an item that provides details of the procedure or related information.

iv FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K

Chapter 1 Safety Information

1.1 Precautions Before Operating This Equipment............................................. 1-2

Chapter 2 Product Overview

2.1 FCR PRIMA Console Highlights........................................................................ 2-2

Chapter 3 Taking and Reading X-ray of a Subject

3.1 Flow of Taking and Reading X-ray.................................................................... 3-2

vi FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K

Chapter 4 Searching and Referring Studies

4.1 Flow for Searching / Referring ......................................................................... 4-2

FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K vii

5.1 Flow of Verifying and Processing Images....................................................... 5-2

viii FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K

FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K ix

5.10 Saving/Verifying/Suspending Images............................................................ 5-60

Chapter 6 Using Report Function

6.1 Outline of “Report” Window.............................................................................. 6-2

x FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K

7.1 Relationships between Windows and Storage Destinations....................... 7-2

FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K xi

8.1 Printing Types and Flow..................................................................................... 8-2

Chapter 9 Editing Study Information

9.1 Starting up the Editing Function....................................................................... 9-2

xii FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K

Chapter 10 Verifying with the Indicators

10.1 Viewing Indicators and Activating Functions............................................... 10-2

FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K xiii

Chapter 11 Changing Display Settings of the

11.1 Display Settings of the “Main” Window......................................................... 11-2

xiv FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K

11.1.10 Display Settings of “Refer” Window................................................. 11-13

FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K xv

xvi FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K

12.1 Setting Items of “Client Utilities”.................................................................... 12-2

FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K xvii

Chapter 13 Setting “User Utilities”

FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K xix

14.1 PC does Not Start.............................................................................................. 14-2

Chapter 15 Daily Inspection and Maintenance

15.1 Daily Inspections and Maintenances............................................................. 15-2

xx FCR PRIMA Console Reference Guide 897N101440K

Appendix B PDI Disk Image Display